Tekla - Concrete Components Reference - 1 [PDF]

Citation preview

Tekla Structures 2017i Concrete components reference



September 2017 ©2017 Trimble Solutions Corporation



Contents 1



Concrete Detailing ...................................................................... 13



1.1



Seating connections ....................................................................................... 13



1.2



Beam and column connections..................................................................... 25



Seating with dowel (75) ....................................................................................................... 14 Defining bolt hole dimensions ......................................................................................16 Fitting the beam or column (75) ................................................................................... 16 Defining grout (75, 76) ................................................................................................... 17 Chamfering corbels ........................................................................................................ 17 Creating a recess (75, 76) ...............................................................................................18 Defining recess dimensions .......................................................................................... 18 Bearing plate position (75, 76) ...................................................................................... 18 Two-sided seating with dowel (76) .....................................................................................19 Fitting beam or column (76) .......................................................................................... 21 Shaping beam ends (76, 78) .......................................................................................... 21 Seating with dowel to flange (77) .......................................................................................21 Creating a recess (77, 78) ...............................................................................................23 Two-sided seating with dowel to flange (78) .................................................................... 23



Battering connection (13) ................................................................................................... 26 Corbel connection (14) ......................................................................................................... 27 Corbel connection (14): Picture tab................................................................................29 Corbel connection (14): Parts tab................................................................................... 33 Corbel connection (14): Reinforcing bar tab................................................................. 34 Column - beam (14)............................................................................................................... 38 Column - beam (14): Picture tab..................................................................................... 39 Column - beam (14): Column tab................................................................................... 43 Corbels and recesses (82)..................................................................................................... 45 Corbels and recesses (82): Part 1 / Part 2 / Part 3 / Part 4 tab....................................45 Corbels and recesses (82): Configuration tab............................................................... 51 Concrete console (110) ........................................................................................................51 Concrete console (110): Picture tab ............................................................................. 52 Concrete console (110): Parts tab .................................................................................56 Concrete console (110): Connection tab ......................................................................58 Concrete console (110): Parameters tab ..................................................................... 59 Concrete console (110): Anchor rods tab .................................................................... 60 Concrete console (110): Socket tab .............................................................................. 63 Concrete console (111) ........................................................................................................63 Concrete console (111): Picture tab ............................................................................. 65 Concrete console (111): Parts tab .................................................................................65 Concrete console (111): Anchor tab ............................................................................. 68 Concrete console (111): Anchor rods ........................................................................... 69 Concrete console (111): Socket tab ............................................................................... 71 Concrete beam-beam (112).................................................................................................. 72 Picture tab......................................................................................................................... 73 Parts tab............................................................................................................................ 82 Anchors tab....................................................................................................................... 84 Parameters tab................................................................................................................. 85 2



Anchor rods tab................................................................................................................ 86 Socket tab.......................................................................................................................... 98 Rebars in primary tab / Rebars in secondary tab.........................................................99 General tab / Analysis tab............................................................................................. 101



1.3



Panels and walls............................................................................................ 101



Wall to wall connection....................................................................................................... 101 Wall to wall connection: Edge shape tab..................................................................... 102 Wall to wall connection: Extra teeth tab...................................................................... 103 Wall to wall connection: Connectors tab..................................................................... 104 Wall groove seam detail......................................................................................................107 Wall groove seam detail: Edge shape tab....................................................................108 Wall groove seam detail: Extra teeth tab.....................................................................109 Wall groove seam detail: Connectors tab....................................................................110 Anchor (10)........................................................................................................................... 113 Anchor (10): Picture tab................................................................................................. 115 Anchor (10): Anchors tab...............................................................................................117 Anchor (10): Conn profile tab.......................................................................................120 Anchor (10): Bolts tab .................................................................................................. 123 Anchor (10): Cuts tab ................................................................................................... 124 Wall wall teeth (12) ............................................................................................................ 128 Wall wall teeth (12): Picture tab .................................................................................. 129 Wall wall teeth (12): Parts tab ..................................................................................... 131 Wall wall teeth (12): Cut sec tab...................................................................................133 Wall wall teeth (12): Cut prim tab................................................................................ 134 Wall wall teeth (12): Socket tab ................................................................................... 135 Electric box in wall (84)........................................................................................................136 Electric box in wall (84): Picture tab............................................................................. 139 Electric box in wall (84): Parts tab.................................................................................142 Electric box in wall (84): Electric box tab......................................................................143 Electric box in wall (84): Top conn / Bottom conn tab................................................147 Electric box in wall (84): UDA tab.................................................................................. 149 Sandwich And Double Wall.................................................................................................152 Sandwich And Double Wall: Parts tab..........................................................................154 Sandwich And Double Wall: Vertical section tab........................................................ 161 Sandwich And Double Wall: Horizontal section tab...................................................164 Sandwich And Double Wall: Insulation tab................................................................. 170 Sandwich And Double Wall: Outside Shell tab........................................................... 172 Sandwich And Double Wall: UDA tab...........................................................................175 Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam........................................................................................ 176 Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam: Picture tab.............................................................. 178 Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam: Rabbets tab............................................................ 181 Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam: Extra foils tab......................................................... 181 Sandwich Wall Vertical Seam..............................................................................................183 Sandwich Wall Vertical Seam: Picture tab................................................................... 185 Sandwich Wall Vertical Seam: Rabbets tab................................................................. 187 Sandwich wall window........................................................................................................ 190 Picture tab....................................................................................................................... 192 Bottom detail tab / Left detail tab / Right detail tab.................................................. 194 Top detail tab.................................................................................................................. 198 Extra foils tab.................................................................................................................. 202 Additional parts tab....................................................................................................... 203 Connections tab............................................................................................................. 206 Door side detail tab / Door bottom detail tab............................................................ 207 Wall layout tools.................................................................................................................. 211 Wall layout.......................................................................................................................212



3



Modify the wall layout................................................................................................... 219 Wall layout opening....................................................................................................... 223 Wall layout seam............................................................................................................ 226 Wall layout connector.................................................................................................... 229 Wall layout elementation.............................................................................................. 230 Wall layout layer swapper............................................................................................. 232 Customize the wall layout............................................................................................. 233



1.4



1.5



1.6



Formwork components................................................................................ 233



Beam Formwork ................................................................................................................. 234 Beam Formwork: Beam tab.......................................................................................... 235 Beam Formwork: Parameters tab................................................................................ 237 Column Formwork ..............................................................................................................238 Column Formwork: Column tab................................................................................... 240 Wall Formwork..................................................................................................................... 242 Wall Formwork: Panel tab............................................................................................. 244 Wall Formwork: Parameters tab...................................................................................245 General Beam Form............................................................................................................ 246 Beam Form: Parameters tab.........................................................................................248 General Wall Form .............................................................................................................. 249 Wall Form: Parameters tab........................................................................................... 251 General Clamp .................................................................................................................... 252 General Clamp: Parameters tab................................................................................... 253 General Clip.......................................................................................................................... 254 General Clip: Parameters tab........................................................................................255 General Tie........................................................................................................................... 256 General Tie: Parameters tab......................................................................................... 257 General Tie and Clips.......................................................................................................... 258 General Tie and Clips: Parameters tab........................................................................ 260



Openings........................................................................................................ 260



Hole Generation (32) .......................................................................................................... 261 Hole Generation (32): Parameters tab.........................................................................261 Polygon Hole Generation (33)............................................................................................ 263 Polygon Hole Generation (33): Parameters tab..........................................................263



Flooring...........................................................................................................264



Automatic seam recognition (30)......................................................................................265 Seam Applicator...................................................................................................................266 Seam Applicator: Parameters tab................................................................................ 268 Modeling of floor bay (66) ................................................................................................ 268 Examples ....................................................................................................................... 270 Defining slab position .................................................................................................. 273 Defining projection type .............................................................................................. 274 Defining slab profile properties ..................................................................................275 Index list ........................................................................................................................ 275 Adjustment type ........................................................................................................... 276 Profile/Seam width .......................................................................................................277 Sloping slab drainage.......................................................................................................... 277 Sloping slab drainage: Parameters tab........................................................................278 Hollow Core Opening Tool..................................................................................................280 Hollow Core Opening Tool: Parameters tab................................................................281 Hollow Core Opening Tool: Configuration file tab......................................................284 Hollow Core Lifting Loops...................................................................................................284 Hollow Core Lifting Loops: Basic settings tab............................................................. 285 Hollow Core Lifting Loops: Lifting device settings tab............................................... 287 Hollow Core Lifting Loops: Configuration file tab...................................................... 287



4



Floor Tool.............................................................................................................................. 288 Floor Tool: Slab properties tab..................................................................................... 289 Floor Tool: Insulation tab...............................................................................................290 Floor Tool: Bay contour tab...........................................................................................291 Floor Tool: Slab list tab...................................................................................................291 Floor layout.......................................................................................................................... 292 Layer tab..........................................................................................................................294 General tab..................................................................................................................... 295 Advanced tab.................................................................................................................. 297 Default offsets................................................................................................................ 298 Detailing tab....................................................................................................................299 User defined tab.............................................................................................................301 Modifying a floor............................................................................................................ 302 Floor Layout CIP Filler......................................................................................................... 317



1.7



Concrete stairs...............................................................................................318



Concrete stairs (65) .............................................................................................................319 Concrete stairs (65): Stairs tab......................................................................................321 Concrete stairs (65): Step shapes tab.......................................................................... 324 Concrete stairs (65): Landings tab................................................................................326 Concrete stairs (65): Ridges tab.................................................................................... 327 Concrete stairs (65): Stringers tab................................................................................ 330 Concrete stairs (65): Anti-skid/Kick plate tab.............................................................. 332 Concrete stairs (65): Attributes tab.............................................................................. 333 Concrete stairs (65): UDA tab........................................................................................334 Stairwells and elevator shafts (90)....................................................................................334 Stairwells and elevator shafts (90): Defining stairwell properties........................... 337 Stairwells and elevator shafts (90): Defining number of floors and height........... 337 Stairwells and elevator shafts (90): Defining position ...............................................337 Stairwells and elevator shafts (90): Defining length and width............................... 338 Reinforced concrete stair (95)............................................................................................ 338 Parameters tab............................................................................................................... 340 Parts tab.......................................................................................................................... 341 Stairs and landings tab.................................................................................................. 342 Ridges tab........................................................................................................................344 Stringers tab....................................................................................................................346 Anti-skid tab.................................................................................................................... 347 Bar A tab..........................................................................................................................348 Bar B tab..........................................................................................................................348 Bar C tab..........................................................................................................................350 Bar D tab......................................................................................................................... 351 Bar E tab.......................................................................................................................... 353 Bar F tab.......................................................................................................................... 354 Bar G tab......................................................................................................................... 355 Bar H tab......................................................................................................................... 356 Bar I tab........................................................................................................................... 357 Bar J tab........................................................................................................................... 358 Bar K tab.......................................................................................................................... 359 Bar L tab.......................................................................................................................... 360 Mesh picture tab............................................................................................................ 361 Mesh attributes tab........................................................................................................362 Mesh bars tab................................................................................................................. 363 Bottom anchor bars tab................................................................................................ 363 Top anchor bars tab....................................................................................................... 364 Z anchor bars tab........................................................................................................... 365 Landing end bars tab..................................................................................................... 366



5



UDA tab........................................................................................................................... 367 Configuration tab........................................................................................................... 367



1.8



Foundations................................................................................................... 368



Precast foundation block (1028) ...................................................................................... 368 Precast foundation block (1028): Picture tab ............................................................369 Precast foundation block (1028): Parts tab ............................................................... 372 Precast foundation block (1028): Grooves tab ..........................................................372 Concrete foundation (1030)............................................................................................... 373 Concrete foundation (1030): Picture tab..................................................................... 376 Concrete foundation (1030): Parts tab........................................................................ 381 Concrete foundation (1030): Massive tab................................................................... 383 Concrete foundation (1030): Piles tab......................................................................... 385 Concrete foundation (1030): Inj. tube and rebar tab................................................. 386 Concrete foundation (1030): Column tab....................................................................389 Concrete foundation (1030): Stirrups tab....................................................................390



2



Reinforcement........................................................................... 393



2.1



Reinforcement for foundations ..................................................................393



2.2



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement .................................................... 405



Strip footing (75) ................................................................................................................ 394 Strip footing reinforcement properties ..................................................................... 395 Pile cap reinforcement (76) .............................................................................................. 396 Pad footing and pile cap shapes ................................................................................ 398 Bar distribution .............................................................................................................398 Lacer bars for pad footings and pile caps ................................................................. 399 Pad footing (77) ..................................................................................................................401 Starter bars .........................................................................................................................402 Starter bar stirrups .......................................................................................................404 Starter bar location ...................................................................................................... 405



Detailing manager ............................................................................................................. 406 Mesh Bars.............................................................................................................................408 Mesh Bars: Picture tab...................................................................................................409 Mesh Bars: Detailing tab............................................................................................... 410 Mesh Bars: Bar end conditions tab..............................................................................412 Mesh Bars: Splicing tab ............................................................................................... 413 Mesh Bars: Attributes tab............................................................................................. 414 Mesh Bars by Area...............................................................................................................414 Mesh Bars by Area: Picture tab.....................................................................................415 Mesh Bars by Area: Detailing tab................................................................................. 418 Mesh Bars by Area: Bar end conditions tab................................................................420 Mesh Bars by Area: Splicing tab ................................................................................. 420 Mesh Bars by Area: Attributes tab............................................................................... 422 Rebar coupler.......................................................................................................................422 Rebar coupler: Parameters tab.................................................................................... 424 Rebar coupler: Attributes tab....................................................................................... 425 Rebar end anchor................................................................................................................ 426 Rebar end anchor: Parameters tab..............................................................................427 Rebar end anchor: Attributes tab.................................................................................428 Split rebar and add coupler................................................................................................429 Split rebar and add coupler: Parameters tab............................................................. 431 Split rebar and add coupler: Attributes tab................................................................ 433 Rebar end trimming............................................................................................................ 434 Rebar end trimming: Adjusting reinforcing bar ends................................................ 435 Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Update rebar attributes........................................... 435



6



Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Customize attribute files, part mapping and user-defined attributes (UDAs).................................................................................. 436 Slab bars (18)........................................................................................................................438 Slab reinforcement properties ................................................................................... 440 Slab Reinforcement Tool.....................................................................................................441 Slab Reinforcement Tool: Parameters tab.................................................................. 441 Slab Reinforcement Tool: Advanced tab......................................................................443 Beam reinforcement (63) ..................................................................................................444 Beam reinforcement (63): Beam reinforcement properties ................................... 447 Beam reinforcement (63): Stirrup spacing tab........................................................... 447 Double tee reinforcement (64) .........................................................................................448 Double tee reinforcement properties ........................................................................449 Beam end reinforcement (79)........................................................................................... 451 Beam end reinforcing bars ..........................................................................................452 Horizontal U bars 1 and 2 ........................................................................................... 453 Vertical U bars 3A and 3B ............................................................................................ 453 Stirrups 5A and 5B ....................................................................................................... 454 Corbel reinforcement (81).................................................................................................. 454 Corbel reinforcement (81): Main bars tab...................................................................456 Corbel reinforcement (81): Stirrups/Transverse Stirrups/Diagonal Stirrups tabs.. 457 Corbel reinforcement (81): Additional bars tab..........................................................458 Round column reinforcement (82).................................................................................... 459 Main bars tab..................................................................................................................462 Stirrups tab..................................................................................................................... 462 Stirrup attributes tab..................................................................................................... 464 Top tab............................................................................................................................. 465 Bottom tab...................................................................................................................... 466 Advanced (main bars) tab............................................................................................. 467 Rectangular column reinforcement (83)...........................................................................467 Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Main bars tab........................................... 470 Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Bar ends tab............................................. 471 Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Side bars tab.............................................472 Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Stirrups tab............................................... 473 Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Intermediate links tab............................. 475 Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Top / Bottom tab...................................... 477 Hole reinforcement for slabs and walls (84) .................................................................. 479 Hole creation and reinforcement (85) .............................................................................482 Reinforcement around holes ...................................................................................... 483 Stirrups at holes ........................................................................................................... 484 Braced girder (88)................................................................................................................ 485 Braced girder (88): Picture tab...................................................................................... 487 Braced girder (88): Parts tab......................................................................................... 490 Braced girder (88): Geometry tab.................................................................................501 Braced girder (88): Double wall tab..............................................................................503 Braced girder (89) ............................................................................................................... 505 Braced girder (89): Picture tab...................................................................................... 508 Braced girder (89): Parts tab......................................................................................... 510 Braced girder (89): Geometry tab.................................................................................520 Braced girder (89): Double wall tab..............................................................................522 Reinforcement mesh array in area (89) / Reinforcement mesh array (91)................... 524 Picture tab....................................................................................................................... 525 Overlapping tab..............................................................................................................528 Attributes tab.................................................................................................................. 528 Wall panel reinforcement / Double wall edge and opening reinforcement.................529 Picture tab....................................................................................................................... 530



7



Reinforcement tab......................................................................................................... 531 Opening tab.................................................................................................................... 533 Diagonals tab.................................................................................................................. 534 Column tab......................................................................................................................534 Beam tab......................................................................................................................... 535 Additional tab................................................................................................................. 536 Attributes tab.................................................................................................................. 536 Multiple Wire Size Mesh......................................................................................................536 Multiple Wire Size Mesh: Mesh Parameters tab.........................................................537 Multiple Wire Size Mesh: Longitudinal/Crossing Wires tab.......................................538 Multiple Wire Size Mesh: Attributes tab...................................................................... 539 Multiple Wire Size Mesh: Configuration file for reinforcing bar patterns............... 540 Embedded anchors (8) ....................................................................................................... 540 Embedded anchors (8): Input tab.................................................................................544 Embedded anchors (8): Placement tab....................................................................... 548 Embedded anchors (8): Top placement tab................................................................ 554 Embedded anchors (8): Thickening tab....................................................................... 556 Embedded anchors (8): Picture tab..............................................................................561 Embedded anchors (8): Top part tab........................................................................... 564 Embedded anchors (8): Bottom part tab.................................................................... 566 Embedded anchors (8): Parts tab.................................................................................567 Embedded anchors (8): Reinforcing bar tab............................................................... 569 Embedded anchors (8): Hangup bars tab................................................................... 571 Embedded anchors (8): Horizontal bar tab.................................................................574 Embedded anchors (8): Special bar tab.......................................................................577 Embedded anchors (8): Advanced tab.........................................................................579 Embedded anchors (8): Bolts........................................................................................580 Embed (1008)....................................................................................................................... 581 Embed (1008): Picture tab............................................................................................. 582 Embed (1008): Top part tab...........................................................................................584 Embed (1008): Bottom part tab....................................................................................585 Embed (1008): Parts tab................................................................................................ 585 Embed (1008): Placement tab.......................................................................................586 Embed (1008): Reinforcing bar tab.............................................................................. 588 Embed (1008): Advanced tab........................................................................................ 589 Embed (1008): Bolts....................................................................................................... 589 Continuous Beam Reinforcement..................................................................................... 591



2.3



Lifting..............................................................................................................592



3



Automated Reinforcement Layout .........................................600



3.1 3.2



Automated reinforcement layout tools .................................................... 601 Double-tee beam (51)....................................................................................601



Lifting anchor (80)...............................................................................................................593 Lifting anchor properties .............................................................................................595 Custom components as lifting anchors......................................................................597 Creating recesses for lifting anchors ......................................................................... 598 Anchor properties from file .........................................................................................598



Double-tee beam (51): Strand template tab.................................................................... 602 Double-tee beam (51): Strand pattern tab....................................................................... 605 Double-tee beam (51): Strand profile tab.........................................................................606 Double-tee beam (51): Longitudinal rebar tab................................................................ 607 Double-tee beam (51): Stem mesh tab............................................................................. 608 Double-tee beam (51): Multiple sheets tab...................................................................... 610 Double-tee beam (51): Stem stirrups tab......................................................................... 610



8



Double-tee beam (51): Flange tab..................................................................................... 614 Double-tee beam (51): Notch/Opening tab......................................................................615 Double-tee beam (51): Edge reinforcement tab.............................................................. 618



3.3



Inverted-tee beam (52) ................................................................................ 620



3.4



Ledge beam (53) ............................................................................................634



3.5



Rectangular beam (54) .................................................................................649



3.6



Ledge spandrel (55) ...................................................................................... 660



3.7



Rectangular spandrel (56) ........................................................................... 672



Strand template ................................................................................................................. 623 Strand pattern ....................................................................................................................623 Strand profile ..................................................................................................................... 624 Longitudinal rebar ............................................................................................................. 625 Stem mesh ..........................................................................................................................627 Stem stirrups ......................................................................................................................628 Ledge mesh ........................................................................................................................ 630 Ledge rebar ........................................................................................................................ 631 Composite .......................................................................................................................... 632 End rebar ............................................................................................................................ 633 Attributes ............................................................................................................................ 634 Strand template ................................................................................................................. 637 Strand pattern ....................................................................................................................638 Strand profile ..................................................................................................................... 638 Longitudinal rebar ............................................................................................................. 639 Stem mesh ..........................................................................................................................642 Stem stirrups ......................................................................................................................643 Ledge mesh ........................................................................................................................ 644 Ledge rebar ........................................................................................................................ 645 Composite .......................................................................................................................... 646 End rebar ............................................................................................................................ 647 Attributes ............................................................................................................................ 648 Strand template ................................................................................................................. 651 Strand pattern ....................................................................................................................652 Strand profile ..................................................................................................................... 652 Longitudinal rebar ............................................................................................................. 653 Stem mesh ..........................................................................................................................655 Stem stirrups ......................................................................................................................656 Composite .......................................................................................................................... 658 End rebar ............................................................................................................................ 659 Attributes ............................................................................................................................ 660 Strand template ................................................................................................................. 663 Strand pattern ....................................................................................................................663 Strand profile ..................................................................................................................... 664 Longitudinal rebar ............................................................................................................. 665 Stem mesh ..........................................................................................................................667 Stem stirrups ......................................................................................................................667 Ledge mesh ........................................................................................................................ 669 Ledge rebar ........................................................................................................................ 670 End rebar ............................................................................................................................ 670 Attributes ............................................................................................................................ 671 Strand template ................................................................................................................. 674 Strand pattern ....................................................................................................................674 Strand profile ..................................................................................................................... 675 Longitudinal rebar ............................................................................................................. 676



9



Stem mesh ..........................................................................................................................678 Stem stirrups ......................................................................................................................679 End rebar ............................................................................................................................ 681 Attributes ............................................................................................................................ 682



3.8



Columns (57) ................................................................................................. 682



3.9



Topping (58) ................................................................................................... 701



3.10



Wash (59) ....................................................................................................... 704



3.11



Hollowcore reinforcement strands (60) .....................................................707



3.12



Post-tensioning (61) ..................................................................................... 711



3.13



3.14 3.15



3.16



Strand reinforcement ........................................................................................................685 Longitudinal rebar ............................................................................................................. 685 Primary ties ........................................................................................................................ 691 Secondary reinforcement ................................................................................................. 698 Circular column ..................................................................................................................699 Attributes ............................................................................................................................ 700 Topping ............................................................................................................................... 702 Advanced ............................................................................................................................ 703



Wash ....................................................................................................................................706 Advanced ............................................................................................................................ 707



Strand template ................................................................................................................. 708 Strand pattern ....................................................................................................................710 Attributes ............................................................................................................................ 711 Tendon properties ............................................................................................................. 712 Tendon profile ....................................................................................................................713



Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62).......................................................... 714



Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62): Picture tab...........................................................715 Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62): Edge/Diag bars tab............................................ 717 Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62): Horizontal/Vertical U bars tab.......................... 718



U Bar of concrete slab (63) .......................................................................... 721



U bars .................................................................................................................................. 722



Wall panel (64) .............................................................................................. 723



Strand template................................................................................................................... 725 Strand pattern......................................................................................................................725 Longitudinal rebar............................................................................................................... 727 Transverse mesh..................................................................................................................727 Transverse straight bars..................................................................................................... 729 Transverse stirrups..............................................................................................................730 Notch opening..................................................................................................................... 732



Reinforcement Strand Layout (66) ............................................................. 735



Strand template................................................................................................................... 735 Strand pattern......................................................................................................................736 Strand profile....................................................................................................................... 737 Attributes.............................................................................................................................. 738



4



CS Components ......................................................................... 739



4.1



3D cut (10) ......................................................................................................739



4.2



Opening in wall (40) ......................................................................................741



3D cut (10): Picture tab ......................................................................................................740 Opening in wall (40): Opening tab.................................................................................... 742 Type ................................................................................................................................742 Horizontal position .......................................................................................................743



10



Vertical ........................................................................................................................... 744 Horizontal offset, vertical offset ................................................................................. 746 Rabbet - side ................................................................................................................. 746 Cut - rotation .................................................................................................................747 Shape of the opening ...................................................................................................747 Opening in wall (40): Insulation tab..................................................................................748 Opening in wall (40): Parameters tab...............................................................................748



4.3



Rebar in beam (90) ....................................................................................... 748



4.4



Border rebar for single edge (93) ................................................................ 767



5



Disclaimer...................................................................................776



Primary bottom bars ......................................................................................................... 751 Grade ............................................................................................................................. 751 Size ................................................................................................................................. 751 End conditions left ....................................................................................................... 751 End conditions right ..................................................................................................... 752 Bend lengths left .......................................................................................................... 752 Bend lengths right ........................................................................................................ 752 Bar not to create ...........................................................................................................753 Creation method .......................................................................................................... 753 Positioning and distances ........................................................................................... 754 Shape and pattern ....................................................................................................... 755 Primary top bars ................................................................................................................ 757 Side left ............................................................................................................................... 757 Side right .............................................................................................................................759 Stirrups ............................................................................................................................... 759 Stirrup spacing ................................................................................................................... 763 Stirrup reference .......................................................................................................... 763 Omit stirrups .................................................................................................................763 Stirrups 2 ............................................................................................................................ 764 Stirrup spacing 2 ................................................................................................................ 765 Stirrups 3 ............................................................................................................................ 765 Stirrup spacing 3 ................................................................................................................ 765 Advanced ............................................................................................................................ 766 Configuration ..................................................................................................................... 766 Bending radius ..............................................................................................................767 Rotation ......................................................................................................................... 767



Pins ...................................................................................................................................... 769 Pin spacing ..........................................................................................................................769 Advanced ............................................................................................................................ 770 Configuration ..................................................................................................................... 770 Extra rotation ................................................................................................................ 771 Bending radius sec ....................................................................................................... 771 Detect outside geometry .............................................................................................771 Detect negative volume ...............................................................................................774 Draw axis ....................................................................................................................... 775



11



12



1



Concrete Detailing



This section introduces the concrete detailing tools available in Tekla Structures. Click the links below to find out more: •



Seating connections (page 13)



•



Beam and column connections (page 25)



•



Panels and walls (page 101)



•



Formwork components (page 233)



•



Openings (page 260)



•



Flooring (page 264)



•



Concrete stairs (page 318)



•



Foundations (page 367)



NOTE Precast components can only be applied to precast cast units. They cannot be applied to cast-in-place cast units.



1.1 Seating connections Tekla Structures includes several seating connections that you can use to connect concrete columns and beams using anchor bolts. The seating connection tools are: Component



Description



Seating with dowel (75) (page 14)



Connects a column and beam using an anchor bolt.



Two-sided seating with dowel (76) (page 18)



Connects a column and two beams using anchor bolts.



Seating with dowel to flange (77) (page 21)



Connects the flanges of a beam to a column using anchor bolts.



Concrete Detailing



13



Seating connections



Component



Description



Two-sided seating with dowel to flange (78) (page 23)



Connects the flanges of two beams to a column using anchor bolts.



Seating with dowel (75) Connects a column and a beam using an anchor bolt. Parts created •



Anchor bolt



•



Nut



•



Washer plate



•



Bearing plate



•



Fittings for beam and column



•



Hole for bolt



•



Corbel (optional)



•



Recess for nut and washer plate (optional)



Where to use Situation



Description Connects a beam and a column using an anchor bolt. Washer plate and nut protrude from the beam.



Concrete Detailing



14



Seating connections



Situation



Description Connects a beam and a column using an anchor bolt and a beveled corbel. Washer plate and nut recessed into the beam.



Before you start Create the following parts: •



Concrete column (round or rectangular profile)



•



Concrete beam (rectangular, HI, I, L, or inverted T profile)



Defining properties Use the tabs in the Seating with dowel (75) dialog box to define the following properties: Tab Picture



Contents



See also



Position of anchor bolt, bolt hole and bearing plate, bolt hole dimensions, option to fit beam or column, grout type, beam clearance



Defining bolt hole dimensions (page 16) Fitting the beam or column (75) (page 16) Defining grout (75, 76) (page 16)



Parts



Bearing plate, grout, washer plate, nut, recess, and anchor bolt properties



Creating a recess (75, 76) (page 18)



Corbel



Option to create corbel, corbel properties



Chamfering corbels (page 17)



General Analysis



General tab Information used in structural analysis



Analysis tab



Picking order 1.



Column



2.



Beam



Concrete Detailing



15



Seating connections



Defining bolt hole dimensions Enter the following bolt hole dimensions:



Field



Description



1



Hole dimension in the direction of the beam



2



The distance from beam center line to hole center and bolt.



3



Hole dimension in the direction perpendicular to the beam.



Fitting the beam or column (75) Select one of the following options to have Tekla Structures fit the column or the beam: Option



Description Fits the column. (Default)



Fits the beam. The beam must be sloped.



Concrete Detailing



16



Seating connections



Defining grout (75, 76) Select one of the following options to include and define grout: Option



Description No grout. (Default)



Bolt hole grouted. No nut or washer plate.



Bolt hole grouted. Bolt, washer plate, and anchor bolt protruding.



Chamfering corbels The options for chamfering corbels are: Option



Description Beveled (Default)



Straight



Rounded



Concrete Detailing



17



Seating connections



Creating a recess (75, 76) Select one of the following options to define if the nut and washer plate are recessed into the beam: Option



Description Nut and washer plate on the surface of the beam. (Default) Nut and bolt plate recessed into the beam.



Defining recess dimensions If you choose to recess the nut and washer plate into the beam, enter the following dimensions to define the recess:



Bearing plate position (75, 76) Select one of the following options to define the position of the bearing plate: Option



Description Square with beam. (Default)



Square with column.



Concrete Detailing



18



Seating connections



Two-sided seating with dowel (76) Connects a column and two beams using anchor bolts. Parts created •



Anchor bolts (2)



•



Nuts (2)



•



Washer plates (2)



•



Bearing plates (2)



•



Fittings for beam and column (2)



•



Holes for bolts (2)



•



Corbels (optional) (2)



•



Recesses for washer plate and nut (optional) (2)



Where to use Option



Description Connects two beams to a column using anchor bolts and creates corbels. Nuts and washer plates on the surface of the beams.



Connects two beams to a column using anchor bolts. Nuts and washer plates recessed into the beams. Second beam is sloped, and is cut to create a gap between the beam and the column.



Before you start Create the following parts: •



Concrete column (round or rectangular profile)



•



Two concrete beams (rectangular, HI, I, L, or inverted T profile)



Concrete Detailing



19



Seating connections



Defining properties Use the tabs in the Two-sided seating with dowel (76) dialog box to define the following properties: Tab Picture



Contents



More information



Dimensions defining the position of the anchor bolts relative to the beams and bearing plates.



To use the same dimensions for both beams, set Use the same parameters for left and right beams to Yes and enter the dimensions for the left beam Options to cut and shape the only. ends of the beams and to fit column or beams. Shaping beam ends (76, 78) (page 21) Fitting beam or column (76) (page 20)



Parts



Bearing plate, bolt, nut and anchor bolt properties



Left beam



Left beam is the first beam picked and right is the Right beam second. Anchor bolt, bolt hole and recess properties. Clearance between beam and column if beam is sloped. Corbel



Option to create corbel, corbel properties



General Analysis



Defining bolt hole dimensions (page 16) Creating a recess (75, 76) (page 18) Defining recess dimensions (page 18)



Chamfering corbels (page 17) General tab



Information needed for structural analysis



Analysis tab



Picking order 1.



Column



2.



Beam 1



3.



Beam 2



Click the middle mouse button to finish picking and create the connection.



Concrete Detailing



20



Seating connections



Fitting beam or column (76) Select one of the following options to fit the beams or the column: Option



Description Fits column. (Default)



Fits beam.



Shaping beam ends (76, 78) Select one of the following options to define how the end of the beams are cut and shaped: Key



Options



1 = column 2 = first beam picked 3 = second beam picked



Seating with dowel to flange (77) Connects the flanges of a beam to a column using anchor bolts and an optional corbel. Parts created •



Anchor bolts (2)



Concrete Detailing



21



Seating connections



•



Nuts (2)



•



Washer plates (2)



•



Bearing plate (1)



•



Fittings for beam and column



•



Holes for bolts (2)



•



Corbel (optional)



•



Recess for nut and washer plates



Where to use Situation



More information Connects the flanges of a beam to a column using anchor bolts and a beveled corbel. Nuts and washer plates recessed.



Before you start Create the following parts: •



Concrete column (Round or rectangular profile)



•



Concrete beam with flange (rectangular, HI, I, L, or inverted T profile)



Defining properties Use the tabs in the Seating with dowel to flange (77) dialog box to define the following properties: Tab



Contents



Picture



More information



Dimensions defining the Defining bolt hole position of the anchor dimensions (page 16) bolt relative to the beam and bearing plate, length of anchor bolt in beam



Concrete Detailing



22



Seating connections



Tab



Contents and column, bolt hole dimensions and position



More information



Parts



Bearing plate, washer Creating a recess (77, plate, nut and anchor 78) (page 23) bolt properties, option to create recess, recess properties



Corbel



Options to create corbel, corbel properties



General Analysis



Chamfering corbels (page 17) General tab



Information needed for structural analysis



Analysis tab



Creating a recess (77, 78) To cut a recess in the beam web, select the Yes option in the Create recess dropdown list. Enter the following dimensions to define the recess:



Two-sided seating with dowel to flange (78) Connects the flanges of two beams to a column using anchor bolts and optional corbels. Parts created •



Anchor bolts (4)



•



Nuts (4)



•



Washer plates (4)



•



Bearing plate (2)



•



Fittings for beam and column



Concrete Detailing



23



Seating connections



•



Holes for bolts (4)



•



Corbels (2) optional



•



Recesses for nut and washer plate (4)



Where to use Situation



Description Connects the flanges of two beams to a column using anchor bolts.



Connects the flanges of two beams to a column using anchor bolts and beveled corbels.



Before you start Create the following parts: •



Concrete column (Round or rectangular profile)



•



Concrete beam with flange (rectangular, HI, I, L, or inverted T profile)



Defining properties Use the tabs in the Two-sided seating with dowel (78) dialog box to define the following properties: Tab Picture



Contents



More information



Dimensions defining the position of the anchor bolts relative to the beam and bearing plate, length of anchor bolts in beam and column, beam ends



Concrete Detailing



24



Defining bolt hole dimensions (page 16) Shaping beam ends (76, 78) (page 21)



Seating connections



Tab



Contents



More information



Parts



Bearing plate, washer plate, nut and dowel properties



Left beam



Left beam is the first beam picked and right is the second.



Defining bolt hole dimensions (page 16)



Option to create corbel, corbel properties



Chamfering corbels (page 17)



Right beam



Left corbel Right corbel



Creating a recess (77, 78) Bolt hole, nut and washer (page 23) plate properties. Option to create recess, recess properties.



General Analysis



General tab Information needed for structural analysis



Analysis tab



1.2 Beam and column connections This section introduces components that can be used in concrete connections. Click the links below to find out more: •



Battering connection (13) (page 25)



•



Corbel connection (14) (page 27)



•



Column - beam (14) (page 38)



•



Corbels and recesses (82) (page 45)



•



Concrete console (110) (page 51)



•



Concrete console (111) (page 63)



•



Concrete beam-beam (112) (page 72)



Concrete Detailing



25



Beam and column connections



Battering connection (13) Use to fit the secondary part, for example, in a custom component, either square to the main part, or at an angle. Use for Situation



Description Secondary is fit square to the main part.



Secondary is fit to the main part at an angle.



Before you start Create two parts.



Concrete Detailing



26



Beam and column connections



Defining properties To enter the angle and the distance between the parts, go to the Picture tab. If the part angle makes the gap larger than the value A, then the part is cut at the end. Selection order 1.



Select the main part



2.



Select the secondary part.



Corbel connection (14)



Corbel connection (14) connects a beam to a column using a straight, beveled, or rounded corbel and reinforcing bars or fastening plates. Objects created •



Corbel



•



Bearing plate



•



Drainage holes in bearing plate (1 or 2) (optional)



•



Reinforcing bars (1 or 2) (optional)



•



•



Bolt plates for reinforcing bars



•



Nuts for reinforcing bars



•



Recesses for bolt plates and nuts



Fastening plates (2) (optional) •



Recesses for fastening plates



Use for Situation



Description Connects a beam to a column using a reinforcing bar and a beveled corbel.



Concrete Detailing



27



Beam and column connections



Situation



Description Connects a beam to a column using fastening plates and a rounded corbel.



Selection order 1.



Select the main part (column).



2.



Select the secondary part (beam). The connection is created automatically when the secondary part is selected.



Part identification key



Part 1



Bolt plate



2



Nut



3



Bearing plate



4



Corbel



5



Reinforcing bar



Concrete Detailing



28



Beam and column connections



See also Corbel connection (14): Picture tab (page 29) Corbel connection (14): Parts tab (page 33) Corbel connection (14): Reinforcing bar tab (page 34)



Corbel connection (14): Picture tab



Use the Picture tab to control the corbel shape and dimensions, beam end shape and dimensions, and corbel side chamfers in Corbel connection (14). When beam sloped, adjust If the beam in the connection is sloped, define whether the beam or the corbel is cut. When the beam end is cut, the corbel top stays horizontal. When the corbel is cut, the corbel top has the same slope as the beam. Corbel dimensions and shape



Description 1



Gap between the column and the beam.



2



Gap between the corbel and the beam.



3



Vertical corbel dimension.



4



Beveled corbel dimension.



5



Corbel width.



Concrete Detailing



29



Beam and column connections



Option



Description Default Beveled corbel AutoDefaults can change this option.



Beveled corbel



Square corbel



Rounded corbel



Concrete Detailing



30



Beam and column connections



Corbel position



Description 1



Horizontal corbel offset.



2



Height of the beam cut.



3



Gap between the corbel and extended beam.



Beam end shape You can fit the beam end to the column, or you can create a straight beam end. Option



Description



Example



Default Straight beam end AutoDefaults can change this option.



Straight beam end



Concrete Detailing



31



Beam and column connections



Option



Description



Example



Beam end is fit to the column based on the dimensions you define. Beam can extend symmetrically on both sides of the column, or with different dimensions.



Corbel thickness



Define the distances from column edges to set the corbel thickness. Corbel side chamfers Define whether the corbel sides are chamfered. By default, no chamfers are created.



Concrete Detailing



32



Beam and column connections



Corbel connection (14): Parts tab



Use the Parts tab to control the corbel part properties and dimensions in Corbel connection (14). Corbel parts Part



Description



Bearing plate



Bearing plate thickness.



Cast unit



Select whether cast unit is formed.



Drainage hole



Select whether drainage holes for each reinforcing bar are created in the bearing plate.



Bolt plate



Bolt plate thickness.



Nut



Nut thickness. Option



Description



Default



Pos_No



The default part start number is defined on the Components tab in File menu --> Settings -Some components have > Options. a second row of fields where you can enter the assembly position number.



Material



Material grade.



Concrete Detailing



Prefix and start number for the part position number.



33



The default material is defined in the Part material box on the Components tab in File



Beam and column connections



Option



Name



Description



Default menu --> Settings --> Options.



Name that is shown in drawings and reports.



Bearing plate dimensions



Description 1



Bearing plate distance from the column edge.



2



Bearing plate distance from the corbel edges.



Nut and bolt plate dimensions



Description 1



Nut width.



2



Bolt plate width.



Corbel connection (14): Reinforcing bar tab



Use the Reinforcing bar tab to control the reinforcing bar and fastening plate properties, and the bolt plate and fastening plate recesses in Corbel connection (14).



Concrete Detailing



34



Beam and column connections



Reinforcing bar properties Option



Description



Grade



Strength of the steel used in the reinforcing bars.



Size



Diameter of the reinforcing bar.



Bending radius



Internal radius of the bends in the bar.



Name



Tekla Structures uses the name in drawings and reports.



Class



Use Class to group reinforcements. For example, you can display different reinforcement classes in different colors.



Number of bars



Select 1 Dowel to create one reinforcing bar. Select 2 Dowels to create two reinforcing bars. Then define the distance between the bars in the Bar distance field.



Reinforcing bar length



Description 1



Distance between reinforcing bar center line and the column edge.



2



Vertical length of the reinforcing bar inside the corbel.



3



Length of the reinforcing bar inside the column.



Concrete Detailing



35



Beam and column connections



Recess for bolt plate and nut



Description 1



Size of the bolt plate recess in the x direction.



5



Size of the bolt plate recess in the y direction.



2



Size of the nut recess in the y direction.



4



Size of the nut recess in the x direction.



3



Reinforcing bar offset.



Reinforcing bar extra length



Description 1



Extra length of the reinforcing bar.



2



Length of the reinforcing bar inside the recess.



Connecting devices Define the connecting devices that connect the beam and the column. Option



Description Default One or two reinforcing bars bent to the same angle as the corbel bevel Available for bevel corbels. AutoDefaults can change this option. One or two reinforcing bars bent to the same angle as the corbel bevel Available for bevel corbels.



Concrete Detailing



36



Beam and column connections



Option



Description One or two reinforcing bars Default for straight and rounded corbels. Two fastening plates Use custom components as fastening plates.



Recess for fastening plate



Description 1



Depth of column recess.



2



Depth of beam recess.



3



Offset of column recess.



4



Offset of beam recess.



Column recess Height and width of column and beam recess. Beam recess Using custom components as fastening plates You can use custom components as fastening plates. Use the Column component and Beam component sections to define the fastening plates in the column and beam. 1.



Select the following option in theConnecting devices list:



Concrete Detailing



37



Beam and column connections



2.



In the Custom list, select Yes.



3.



Click the ... button next to the Component field to open the Select component dialog box.



4.



Browse for the custom component you want to use as fastening plate. The component you select must be a custom part and have two or more input points.



5.



Select the component and click OK.



6.



To use saved custom component properties, enter the name of the saved properties file in the Custom settings field.



7.



If the direction or rotation of the fastening plate is not correct, select another option in the Up direction or Rotation list.



Column - beam (14)



Column - beam (14) creates a connection between a concrete column and a concrete beam or wall/panel. The orientation of the beam can be horizontal or sloped. Note that the connection works only with precast parts. Objects created •



Cuts



•



Fittings



Concrete Detailing



38



Beam and column connections



Use for Option



Description Beam end rests on the column.



Beam end rests on the column.



Selection order 1.



Select the main part (column).



2.



Select the secondary part (beam/wall/panel).



See also Column - beam (14): Picture tab (page 39) Column - beam (14): Column tab (page 43)



Column - beam (14): Picture tab



Use the Picture tab to define cut-out shapes and cut-out dimensions of the column and the beam in Column - beam (14).



Concrete Detailing



39



Beam and column connections



Cut-out dimensions Option



Description Cut-outs of the main part and the secondary part in the horizontal direction. The space between the column and the beam can be defined at both sides. For tapered openings you can define how much the opening is reduced. Example:



Cut-outs of the main part and the secondary part in the vertical direction. The space between the column and the beam can be defined at both sides. For tapered openings you can define how much the opening is reduced. Example:



Concrete Detailing



40



Beam and column connections



Option



Description



Select the how the opening is reduced. The options are: •



From beam centerline



•



From beam edges



Cut-out shape Option



Description Cut around the secondary part



Concrete Detailing



41



Beam and column connections



Option



Description Cut-out to the top of the column



Cut-out to the bottom of the column



Concrete Detailing



42



Beam and column connections



Option



Description Full vertical cut-out



No cut-out



Column - beam (14): Column tab



Use the Column tab to define the how the top of the column is modified in Column - beam (14). Column extension You can use the three fields to define the column extension. If all fields are left empty, the column is extended to its original top level.



Concrete Detailing



43



Beam and column connections



Option 1



Description Column extension in the vertical direction from the beam top. This field has the highest priority among the three fields (1, 3, 4) for defining the column extension.



2



Select wether the top of the column is perpendicular or parallel to the beam. Perpendicular:



Parallel with top of beam:



3



Column extension in the vertical direction.



Concrete Detailing



44



Beam and column connections



Option 4



Description Column extension in the vertical direction from the beam bottom.



Corbels and recesses (82)



Corbels and recesses (82) adds concrete parts or cuts to a concrete part. You can define the position, offsets and rotation of the added parts or cuts in several ways. Objects created The component can add a maximum of four parts or cuts to a concrete part. The added parts can be welded to the main part, added as parts and cast units, or as sub-assemblies. Use for •



Cut-out seams from concrete walls



•



Adding concrete support blocks to concrete columns or walls



Selection order 1.



Select the main part. The part or cut is created automatically.



See also Corbels and recesses (82): Part 1 / Part 2 / Part 3 / Part 4 tab (page 45) Corbels and recesses (82): Configuration tab (page 50)



Corbels and recesses (82): Part 1 / Part 2 / Part 3 / Part 4 tab



Use the Part 1, Part 2, Part 3 or Part 4 tab to create one additional part or cut to the concrete part in Corbels and recesses (82). Profile Select the profile to be added to the concrete part or used for the cut. Select how the added part is connected to the main part.



Concrete Detailing



45



Beam and column connections



Option



Example No part created



Part is created



Part is created and added to the main part



Concrete Detailing



46



Beam and column connections



Option



Example Part is created and the main part is cut



Main part is cut



Part is created and cast unit is created



Concrete Detailing



47



Beam and column connections



Option



Example Part is created and welded to the main part



Part is created and welded to the main part, and the main part is cut



Part is created and added as sub-assembly



Part is created and added as sub-assembly, and the main part is cut



Offset Define the offset of the added part from the main part. You can set the offset also for openings. By default, the added parts or cuts are created between the end points of the concrete part.



Concrete Detailing



48



Beam and column connections



Create diamond corbel around column Select whether a diamond corbel is created around the column. If you create the corbel, you cannot enter any values on the Part 2, Part 3 or Part 4 tabs. Chamfers You can chamfer the added parts. You can define the chamfers either as angles or as dimensions.



Positioning of the parts Option



Description Select the side where the added parts or cuts are created.



Select the alignment of the added parts or cuts.



Concrete Detailing



49



Beam and column connections



Option



Description You can swap the end points of the added parts or cuts.



Select whether the existing cuts should be taken into account when the added parts are created.



UDAs Use the Fabricator name, Name, Type, Nomination, Article number and Comment user-defined attributes (UDAs) to add information for the added parts or cuts. Part 2 / Part 3 / Part 4 tab You can add or cut more than one part at the same time. To do this, use the tabs Part 2, Part 3 and Part 4.



Concrete Detailing



50



Beam and column connections



Corbels and recesses (82): Configuration tab



Use the Configuration tab to define the distance in material and whether information needs to be printed in Corbels and recesses (82). Use the Print info option to define whether additional colored dummy profiles are placed in the main part for more clearness. The additional colored profiles can help in the component orientation.



NOTE The additional profiles have an effect on numbering. The profiles get part numbers and assembly numbers.



Concrete console (110)



Concrete console (110) creates a connection between a concrete column and a concrete beam. The beam rests on a console which is attached to the column. Objects created •



Console



•



Neoprene strip



•



Steel plate between console and beam



•



Anchor rods



•



Tubes



•



Sockets



Concrete Detailing



51



Beam and column connections



Use for Situation



Description Console connection between a concrete column and a concrete beam.



Selection order 1.



Select the main part (column).



2.



Select the secondary part (beam). The connection is created automatically when the secondary part is selected.



See also Concrete console (110): Picture tab (page 52) Concrete console (110): Parts tab (page 56) Concrete console (110): Connection tab (page 58) Concrete console (110): Parameters tab (page 58) Concrete console (110): Anchor rods tab (page 60) Concrete console (110): Socket tab (page 63)



Concrete console (110): Picture tab



Use the Picture tab to define the shape and the dimensions of the console, and the steel support plates and the neoprene layer in Concrete console (110).



Concrete Detailing



52



Beam and column connections



Description 1



Shape and dimensions of the concrete console and the steel and neoprene parts.



2



Select how the shape of the secondary beam is modified if the secondary beam is sloping.



Concrete Detailing



53



Beam and column connections



Description



Concrete Detailing



54



Beam and column connections



Description 3



Console offset. You can set the reference to be the main part or the secondary part. Additionally, the offset distance can be defined.



Reference = column centerline If no offset value is applied, the console is placed symmetrically compared to the column.



Reference = column left side



Reference = column right side Reference = beam centerline Reference = beam left side Reference = beam right side 4



Vertical plate offset. You can set the reference to be the main part or the secondary part. Additionally, the offset distance can be defined.



Concrete Detailing



55



Reference = column centerline



Beam and column connections



Description Reference = column left side



Reference = column right side



Reference = beam centerline



Reference = beam left side



Reference = beam right side



5



Console tapering.



6



Console width. If no value is entered, the width is the same as the width of the beam



Concrete console (110): Parts tab



Use the Parts tab to define properties for the console, the neoprene layer and the optional steel plates created in Concrete console (110).



Concrete Detailing



56



Beam and column connections



Option



Description



Concrete console



Prefix and start number for the part position number, material, name, class and comment for the console.



Console to column



Select how the console is attached to the concrete column. Default is Part Add. The No action option means that the console is a loose part and not attached to any other part in the component.



Create console like



Select how the console is created. Default is Contour plate. Contour plate = the console is created using the Contour plate command. Beam = the console is created using the Beam command.



Neoprene



Neoprene layer properties. A neoprene plate for shock absorbing and sounddamping can be created between the beam and the console. If a trapezium shaped neoprene block is used, the defined thickness will be the thickness on the column side.



Neoprene to



Select to which part the neoprene layer is attached, and how the neoprene is attached. Default is Beam and Weld.



Holes in neoprene



Select how the holes in the neoprene part are created. Default is By bolt.



Diameter of holes in neoprene



Diameter of the holes in the neoprene part. By default, the hole size in the neoprene part is equal to the holes in the console. Enter a value to overwrite this default hole size.



Steel plate horizontal



Horizontal steel plate size and properties. The plate is placed under the neoprene part.



Steel plate vertical



Vertical steel plate size and properties. The plate is placed at the console side.



Add steel plate to the column by



Concrete Detailing



Select how the steel plate is attached to the column. Default is Weld.



57



Beam and column connections



Concrete console (110): Connection tab



Use the Connection tab to define the properties of the anchor rods, nuts and washers and injection tubes and to select how these parts are connected to the console or the main part in Concrete console (110). Option Anchor rods



Description Anchor rod profile. Define the length and number of rods on the Anchor rods tab.



Type of reinforcing bars



Select the reinforcing bar type.



Anchors to



Select to which part the anchor rods are attached, and how the anchors are attached. Default is Column and Weld.



Anchors all the same L



Select whether the anchor rods have the same length.



Nut



Nut profile. Define the height of the nut on the Anchor rods tab.



Washer



Washer profile. You can define the direction and the rotation for each washer. Define the thickness of the washer on the Anchor rods tab.



Weld washer and nut to anchor



Select whether washers and nuts are welded to the anchors.



Tube top



Tubular embed for creating a round hole for the anchors. The tube top starts at the bottom level of the nut.



Tube bottom



Tubular embed for creating a round hole for the anchors. The height of the tubular profile can be modified on the Anchor rods tab.



Tubes around anchors to beam



Select how the tubes around the anchors are attached to the beam. Default is Weld.



Tubes all the same L Select whether the tubes have the same length.



Concrete Detailing



58



Beam and column connections



Concrete console (110): Parameters tab



Use the Parameters tab to define how the column and the beam are cut (skew/square) in Concrete console (110). Option Fitting to column



Description Select how the top of the column is fitted. Default is Perpendicular.



Column cut-out



Default. A full-width cut-out is created.



Column left side cut-out. Clearance between the column and the beam can be set.



Column right side cut-out. Clearance between the column and the beam can be set.



Concrete Detailing



59



Beam and column connections



Option



Description Both sides cut-out. Clearance between the column and the beam can be set on both sides.



Beam end cut-out



Square beam end



Use this option when the beam and the column are not aligned.



Skewed beam end (according to main part)



Beam bottom cut-out



Square beam bottom



Use this option when the beam and the column are not aligned.



Skewed beam bottom (according to main part)



Concrete console (110): Anchor rods tab



Use the Anchor rods tab to define dimensions and position of the anchor rods in Concrete console (110).



Concrete Detailing



60



Beam and column connections



Description 1



Anchor rod length, hole diameter and top offset.



2



Number of anchor rods, distances and edge distances.



3



Anchor rod distribution options. Useful when the beam is not aligned with the column.



4



Select the type of the hole in the beam. Default is Circular. If you set the type to Circular, use the two boxes on the left to define the hole diameter. If you set the type to Square, use the four boxes on the left to define the dimensions of the square cut.



5



Height of the tubular profile, nut and washer.



Concrete Detailing



61



Beam and column connections



Description 6



Anchor rods and cuts



Default. Anchor rods are created. Holes for the anchors are created.



Anchor rods are created. No holes are created.



Only holes are created. No anchors are created.



Only anchor rods are created. No holes are created.



Cut-out in the concrete beam. Anchor rods are created. No holes are created.



Concrete Detailing



62



Beam and column connections



Description Cut-out in the concrete beam (parallel to beam). Anchor rods are created. No holes are created.



Concrete console (110): Socket tab



Use the Socket tab to define whether socket anchors are created, how they are connected and the dimensions and position of the socket anchors in Concrete console (110). If you create the sockets on the Socket tab, the anchor rods on the Connection tab are automatically considered as sockets. Option



Description



Create socket



Select whether sockets are created and which parts are included.



Connect socket to prim by



Select how the sockets are connected to the main part.



Connection rod-connector



Select the connection method between the rod and the connecting profile.



Type of reinforcing bars



Select the rod type.



Leg rotation



Select the direction of the rod. You can enter an angle in the box on the right.



Connector



Properties for the connecting profile and the rod.



Dowel Partname component



If you want to use a custom part to create the socket, select the Custom part option in the Create socket list. Then browse for the component, and use the list of options to position the custom part.



Concrete console (111)



Concrete console (111) creates a connection between a concrete column and two secondary concrete beams. The beams rest on a console which is attached to the column.



Concrete Detailing



63



Beam and column connections



Objects created •



Console



•



Neoprene strip



•



Steel plates



•



Anchor rods



•



Tubes



•



Sockets



Use for Situation



Description Console connection between a concrete column and two concrete beams.



Console connection between a concrete column and one concrete beam.



Selection order 1.



Select the main part (column).



2.



Select the first secondary part (beam).



3.



Select the secondary part (beam).



4.



Click the middle mouse button to create the connection.



Concrete Detailing



64



Beam and column connections



See also Concrete console (111): Picture tab (page 65) Concrete console (111): Parts tab (page 65) Concrete console (111): Anchor tab (page 68) Concrete console (111): Anchor rods (page 69) Concrete console (111): Socket tab (page 71)



Concrete console (111): Picture tab



Use the Picture tab to define the shape and the dimensions of the console, and the steel support plates and the neoprene layer in Concrete console (111).



Concrete console (111): Parts tab



Use the Parts tab to define properties for the console, the neoprene layer and the optional steel plates created in Concrete console (111).



Concrete Detailing



65



Beam and column connections



Option Console width



Description Console thickness, and the prefix and a start number for the part position number, material, name, class and comment for the console. If no value is entered, the width is the same as the width of the beam.



Console to column



Select how the console is attached to the column. Default is Part Add. The No action option means that the console is a loose part and not attached to any other part in the component.



Create console like



Select the profile type of the console. Default is Contour plate. Contour plate = the console is created using the Contour plate command. Beam = the console is created using the Beam command.



Neoprene



Neoprene layer properties. A neoprene plate for shock absorbing and sounddamping can be created between the beam and the console. If a trapezium shaped neoprene block is used, the defined thickness will be the thickness on the column side.



Neoprene to



Select to which part the neoprene layer is attached, and how the neoprene is attached. Default is Beam and Weld.



Concrete Detailing



66



Beam and column connections



Option Holes in neoprene



Description Select how the holes in the neoprene part are created. Default is By bolt.



Diameter of holes in neoprene



Diameter of the holes in the neoprene part. By default, the hole size in the neoprene part is equal to the holes in the console. Enter a value to overwrite this default hole size. Select if the neoprene layer is split for each beam separately.



Steel plate horizontal



Horizontal steel plate size and properties. The plate is placed under the neoprene part.



Steel plate vertical



Vertical steel plate size and properties. The plate is placed at the console side.



Concrete Detailing



67



Beam and column connections



Option



Description



Add steel plate to the column by



Select how the steel plate is attached to the column. Default is Weld.



Concrete console (111): Anchor tab



Use the Anchor tab to define the properties of the anchor rods, nuts and washers and injection tubes and select how these parts are connected to the console or the main part in Concrete console (111). Option Anchor rods



Description Anchor rod profile. Define the length and number of rods on the Anchor rods tab.



Type of reinforcing bars



Select the reinforcing bar type.



Anchors to



Select to which part the anchor rods are attached, and how the anchors are attached. Default is Column and Weld.



Anchors all the same L



Select whether the anchor rods have the same length.



Washer



Washer profile. Define the thickness of the washer on the Anchor rods tab.



Nut



Nut profile. Define the height of the nut on the Anchor rods tab.



Weld washer and nut to anchor



Select whether washers and nuts are welded to the anchors.



Tube top



Tubular embed for creating a round hole for the anchors. The tube top starts at the bottom level of the nut.



Tube bottom



Tubular embed for creating a round hole for the anchors. The height of the tubular profile can be modified on the Anchor rods tab.



Tubes around anchors to beam



Select how the tubes around the anchors are attached to the beam. Default is Weld.



Tubes all the same L Select whether the tubes have the same length.



Concrete Detailing



68



Beam and column connections



Concrete console (111): Anchor rods



Use the Anchor rods tab to define dimensions and position of the anchor rods in Concrete console (111).



Description 1



Anchor rod length, hole diameter and top offset.



2



Number of anchor rods, distances and edge distances.



3



Anchor rod distribution options. Useful when the beam is not aligned with the column.



Concrete Detailing



69



Beam and column connections



Description 4



Select the type of the hole in the beam. Default is Circular. If you set the type to Circular, use the two boxes on the left to define the hole diameter. If you set the type to Square, use the four boxes on the left to define the dimensions of the square cut.



5



Height of the tubular profile, nut and washer.



6



Anchor rods and cuts



Default. Anchor rods are created. Holes for the anchors are created.



Anchor rods are created. No holes are created.



Only holes are created. No anchors are created.



Concrete Detailing



70



Beam and column connections



Description Only anchor rods are created. No holes are created.



Cut-out in the concrete beam. Anchor rods are created. No holes are created.



Concrete console (111): Socket tab



Use the Socket tab to define whether socket anchors are created, how they are connected and the dimensions and position of the socket anchors in Concrete console (111). If you create the sockets on the Socket tab, the anchor rods on the Anchor tab are automatically considered as sockets. Option



Description



Create socket



Select whether sockets are created and which parts are included.



Connect socket to prim by



Select how the sockets are connected to the main part.



Connection rod-connector



Select the connection method between the rod and the connecting profile.



Type of reinforcing bars



Select the rod type.



Leg rotation



Select the direction of the sockets. You can enter an angle in the box on the right.



Connecting profile



Properties for the connecting profile and the rod.



Rod Partname component



Concrete Detailing



If you want to use a custom part to create the socket, select the Custom part option in the Create socket list. Then browse for the component, and use the list of options to position the custom part.



71



Beam and column connections



Concrete beam-beam (112)



Concrete beam - beam (112) creates a connection between a concrete beam and one or two secondary concrete beams. Objects created •



Neoprene



•



Steel plates



•



Anchor rods



•



Tubes



•



Sockets



Use for Situation



Description Connection between two concrete beams.



Connection between three concrete beams.



Selection order 1.



Select the main part (beam).



Concrete Detailing



72



Beam and column connections



2.



Select one or two secondary parts (beam).



3.



Click the middle mouse button to create the connection.



Part identification key



Part 1



Beam



2



Beam



Picture tab



Use the Picture tab to control the part dimensions and the shapes of the parts, and the recesses. Dimensions



Concrete Detailing



73



Beam and column connections



Description



Example



1



Define the gap between the main part and the secondary part on the left and the right side.



2



Define the vertical gap between the main part and the secondary part.



3



Define the length of the neoprene.



Concrete Detailing



74



Beam and column connections



Description



Example



4



Define the gap between the neoprene and the secondary part on the left and the right side.



5



Define the length of the steel plate.



6



Define the gap between the steel plate and the secondary part on the left and the right side.



Concrete Detailing



75



Beam and column connections



Description 1



Example



Define the distance from the centerline of the secondary parts to the outer contour of the main part on the left side.



Concrete Detailing



76



Beam and column connections



Description



Example



2



Define the distance from the centerline of the secondary parts to the outer contour of the main part on the right side.



3



Define the distance from the edge of the first secondary part to the centerline.



Concrete Detailing



77



Beam and column connections



Description



Example



4



Define the distance from the edge of the second secondary part to the centerline.



5



Define the depth of the recess in the main part.



Concrete Detailing



78



Beam and column connections



Description



Example



6



Define the depth of the recess in the secondary part.



7



Define the width of the recess in the first secondary part.



Concrete Detailing



79



Beam and column connections



Description



Example



8



Define the width of the recess in the second secondary part.



9



Define the width of the neoprene.



10



Define the distance from the edge of the neoprene to the edge of the main part.



Concrete Detailing



80



Beam and column connections



Description



Example



11



Define the distance from the edge of the neoprene to the edge of the main part.



12



Define the width of the steel plate.



13



Define the distance from the edge of the steel plate to the edge of the main part.



Concrete Detailing



81



Beam and column connections



Description



Example



14



Define the distance from the edge of the neoprene to the edge of the main part.



15



Define the distance from the edge of the recess in the main part to the edge of the secondary part.



Parts tab



Use the Parts tab to control the neoprene and steel plate properties and how these parts are connected. Neoprene and steel plate Option



Description



t, b, h



Define the neoprene or the steel plate thickness, width and height.



Pos_No



Define a prefix and a start number for the part position number.



Concrete Detailing



82



Beam and column connections



Option



Description



Material



Define the material grade.



Name



Define a name for the neoprene or the steel plate.



Class



Define the part class number for the neoprene or the steel plate.



Comment



Add a comment for the neoprene or the steel plate.



Neoprene properties A neoprene plate for absorbing shock and for damping sound can be used between the main and the secondary parts. Option Neoprene to



Description Define to which part the neoprene is connected. The neoprene can also be a loose part. In the second list, define how the neoprene is connected to the part.



Holes in Neoprene



Define how the holes in the neoprene are created.



Diameter of Holes in Neoprene



Define the diameter of the holes in the neoprene. Define whether the neoprene is created as one single plate or as two plates and the edge distance from the neoprene to the secondary parts.



Steel plate properties One or two additional steel plates can be used between the main and the secondary parts. Option



Description



Add steel plate to the primary by



Define how the steel plate is connected to the main part.



Negative volume around steel plate



Define whether there is a negative volume around the steel plate.



Concrete Detailing



83



Beam and column connections



Anchors tab



Use the Anchors tab to control the properties of anchor rods, nuts, washers and the top and bottom tubes. Anchor rods, Nut, Washer, Plate, Tube top, Tube bottom Anchor rods can be used between the main and the secondary parts. Define the length and number of rods on the Anchor rods tab. Nuts and washers can be created. Define the height of nuts and washers on the Anchor rods tab. Tubes can be used between the main and the secondary parts. Define the height of the tubular profiles on the Anchor rods tab. Option



Description



t, b, h



Define the part thickness, width and height.



Pos_No



Define a prefix and a start number for the part position number.



Material



Define the material grade.



Name



Define a name that is shown in drawings and reports.



Class



Define the part class number.



Comment



Add a comment for the part.



Anchor rods Anchors to



Define to which part the anchor rods are connected. The anchor rods can also be loose parts. In the second list, define how the anchor rods are connected to the part.



Anchors all the same L



Define whether the anchor rods have the same length.



Type of reinforcing bars



Define the type of reinforcing bars.



Bottom section



Define the type of profile in the bottom section.



Washer Define the position of the washer handles.



Concrete Detailing



84



Beam and column connections



Washer plate Define the position of the plate handles.



Define whether the washers and nuts are welded to the plates. Tube top and tube bottom You can add a tubular embed for creating a round hole for the anchors. The tube top starts at the bottom level of the nut. Tubes around anchors to beam



Define how to connect the tubes to the beam.



Tubes all the same L



Define whether the tubes have the same length.



Parameters tab



Use the Parameters tab to control the connecting options. Anchors only in secondary



Select whether anchor rods are included only in the secondary parts.



Fit secondaries perpendicular Select how to fit the secondary parts. to



Concrete Detailing



85



Beam and column connections



Anchor rods tab



Use the Anchor rods tab to control the number, dimensions and position of the anchor rods and the dimensions of the recesses in the main and secondary parts. Dimensions



Concrete Detailing



86



Beam and column connections



Description 1



Define the size of the holes in the beam.



2



Define the size of the recesses in the beam in both directions.



Concrete Detailing



Example



87



Beam and column connections



Description 3



Define the type of the holes in the beam.



4



Define the distance between the top of the anchor rod and the top of the beam.



Concrete Detailing



Example



88



Beam and column connections



Description 5



Define the distance between the bottom of the recess and the top of the anchor rod.



6



Define the distance between the bottom of the recess in the main part and the bottom of the recess in the secondary part.



Concrete Detailing



Example



89



Beam and column connections



Description 7



Example



Define the distance from the centerline of the secondary parts to the outer contour of the main part.



Concrete Detailing



90



Beam and column connections



Description 8



Example



Define the width of the anchor rod hook.



Concrete Detailing



91



Beam and column connections



Description 9



Define the height of the anchor.



10



Define the angle of the anchor rod hook.



Concrete Detailing



Example



92



Beam and column connections



Description 11



Example



Define the radius of the anchor rod hook in the main part in the vertical direction.



Concrete Detailing



93



Beam and column connections



Description 12



Define the anchor rod edge distances from the main part.



13



Define the number of anchor rods.



14



Define the anchor rod spacing.



Example



Use a space to separate anchor rod spacing values. Enter a value for each space between anchor rods. For example, if there are 3 anchor rod rows, enter 2 values.



Concrete Detailing



94



Beam and column connections



Description 15



Define the anchor rod edge distances from the secondary parts.



16



Define the number of anchors rods.



17



Define the anchor rod spacing.



Example



Use a space to separate anchor rod spacing values. Enter a value for each space between anchor rods. For example, if there are 3 anchor rod rows, enter 2 values.



Concrete Detailing



95



Beam and column connections



Description



Example



1



Define the distance between the top side of the top tube and the top of the part.



2



Define the height of the nut.



Concrete Detailing



96



Beam and column connections



Description



Example



3



Define the height of the washer.



4



Define the distance between the bottom side of the top tube and the bottom side of the recess.



5



Define the distance between the top side of the bottom tube and the bottom side of the recess.



Concrete Detailing



97



Beam and column connections



Description 6



Example



Define the distance between the bottom side of the bottom tube and the bottom side of the part.



Recesses Define whether anchors and recesses are created. Option



Description Anchors and recesses



Anchors



Recesses



Socket tab



Use the Socket tab to control the socket properties and how the sockets are connected. If you create the sockets on the Socket tab, the anchors on the Anchors rods tab are automatically considered as sockets in the Concrete beam-beam (112) connection.



Concrete Detailing



98



Beam and column connections



Sockets Option



Description



Create socket



Select whether sockets are created and which parts are included.



Connect socket to prim by



Select how the sockets are connected to the main part.



Connection rod-connector



Select how to connect the rod connector.



Type of reinforcing bars



Select the rod type.



Leg rotation



Select the direction of the sockets. In the second list, define the angle of the sockets.



Connecting profile, Rod Option



Description



t, b, h



Define the connecting profile and the rod thickness, width and height.



Pos_No



Define a prefix and a start number for the part position number.



Material



Define the material grade for the connecting profile and the rod.



Name



Define a name that is shown in drawings and reports.



Class



Define the part class number for the connecting profile and the rod.



Comment



Add a comment for the connecting profile and the rod.



Partname component Option Partname component



Description If you use a custom component to create the socket, browse for the component and use the list of options to position the custom component.



Rebars in primary tab / Rebars in secondary tab



Use the Rebars in primary tab and Rebars in secondary tab to create reinforcing bars and stirrups at the connection position. On the Rebars in primary tab you can create longitudinal reinforcing bars and stirrups for the main part, and on the Rebars in secondary tab you can define stirrups for the secondary part.



Concrete Detailing



99



Beam and column connections



Rebars in primary Create the rebars for the main part either by defining the number of rebars, or by setting the spacing or the exact space. Set the rebar properties, and define the cover thickness and leg length from the edge of the opening.



Concrete Detailing



100



Beam and column connections



Rebars in secondary



General tab / Analysis tab Click the links below to find out more: General tab Analysis tab



1.3 Panels and walls This section introduces components that can be used in concrete panels and walls. Click the links below to find out more: •



Wall to wall connection (page 101)



•



Wall groove seam detail (page 107)



•



Anchor (10) (page 113)



•



Wall wall teeth (12) (page 127)



•



Electric box in wall (84) (page 136)



•



Sandwich And Double Wall (page 152)



•



Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam (page 176)



•



Sandwich Wall Vertical Seam (page 183)



•



Sandwich wall window (page 189)



•



Wall layout tools (page 211)



Wall to wall connection



Wall to wall connection creates a connection between two precast walls. The connection can contain a groove with or without additional shear teeth. Additionally, the connection can create reinforcing bar loops or embeds that work as connectors in the walls.



Concrete Detailing



101



Panels and walls



Objects created •



Groove



•



Shear teeth or shear cups



•



U bars



•



Embeds



•



Long bar



Use for Situation



Description Wall to wall connection with groove, shear teeth, U bars and a loose bar.



Selection order 1.



Select the first wall.



2.



Select the second wall. The connection is created automatically when the second wall is selected.



See also Wall to wall connection: Edge shape tab (page 102) Wall to wall connection: Extra teeth tab (page 103) Wall to wall connection: Connectors tab (page 104)



Wall to wall connection: Edge shape tab



Use the Edge shape tab to select the wall framing type in the Wall to wall connection.



Concrete Detailing



102



Panels and walls



Option



Description Wall framing type selection. Wall framing type selection affects the wall edge shape options. You can use the connection in three different modeling situations: •



end-to-end



•



corner With this option the first selected wall is fitted to align with the exterior face of the second selected wall.



•



tee



Wall edge shape. Select the edge shape of each wall. Adjust the free space between two walls.



Wall edge dimensions. To set the edge shape and dimensions independently for both walls, use the Use given dimensions option. To make the edge shape similar in both walls, use the Same to right side option. Groove start and end point. You can define the start point and the end point of the groove. If you do not enter a value, or enter 0, the groove is applied at full height of the wall.



Wall to wall connection: Extra teeth tab



Use the Extra teeth tab to define the properties for additional shear teeth in the Wall to wall connection.



Concrete Detailing



103



Panels and walls



Option



Description Select whether additional shear teeth or shear cups are created. Teeth or cups can be created also when there is no groove.



Dimensions of a single tooth or cup.



Location of the first tooth or cup in the first wall and in the second wall, and the spacing between the teeth or cups. You can enter a list of spaces, for example 10*400, or just a single value. When you enter a single value, the number of teeth or cups is calculated automatically based on the height of the connection.



Wall to wall connection: Connectors tab



Use the Connectors tab to select the type of connectors created in the Wall to wall connection. Connector type The content of the Connectors tab varies depending on the type of the selected connectors.



Concrete Detailing



104



Panels and walls



Option



Description Connector type. •



No connectors. Only groove with or without shear teeth is created.



•



Connectors are created by using the selected embed (custom part).



•



Connectors are created by adding reinforcing bar loops. Reinforcing bar loop is formed depending on the wall framing type.



In addition, the connector can optionally create one or more long reinforcing bars along the connection. Embeds and loose rebar Option



Description Location of the first connector (embed) in the first wall and in the second wall, and the spacing between the connectors. You can enter a list of spaces, for example 10*400, or just a single value, for example 300. When you enter a single value, the number of connectors is calculated automatically based on the height of the connection. You can also define the extended length of the loose long bar. Select which embeds (custom parts) are created in each wall. If the embed has any saved attributes, select which attributes are used. Offset of the embed. By default, the embed input points are in the center of the wall.



Concrete Detailing



105



Panels and walls



U bars and loose rebar Option



Description Location of the first connector (reinforcing bar loop) in the first wall and in the second wall, and the spacing between the connectors. You can enter a list of spaces, for example 10*400, or just a single value, for example 300. When you enter a single value the number of connectors is calculated automatically based on the height of the connection. You can also define the extended length of the loose long bar. Reinforcing bar loop dimensions. The available dimension options depend on the wall framing type selected on the Edge shape tab. Many of the dimensions have counter parts in the first wall and in the second wall. It is enough to enter one dimension and by default the counter part dimension gets the same value.



Number of bars



Number of long loose bars. If you do not want to create a loose long bar, enter 0 as the Number of bars.



Reinforcing bar properties Enter the properties for reinforcing bar Grade, Size, Name, Class, Prefix and Start Number.



Concrete Detailing



106



Panels and walls



Customization If needed, you can create your own embed (custom part) and use it as a connector. When creating the embed, ensure that the input points are defined so that they are compatible with Wall to wall connection. The image below shows examples of the input points.



Wall groove seam detail



Wall groove seam detail creates a groove with optional shear teeth to a precast wall, a slab or a similar part. Additionally the connection can create reinforcing bar loops or embeds that work as connectors in the walls. Objects created •



Groove



•



Shear teeth or shear cups



•



U bars



•



Embeds



•



Long bar



Concrete Detailing



107



Panels and walls



Use for Situation



Description Groove with shear teeth and U bars.



Selection order 1.



Select the wall or slab.



2.



Pick the start point of the groove.



3.



Pick the end point of the groove.



See also Wall groove seam detail: Edge shape tab (page 108) Wall groove seam detail: Extra teeth tab (page 109) Wall groove seam detail: Connectors tab (page 110)



Wall groove seam detail: Edge shape tab



Use the Edge shape tab to select the orientation of the groove in the Wall groove seam detail. Option



Description Groove orientation selection. Define the orientation of the groove in relation to the input points.



Concrete Detailing



108



Panels and walls



Option



Description Groove edge shape.



Groove start and end point in relation to input the points. You can define the start point and the end point of the groove. If you do not enter a value, or enter 0, the groove is applied at full height of the wall.



Wall groove seam detail: Extra teeth tab



Use the Extra teeth tab to define the properties for additional shear teeth in the Wall groove seam detail. Option



Description Select whether additional shear teeth or shear cups are created. Teeth or cups can be created also when there is no groove.



Dimensions of a single tooth or cup.



Concrete Detailing



109



Panels and walls



Option



Description Location of the first tooth or cup in the groove, and the spacing between the teeth or cups. You can enter a list of spaces, for example 10*400, or just a single value. When you enter a single value, the number of teeth or cups is calculated automatically based on the height of the detail.



Wall groove seam detail: Connectors tab



Use the Connectors tab to select the type of connectors created in the Wall groove seam detail. Connector type The content of the Connectors tab page varies depending on the type of the selected connectors. Option



Description Connector type. •



No connectors. Only groove with or without shear teeth is created.



•



Connectors are created by using the selected embed (custom part).



•



Connectors are created by adding reinforcing bar loops. Reinforcing bar loop is formed depending on the framing type.



In addition, the connector can optionally create one or more long reinforcing bars along the connection. Embeds and loose rebar Option



Description Location of the first connector (embed) in the groove, and the spacing between the connectors. You can enter a list of spaces, for example 10*400, or just a single value, for example 300. When you enter a single value, the number of connectors is



Concrete Detailing



110



Panels and walls



Option



Description calculated automatically based on the height of the detail. You can also define the extended length of the loose long bar. Select which embeds (custom parts) are created in each groove. If the embed has any saved attributes, select which attributes are used. Offset of the embed. By default, the embed input points are in the center of the groove.



U bars and loose rebar Option



Description Location of the first connector (reinforcing bar loop) in the groove, and the spacing between the connectors. You can enter a list of spaces, for example 10*400, or just a single value, for example 300. When you enter a single value, the number of connectors is calculated automatically based on the height of the detail. You can also define the extended length of the loose long bar. Reinforcing bar loop dimensions. The available dimension options depend on the orientation of the groove selected on the Edge shape tab.



Concrete Detailing



111



Panels and walls



Option



Description



Number of bars



Number of long loose bars If you do not want to create a loose long bar, enter 0 as the Number of bars.



Reinforcing bar properties Enter the properties for reinforcing bar Grade, Size, Name, Class, Prefix and Start Number. Customization If needed, you can create your own custom part (embed) and use it as a connector. When creating the embed, ensure that the input points are defined so that they are compatible with Wall groove seam detail. The image below shows examples of the input points.



Concrete Detailing



112



Panels and walls



Anchor (10)



Anchor (10) connects two precast concrete parts, for example, two panels or a column to a panel. The precast concrete parts are connected with L profiles and with embedded connection profiles that act as anchors, for example, custom component bolt anchors or cast-in channels. The bolt anchors and the cast-in channels can be single-sided or double-sided. Additionally, seams can be defined between the main part and the secondary parts. Objects created •



Anchors (bolt anchors or cast-in channels)



•



L profiles



•



Bolts



Concrete Detailing



113



Panels and walls



Use for Situation



Description Connection with L profiles and bolt anchors.



Connection with L profile and cast-in channel.



Selection order 1.



Select the main part (precast concrete panel or a column).



2.



Select the secondary part (precast concrete panel). The connection is created automatically when the secondary part is selected.



See also Anchor (10): Picture tab (page 115) Anchor (10): Anchors tab (page 117) Anchor (10): Conn profile tab (page 120) Anchor (10): Bolts tab (page 123)



Concrete Detailing



114



Panels and walls



Anchor (10): Cuts tab (page 124)



Anchor (10): Picture tab



Use the Picture tab to define the number of anchors (bolt anchors or cast-in channel profiles), edge distances and plate embed offset in Anchor (10).



Description 1



Example



Horizontal offset of the anchors. The offset can be defined for both concrete parts separately.



2



Vertical offset of the anchors. The offset can be defined for the top and bottom side.



Concrete Detailing



115



Panels and walls



Description 3



Select how the anchors are distributed.



4



Select which of the anchors are omitted.



Concrete Detailing



116



Example



Panels and walls



Description 5



Example



Connection plate horizontal offset from the centerline of an anchor. This option is available only if you have set the orientation of the connection plate as follows on the Conn profile tab:



Anchor (10): Anchors tab



Use the Anchors tab to define the properties, position and orientation of the anchors (bolt anchors or cast-in channel profiles) in Anchor (10).



Concrete Detailing



117



Panels and walls



Description



Example



1



Anchor properties in the main part.



2



Select on which side the anchors are created in the main part.



3



Select whether a profile from the profile catalog is used as an anchor, or a custom part from the Applications & components catalog.



Concrete Detailing



118



Panels and walls



Description



Example



4



Anchor properties in the secondary part.



5



Select on which side the anchors are created in the secondary part.



6



Select whether a profile from the profile catalog is used as an anchor, or a custom part from the Applications & components catalog.



7



Select the connection method of the anchor.



8



•



Default (same as Weld to element)



•



Weld to element



•



Cast unit to element



•



Not add to element (bolt anchors or cast-in channels are loose parts)



•



Sub-assembly



Position and rotation of the anchors in the main concrete part. For the Position in plane and Position in depth options, an offset can be defined.



9



Orientation of the anchors in the main part.



10



Position and rotation of the anchors in the secondary concrete part. For Position in plane and Position in depth options, an offset can be defined.



Concrete Detailing



119



Panels and walls



Description



Example



11



Orientation of the anchors in the secondary part.



12



Select the cut-out method of the anchors.



Default, no cut



No cut



Cut-out shape is the exact profile contour of the bolt anchor or the cast-in channel



Box shape cut-out



Anchor (10): Conn profile tab



Use the Conn profile tab to define the properties and position of the connection L profile in Anchor (10).



Concrete Detailing



120



Panels and walls



Description



Example



1



Connection profile properties.



2



Select on which side the connection profiles are created.



3



Select whether a profile from the profile catalog is used as a connection profile, or a custom part from the Applications & components catalog.



Concrete Detailing



121



Panels and walls



Description 4



Example



Position and rotation of the connection profiles. For the Position in plane and Position in depth options, an offset can be defined.



5



Orientation of the connection profile.



6



Connection profile cuts. These options are available only if you have set the orientation of the



Concrete Detailing



122



Panels and walls



Description connection profile as follows on the Conn profile tab:



7



Select the connection method of the connection profile.



8



Select the connection profile type. •



Library profile (define the profile using the L profile options).



•



Folded plate (define the dimensions using the options below).



Anchor (10): Bolts tab



Example



Use the Bolts tab to define the bolt properties and offsets in Anchor (10).



Concrete Detailing



123



Panels and walls



Description 1



Horizontal bolt distances from the L profile edges. Default value is half of L profile flange width.



2



Vertical bolt offsets. Reference is the L profile centerline. Default value is 0 mm.



3



Select how the bolts are added in the main part.



4



Select how the bolts are added in the secondary part.



5



Bolting direction.



Anchor (10): Cuts tab



Use the Cuts tab to define the cuts and the seams in the main and secondary parts in Anchor (10). Additionally, the main part can be extended, or the secondary part thickness can be increased or decreased. You can create a seam by defining a cut between the main part and the secondary part.



Concrete Detailing



124



Panels and walls



Description 1



Example



Extension of the main part. If you need to extend the part, enter a value. Ensure that you have also selected a cut method from the cut type list. If you select the No cut option, the part is not extended.



2



Seam width. Reference is the L profile centerline. Default value is 0 mm.



3



Left side cut along the secondary part. Reference is the part centerline. Part thickness is decreased.



4



Right side cut along the secondary part. Reference is the part centerline. Part thickness is decreased.



Concrete Detailing



125



Panels and walls



Description 5



Example



Cut reference for the main and secondary parts.



Main part near side



Main part centerline



Main part far side



6



Select the cut type. Default, no cut



Concrete Detailing



126



Panels and walls



Description



Example



Reference is the main part. Secondary part will be adjusted to the main part using a fitting.



Reference is the main part. Secondary part will be adjusted to the main part using a line cut.



Reference is main part. Just like previous options, but the longest part of the panel will be removed using a line cut.



No cut



Concrete Detailing



127



Panels and walls



Wall wall teeth (12)



Wall wall teeth (12) connects two perpendicular concrete panels with a toothshaped connection. The number of teeth can be set. Injection tubes and connection bars can be added to the connection. The connection is created with or without seams. Objects created •



Tooth connection (2 or 3 teeth) between two panels



•



Injection tubes



•



Connection bars



Use for Situation



Description 2-teeth connection between two panels. The height of the teeth can be modified and the clearance between the teeth can be set.



3-teeth connection between two panels with connection bar.



Concrete Detailing



128



Panels and walls



Situation



Description Tooth connection between two panels with connection bar and socket.



Selection order 1.



Select the main part (concrete panel).



2.



Select the secondary part (concrete panel). The connection is created automatically when the secondary part is selected.



See also Wall wall teeth (12): Picture tab (page 129) Wall wall teeth (12): Parts tab (page 131) Wall wall teeth (12): Cut sec tab (page 133) Wall wall teeth (12): Cut prim tab (page 134) Wall wall teeth (12): Socket tab (page 135)



Wall wall teeth (12): Picture tab



Use the Picture tab to define the number of teeth, the height of teeth, and seam widths in Wall wall teeth (12). Wall wall teeth (12) has two main connection types: A (two teeth) and B (three teeth).



Concrete Detailing



129



Panels and walls



Description 1



Select the number and position of teeth. Standard is A 2 teeth bottom up.



2



Horizontal seam width in the main part. For type A (2-teeth connection).



3



Secondary part tooth height. Reference is center of the seam. For type A (2-teeth connection).



4



Main part tooth height. Reference is center of the seam. For type A (2-teeth connection). This value has an effect only if the secondary part tooth height (3) has no value.



5



Vertical seam width between the teeth. For type A (2-teeth connection).



6



Horizontal seam width in the main part. For type A (2-teeth connection).



Concrete Detailing



130



Panels and walls



Description 7



Top tooth height. For type B (3 teeth connection). Reference is center of the seam. If there is no value, and the middle tooth height and the bottom tooth height are defined, then the top tooth gets the residual height distance. If none of the tooth heights are defined, then all three teeth get an equal height: (wall height - seam width) / 3 This value has lowest priority from the three tooth height-defining values. Example: Panel height is 1500mm. All three tooth heights are defined: •



Top: 400mm



•



Middle: 700mm



•



Bottom: 600mm



Total defined height of teeth = 1800mm. Result: top tooth gets height 1500-700-600=200mm 8



Vertical seam width between the teeth. For type B (3-teeth connection).



9



Bottom tooth height. Reference is center of the seam. For type B (3-teeth connection). If there is no value, and the top tooth and the middle tooth height are defined, then the bottom tooth gets the residual height distance.



Wall wall teeth (12): Parts tab



Use the Parts tab to define the properties and dimensions of injection tubes and connection bars in Wall wall teeth (12).



Concrete Detailing



131



Panels and walls



Option Injection tubes



Description Injection tube properties. You can define the placing of the injection tubes separately for the top tooth, middle tooth and bottom tooth.



1



Select whether an injection tube is created. Example:



Default is No action. Top tooth Middle tooth Bottom tooth



Concrete Detailing



Select whether an injection tube is created in the teeth and select the connection method. Default is Part cut.



132



Panels and walls



Option Connection bar



Description Connection bar properties. One connection bar can be created through the teeth.



2



Select whether a connection bar is created and the connection method. Default is Yes + weld 1.



3



Depth of a connection bar from the top of the top tooth. Default is 0.



4



Depth of an injection tube from the top of the top tooth. Default is 0.



5



Depth of a connection bar from the top of the bottom tooth. Default is top tooth height + seam width. If both values 5 and 7 are defined, then the value in the box 7 overwrites the value in the box 5.



6



Depth of an injection tube from the bottom of the bottom tooth. Default is 0.



7



Depth of a connection bar from the bottom of the bottom tooth. If both values 5 and 7 are defined, then the value in the box 7 overwrites the value in the box 5.



Wall wall teeth (12): Cut sec tab



Use the Cut sec tab to define the way the secondary concrete panel is cut in Wall wall teeth (12). By default the component creates a 2-teeth connection. You can also define a fixed offset value for the cut. If the concrete panels are not perpendicularly orientated, you can define how the secondary part is fitted to the main part.



Concrete Detailing



133



Panels and walls



Wall wall teeth (12): Cut prim tab



Use the Cut prim tab to define the way the main concrete panel is cut in Wall wall teeth (12). You can also define a fixed offset value for the cut. If the concrete panels are not perpendicularly orientated, you can define how the main part is fitted to the secondary part.



Concrete Detailing



134



Panels and walls



Wall wall teeth (12): Socket tab



Use the Socket tab to define whether socket anchors are created, how they are connected and the dimensions and position of the socket anchors in Wall wall teeth (12). Sockets are created only if you have created connection bars. Option



Description Dimensions for socket anchor, rod profile and connecting profile.



Create socket



Select whether sockets are created and which parts are included. Note that a socket is created only if a connection bar has been created on the Parts tab. In the examples the red profile is the connection bar:



Connect socket



Select how the sockets are connected to the main part. Default is By cast unit.



Connection rod-connector



Select the connection method between the rod and the connecting profile. Default is Part add conn to rod.



Rod type



Select the rod type. Default is Poly-profile.



Leg rotation



Concrete Detailing



Select the direction of the rod. You can enter an angle in the box on the right.



135



Panels and walls



Option



Description Default is Front.



Connecting profile



Properties for the connecting profile, rod and bottom section.



Rod



Note that the bottom section is partadded to the rod automatically.



Bottom section



Example:



Partname component



If you want to use a custom part to create the socket, select the Custom part option in the Create socket list. Then browse for the component, and use the list of options to position the custom part.



Electric box in wall (84)



Electric box in wall (84) creates electric boxes in walls. Objects created •



Electric boxes



•



Tubes



Concrete Detailing



136



Panels and walls



Use for Situation



Description Electric box in a wall with top connection.



Electric box in a wall with bottom connection.



Concrete Detailing



137



Panels and walls



Situation



Description Electric box in a wall with top and bottom connections.



Selection order 1.



Select a concrete panel.



2.



Pick a position for the electric box.



3.



Pick a position for the top connection.



4.



Pick a position for the bottom connection. The electric box and connections are created automatically.



Concrete Detailing



138



Panels and walls



Part identification key



Part Electric box Panel See also Electric box in wall (84): Picture tab (page 139) Electric box in wall (84): Parts tab (page 142) Electric box in wall (84): Electric box tab (page 143) Electric box in wall (84): Top conn / Bottom conn tab (page 147) Electric box in wall (84): UDA tab (page 149)



Electric box in wall (84): Picture tab



Use the Picture tab to control the shape, number and position of the tubes and the position of the electric boxes in the Electric box in wall (84) modeling tool.



Concrete Detailing



139



Panels and walls



Tube direction Option



Description Select the tube shape in the up direction.



Select the tube shape in the down direction.



Select the tube direction in relation to the start point (yellow) and end point (magenta) of the wall.



Select the number of tubes in the up direction.



Concrete Detailing



140



Panels and walls



Option



Description Select the number of tubes in the down direction.



Tubes to concrete / Electric parts to concrete Select how the tubes and the electric parts are connected to the concrete part. Option



Description



As Add as a subassembly to the subassembly concrete part. By cast unit



Add to the concrete part.



Welds



Weld to the concrete part.



Not



Do not connect to the concrete part.



Tube and electric box positions Option



Description Select the position of the up connection in the concrete part. Select the position of the electric box in the concrete part. Select the position of the down connection in the concrete part.



Concrete Detailing



141



Panels and walls



Electric box in wall (84): Parts tab



Use the Parts tab to control the tube properties at the top and bottom of the concrete part and the position of the tube reference points in the Electric box in wall (84) modeling tool. Tube top / Tube bottom Option



Description



Default



t, b, h



Define the tube thickness, D19 width and height.



Pos_No



Define a prefix and a start ET 1 number for the part position number.



Material



Define the material grade. PVC



Name



Define a name for the tube.



E-tube



Class



Define the part class number for the tube.



2



Comment



Add a comment for the tube.



1st reference point Define a reference point for the tube. The reference point determines the position of the part mark in a drawing. Option At top



Description



Example



Start point is positioned at the top of the tube.



Concrete Detailing



142



Panels and walls



Option



Description



Example



At bottom



Start point is positioned at the bottom of the tube.



At longest segment



Start point is positioned at the longest segment of the tube.



At smallest segment



Start point is positioned at the smallest segment of the tube.



Electric box in wall (84): Electric box tab



Use the Electric box tab to control the shape, number and dimensions of the electric boxes and to define a possible connection piece (Tube a) in the Electric box in wall (84).



Concrete Detailing



143



Panels and walls



Electric box / Tube a Option



Description



Default



t, b, h



Electric box and the connection piece (Tube a) thickness, width and height.



D19



Pos_No



Prefix and a start number for the part position number.



ET 1



Material



Material grade.



PVC



Name



Name for the electric box and the connection piece.



E-tube



Class



Part class number for the electric box and the connection piece.



2



Comment



Add a comment for the electric box and the connection piece.



Rotation Control the rotation of the electric box and the connection piece. Option



Example



Front



Top



Concrete Detailing



144



Panels and walls



Option



Example



Back



Below



Electric box shape Option



Description



Profiles / Custom part



You can use a profile from the profile catalog or select a custom component from the Applications & components catalog.



Example custom part:



If you use a custom component, browse for the component and use the list of options to position the custom component. Select the shape of the electric box and define the dimensions for the electric box.



Select an extra shape for creating several different types of electric boxes. This shape is visible in drawings and it indicates the front and back side of the electric box.



Concrete Detailing



145



Panels and walls



Option



Description



Number =



Number of electric boxes in horizontal or vertical direction.



1



Select the top connection pieces for the electric box.



2



Select the left side connection pieces for the electric box.



3



Select the right side connection pieces for the electric box.



4



Select the bottom connection pieces for the electric box. Dimensions of the connection pieces.



Positions of the connection pieces.



Concrete Detailing



146



Panels and walls



Option



Description Options to add the electric box to the part. •



Create electric box



•



Create electric box + cut electric box



•



Create electric box + cut bounding box



Electric box in wall (84): Top conn / Bottom conn tab



Use the Top conn and Bottom conn tabs to control the shape and dimensions of the top and bottom connection boxes, and to define a possible connection piece (Tube a) in Electric box in wall (84). Top box / Bottom box / Tube a Option



Description



t, b, h



Top and bottom connection box and the connection piece (Tube a) thickness, width and height.



Pos_No



Prefix and a start number for the part position number.



Material



Material grade.



Name



Name for the connection box and the connection piece.



Class



Part class number for the connection box and the connection piece.



Comment



Add a comment for the connection box and the connection piece.



Rotation Control the rotation of the connection piece (Tube a). Connection box shape Top conn



Bottom conn



Profiles / Custom part



Concrete Detailing



Description You can use a profile from the profile catalog or select a custom component from



147



Panels and walls



Top conn



Bottom conn



Description the Applications & components catalog. If you use a custom component, browse for the component and use the list of options to position the custom component. Select the shape of the connection box and define the dimensions for the box.



Dimensions of the connection box.



Position of the connection piece.



Concrete Detailing



148



Panels and walls



Top conn



Bottom conn



Description Options to add the connection box to the part. •



Create connection box



•



Create connection box + cut connection box



•



Create connection box + cut bounding box



Select the connection pieces for the connection box.



Select the number of connection boxes.



Connect Define how to the connection box is connected.



Electric box in wall (84): UDA tab



Use the UDA tab to add information in the parts’ user-defined attributes (UDAs) in the Electric box in wall (84) modeling tool.



Concrete Detailing



149



Panels and walls



Option Part



Description Select to which part the related information can be saved: Nothing Tube top Tube bottom Tubes Electric box Top connection Bottom connection All



UDA name



Enter the name of the user-defined attribute.



UDA name:



• For example, to add a • comment UDA, open the • objects.inp file in a text editor and search for • comment. The following attribute is shown:



UDA:



comment



•



Comment



fabricator



•



Fabricator name



•



Article number



•



Type



art_number type



attribute("comment", "j_comment", string, "%s", no, none, "0.0", "0.0") The first text between the quotation marks is the UDA name, comment. The entered name is case sensitive. Type



Type of the user-defined attribute.



Value



Enter the value that is saved to the user-defined attribute.



Concrete Detailing



150



Use String for text, Integer for numbers, Float for numbers with decimals and Option for selecting an item in a list. You can find the UDA type in the objects.inp file



Panels and walls



Example



Concrete Detailing



151



Panels and walls



Sandwich And Double Wall



Sandwich And Double Wall creates a precast concrete wall. The wall consists of an inner shell, foil, insulation, and outer shell. Objects created •



Inner shell



•



Foil (optional)



•



Insulation (optional)



•



Outer shell (optional)



Concrete Detailing



152



Panels and walls



Use for Situation



Description Sandwich wall, split shells.



Sandwich wall, brick wall on outer shell as surface treatment.



Selection order 1.



Pick the first point.



2.



Pick the second point. The wall is created automatically when the second point is picked.



Concrete Detailing



153



Panels and walls



Part identification key



Part 1



Inner shell



2



Foil



3



Insulation



4



Outer shell



See also Sandwich And Double Wall: Parts tab (page 154) Sandwich And Double Wall: Vertical section tab (page 161) Sandwich And Double Wall: Horizontal section tab (page 164) Sandwich And Double Wall: Insulation tab (page 170) Sandwich And Double Wall: Outside Shell tab (page 172) Sandwich And Double Wall: UDA tab (page 175)



Sandwich And Double Wall: Parts tab



Use the Parts tab to control the dimensions and positioning of the sandwich wall inner shell, foil, insulation, and outer shell in Sandwich And Double Wall. The inner shell is always created. Numbering settings Set Numbering settings to Enabled to show Prefix and Start number for all parts.



Concrete Detailing



154



Panels and walls



Inner shell Option



Description



Thickness



Default



Define the thickness of the inner shell.



150 mm



Foil Option



Description



Default



Thickness



Define the thickness of the foil.



1 mm



Create foil



Define whether the foil is created.



Yes and subassembly



Insulation Option



Description



Default



Thickness



Define the thickness of the insulation.



50 mm



Create insulation



Define whether the insulation is created.



Yes and subassembly



Outer shell Option



Description



Default



Thickness



Define the thickness of the outer shell.



1 mm



Create outer shell



Define whether the outer shell is created:



Yes + cast unit



Option Pos_No



Description



Default



Prefix and start number for the part position number. Some components have a second row of fields where you can enter the assembly position number.



Material



Material grade.



Name



Name that is shown in drawings and reports.



Concrete Detailing



155



The default part start number is defined in the Components settings in File menu --> Settings --> Options.



The default material is defined in the Part material box in the Components settings in File menu --> Settings --> Options.



Panels and walls



Option Class



Description



Default



Part class number.



Positioning You can use Standard or Advanced positioning. With advanced positioning, there are more options for sandwich wall width and foil position. Sandwich wall width Option: Standard



Description No gaps between the parts. Sandwich wall thickness is the sum of all created parts.



Define the total wall width. A gap is created between the outer shell and the insulation.



Option: Advanced



Description Define the total wall width and the gap between the inner shell and the insulation. Another gap is created between the outer shell and the insulation.



Define the total wall width and the gap between the outer shell and the insulation. Another gap is created between the inner shell and the insulation.



Concrete Detailing



156



Panels and walls



Option: Advanced



Description Define the total wall width and the gap between the inner shell and the insulation. No gap is created between the outer shell and the insulation.



Foil position Option



Description By default, the foil is placed on the outer side of the inner shell.



Define another foil position. Set Positioning to Advanced.



Concrete Detailing



157



Panels and walls



Point offset Option



Description Define the offset from the outer face of the inner shell.



Define the offset from the inner face of the inner shell.



Define the offset from the center of the sandwich wall.



Define the offset from the inner face of outer shell.



Define the offset from the outer face of outer shell.



Parametric profile Option



Description



Parametric section



Concrete Detailing



Set to Enabled to define the prefix for the parametric profiles of the sandwich parts.



158



Panels and walls



Option



Description



Prefix for the parametric profile



Select the prefix for the parametric profile: •



Position h*b and Position b*h to create plate profiles without a prefix. If Parametric section is set to Disabled, the parts have an h*b prefix, for example, 2000*100.



Par. section prefix



Concrete Detailing



•



Position PLh*b and Position PLb*h to create plate profiles whose prefix starts with PL.



•



Par. section h*b and Par. section b*h require you to enter a parametric plate profile prefix.



Define the prefix of the parametric profile.



159



Panels and walls



See also Sandwich And Double Wall (page 152) Sandwich And Double Wall: Vertical section tab (page 161) Sandwich And Double Wall: Horizontal section tab (page 164) Sandwich And Double Wall: Insulation tab (page 170) Sandwich And Double Wall: Outside Shell tab (page 172) Sandwich And Double Wall: UDA tab (page 175)



Concrete Detailing



160



Panels and walls



Sandwich And Double Wall: Vertical section tab



Use the Vertical section tab to control the vertical level part properties in Sandwich And Double Wall. You can define both the top and the bottom level. The levels can be set as absolute levels, or vertically relative (displaced) to the points. Top level Option



Description



n1, n2, n3, n4



Define the absolute top level height.



h1, h2, h3, h4



Define the part height from the bottom face.



d2, d3, d4



Define the vertical displacement from the adjacent part.



When you use relative levels, the levels of all other parts depend on the inner shell level.



Concrete Detailing



161



Panels and walls



Bottom level Option



Description



m1, m2, m3, m4



Define the absolute bottom level height.



a1, a2, a3, a4



Define the bottom offset from the point.



b2, b3, b4



Define the vertical displacement from the adjacent part.



When you use relative levels, the levels of all other parts depend on the inner shell level.



Thicken innershell You can define a thickening for both the top and the bottom side of the inner shell.



Concrete Detailing



162



Panels and walls



Option



Description



Example



Inner shell is not thickened.



Inner shell is thickened towards the outer face of the insulation. Define the insulation height to prevent collisions. Inner shell is thickened to the inner face of the outer shell.



Inner shell is thickened to the outer face of the outer shell. Define the outer shell height to prevent collisions. Option Thickness



Description Define the inner shell thickness. If you do not enter a value, the inner shell thickness defined on the Parts tab is used.



Thickening parts Select how the top and bottom thickening parts are added to the inner shell.



Concrete Detailing



163



Panels and walls



Example



Option Offset options



Description



Example



Select the offset options for the thickening parts. Offset can be defined for both wall ends.



Sandwich And Double Wall: Horizontal section tab



Use the Horizontal section tab to define the wall ends and to control how the wall parts are split in the horizontal direction in Sandwich And Double Wall. Wall end The wall end options are the same for both ends. First wall end



Concrete Detailing



Second wall end



164



Panels and walls



Wall end offset Option



Description Inner shell end is fixed. Define the offset for the ends of the foil, insulation, and outer shell.



Insulation end is fixed. Define the offset for the ends of the inner shell, foil, and outer shell.



Outer shell end is fixed. Define the offset for the ends of the inner shell, foil, and insulation.



Corner shape to the inside direction. For the outer shell angle, define the offset from the inner face of the inner shell. Insulation is along the inner shell. Corner shape to the inside direction. Define the length of the outer shell angle.



Concrete Detailing



165



Panels and walls



Example



Option



Description Corner shape to the inside direction. For the outer shell angle, define the offset from the inner face of the inner shell. Insulation is along the outer shell. Corner shape to the outside direction. Define the horizontal offset for the outer shell. There is no gap between the insulation and the inner shell angle. Corner shape to the outside direction. Define the horizontal offset for the outer shell. For the inner shell angle, define the offset from the outer face of the inner shell. Corner shape to the outside direction. Define the horizontal offset for the outer shell. For the inner shell angle, define the length. Angled shells are not created. Define horizontal offset for the inner shell, insulation, and outer shell.



Concrete Detailing



166



Panels and walls



Example



Corner shape Option



Description Select the inner shell corner shape.



Select the outer shell corner shape.



Select the insulation corner shape.



Add corner to main shell Add the corner to the shell. The options are:



Concrete Detailing



•



Add to 4 Cast Unit (4 = outer shell)



•



Add to 4 Sub assembly



•



Add to 1 Cast Unit (1 = inner shell)



•



Add to 1 Sub assembly



167



Panels and walls



Vertical chamfer Option



Description Define whether a vertical chamfer is created. Define the horizontal and vertical chamfer dimensions, and the part prefix and the start number.



Horizontal offset To use the options, set the Split Front view option to Enabled. Option



Description Define the horizontal offset for the foil, insulation, and outer shell. The main gap between the inner shells is defined in the Split Front view section of the tab.



Define the horizontal offset for the inner shell, foil, and outer shell. The main gap between the insulation parts is defined in the Split Front view section of the tab. Define the horizontal offset for the inner shell, foil, and insulation. The main gap between outer shells is defined in the Split Front view section of the tab. Define a 90-degree angle for the inner shell and the vertical offset towards the angled shell from the inner face of the outer shell. The main gap between the inner shells is defined in the Split Front view section of the tab. Additional options for the 90-degree angle:



Concrete Detailing



168



Panels and walls



Option •



Description Define the corner shapes for the inner shell.



•



Define how the corner is added to the inner shell.



•



Define the part prefix and the start number.



Mirroring Option



Description Define whether the sandwich wall is mirrored.



Splitting parts To split wall parts, set the Split Front view option to Enabled. Option



Description Parts are not split. Define the horizontal offset for both wall ends using the points as reference points. Parts are split. Define the section width and the number of sections. First end offset is the reference for the first section width at the first wall end. Second end offset is the reference for the last section width at the second wall end. Parts are split. Define the section width and the number of sections. First end offset is the reference for the first section width at the first wall end. Point (2) is the reference of the last section width at the second wall end.



Concrete Detailing



169



Panels and walls



Option



Description Parts are split. Define the section width and enter the number of sections. Point (1) is the reference of the start section at the first wall end. Second end offset is the reference for the last section width at the second wall end. Parts are split. Define the section width and enter the number of sections. Points (1, 2) are the references for the section width at both wall ends.



Option



Description Define the horizontal direction.



Sandwich And Double Wall: Insulation tab



Use the Insulation tab to control the vertical and/or horizontal splitting of the insulation in Sandwich And Double Wall. Dimensions



Concrete Detailing



170



Panels and walls



Option



Description



1



Define whether the insulation is split: •



Insulation is not split.



•



Insulation is split in the horizontal direction.



•



Insulation is split in the vertical direction.



•



Insulation is split in the horizontal and vertical direction.



2



Define the number and width of the middle sections.



3



Define the gap between the sections.



4



Define the width of the first and last section in the horizontal direction.



5



Define the height of the top and bottom section in the vertical direction.



6



Define which wall end is used for distributing the insulation sections.



Concrete Detailing



171



Panels and walls



Option



Description



Point direction



Define the direction of the points. The options are horizontal or vertical.



This option affects the representation of workshop drawings.



Sandwich And Double Wall: Outside Shell tab



Use the Outside shell tab to control the vertical and/or horizontal splitting of the outer shell in Sandwich And Double Wall. You can also define chamfers and add a brick wall surface. Dimensions



Option



Description Define the direction for the splitting.



Description 1



Define whether the outer shell is split: •



Concrete Detailing



172



Outer shell is not split.



Panels and walls



•



Description Outer shell is split in the horizontal direction.



•



Outer shell is split in the vertical direction.



•



Outer shell is split in the horizontal and vertical direction.



2



Define the number and width of the middle sections.



3



Define the gap between the sections.



4



Define the width of the first and last section in the horizontal direction.



5



Define the height of the top and bottom section in the vertical direction.



Chamfering Option



Description



Vertical chamfers



Concrete Detailing



Define the vertical chamfers. Select a chamfer shape from the list and define the chamfer dimensions.



173



Panels and walls



Option



Description



Horizontal chamfers



Define the horizontal chamfers. Select a chamfer shape from the list and define the chamfer dimensions.



Chamfer side



Define the sides where the chamfers are created.



For example:



Brick wall properties Set the Brick wall option to Enabled to create a brick wall.



Concrete Detailing



174



Panels and walls



Option



Description



Example



Select the brick wall type for the outer shell and define the brick dimensions, mortar height and width.



Wall edges



Define whether the wall edges are created as loose parts or whether they are added into an assembly.



Sandwich And Double Wall: UDA tab



Use the UDA tab to define user-defined attributes for the inner shell, foil, insulation, and outer shell in Sandwich And Double Wall. You can define multiple UDAs for each part. UDAs can be used as filters, and they can be displayed in drawings and reports. User-defined attributes For example:



Concrete Detailing



175



Panels and walls



Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam



Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam creates a horizontal seam between two sandwich walls. Seam dimensions and rabbets can be defined for all layers: inner shell, foil, insulation, and outer shell. In addition, you can define an extra foil layer.



Concrete Detailing



176



Panels and walls



Objects created •



Seams



•



Rabbets



•



Foil



•



Insulation



•



Extra foil layer



Use for Situation



Description Seams between sandwich wall shells.



Seams with additional rabbets.



Before you start To be able to select the needed parts, activate the Select objects in components



switch.



Selection order 1.



Select the inner shell of the first sandwich wall.



2.



Select the inner shell of the second sandwich wall. The seam is created automatically when the secondary part is selected.



Concrete Detailing



177



Panels and walls



Part identification key



Part 1



Concrete part (wall, column, beam, slab)



2



Point Multiple points can be picked.



See also Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam: Picture tab (page 178) Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam: Rabbets tab (page 181) Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam: Extra foils tab (page 181)



Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam: Picture tab



Use the Picture tab to control the horizontal seam properties in Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam. Seam position Seams can be defined for inner shells, insulation and outer shells. Draft angles can be defined for the outer shells.



Concrete Detailing



178



Panels and walls



Define the seam position between the sandwich wall shells. The middle line between the walls is used as a reference when the seam position is calculated. Example:



Shell classes



Define the part classes to be applied to the seams. By default, the Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam component creates inner shells with class 1, foil with class 2, insulation with class 3, and outer shells with class 4. Use these classes to apply seams. To prevent the creation of seams between foils, insulation shells and outer shells, leave the Insulation classes box empty. Rabbets in insulation You can create rabbets in the insulation layer.



Concrete Detailing



179



Panels and walls



Option



Description No rabbet for the insulation layer.



One side rabbet for the top and bottom of the insulation layer. Rabbet depth and width can be defined.



Mirrored one side rabbet for the top and bottom of the insulation layer. Rabbet depth and width can be defined.



Two sided rabbets for the top and bottom of the insulation layer. Rabbet depth and width can be defined.



Concrete Detailing



180



Panels and walls



Offset You can define offset for the seam.



Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam: Rabbets tab



Use the Rabbets tab to define rabbets in inner shells, insulation layers and outer shells in Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam. Rabbet side Select to which side of the sandwich wall the rabbets are applied. You can define the rabbets separately for both sides. The options are: •



Top side



•



Bottom side



•



Both sides



Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam: Extra foils tab



Use the Extra foils tab to define an extra foil layer in the seam in Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam. Foil Option



Description



Default



t



Define the extra foil thickness.



1 mm



Pos_No



Prefix and start number for the part position number.



The default part start number is defined in the Components settings in File menu --> Settings -> Options.



Material



Material grade.



The default material is defined in the Part material box in the Components settings in File menu --> Settings -> Options.



Name



Name for the extra foil.



FOIL



Concrete Detailing



181



Panels and walls



Option



Description



Class



Part class number for the extra foil layer.



Comment



Add a comment for the extra foil layer.



Default



Connection method Option No connection



At Inside shell



Position h*b



Auto



Description Select how the extra foil is attached to the sandwich wall. •



No connection (foil is a loose part)



•



Weld



•



Cast unit



•



As subassembly



Select the profile to which the extra foil is connected. •



At inside shell



•



At outside shell



Select a prefix for the foil layer. •



Position h*b and Position b*h create a profile without a prefix.



•



Position PLh*b and Position PLb*H create a profile which start with PL prefix.



•



Par. section h*b and Par. section b*h: enter a prefix in the box below.



Select the rotation of the foil layer.



Concrete Detailing



•



Auto



•



Below



•



Front



•



Top



•



Back



182



Panels and walls



Option Foil shape



Description Define shape of the extra foil.



Sandwich Wall Vertical Seam



Sandwich Wall Vertical Seam creates a vertical seam between two sandwich walls. Seam dimensions and rabbets can be defined for all layers: inner shell, foil, insulation, and outer shell. Objects created •



Seam



•



Rabbets



•



Foil



•



Insulation



Concrete Detailing



183



Panels and walls



Use for Situation



Description Seams between sandwich wall shells.



Seams with additional rabbets.



Limitations The component works only if the sandwich walls are parallel. Before you start To be able to select the needed parts, activate the Select objects in components



switch.



Selection order 1.



Select the inner shell of the first sandwich wall.



2.



Select the inner shell of the second sandwich wall. The seam is created automatically when the secondary part is selected.



Part identification key



Part 1



Inner shell of the first sandwich wall



Concrete Detailing



184



Panels and walls



Part 2



Inner shell of the second sandwich wall



See also Sandwich Wall Vertical Seam: Picture tab (page 185) Sandwich Wall Vertical Seam: Picture tab (page 185)



Sandwich Wall Vertical Seam: Picture tab



Use the Picture tab to control the vertical seam properties in Sandwich Wall Vertical Seam. Seam position Seams can be defined for inner shells, insulation and outer shells. Draft angles can be defined for the outer shells.



Define the seam position between the sandwich wall shells. The middle line between the walls is used as a reference when the seam position is calculated. Example:



Concrete Detailing



185



Panels and walls



Shell classes



Define the part classes to be applied to the seams. By default, the Sandwich Wall Vertical Seam component creates inner shells with class 1, foil with class 2, insulation with class 3 and outer shells with class 4. Use these classes to apply seams. For example, to prevent the creation of seams between foils, insulation shells and outer shells, leave the Insulation classes box empty. Asymmetrical seams You can create asymmetrical seams and/or rabbets in the insulation layer. Option



Description Symmetrical seams. No rabbet for the insulation layer.



Concrete Detailing



186



Panels and walls



Option



Description Symmetrical seams. Rabbet depth can be defined for the insulation layer.



Asymmetrical seams for the insulation layer and outer shell. No rabbet for the insulation layer.



Asymmetrical seams for the insulation layer and outer shell. Rabbet depth can be defined for the insulation layer.



Offset / Mirror



You can define offset for the seam.



Sandwich Wall Vertical Seam: Rabbets tab



Use the Rabbets tab to define rabbets in inner shells, insulation layers and outer shells in Sandwich Wall Vertical Seam. Rabbet side Select to which side of the sandwich wall the rabbets are applied.



Concrete Detailing



187



Panels and walls



•



Right side Rabbets are equal on both sides, but the rabbet dimensions on the right side are applied to both sides.



•



Left side Rabbets are equal on both sides, but the rabbet dimensions on the left side are applied to both sides.



•



Both sides Rabbet dimensions can be defined separately for both sides.



Concrete Detailing



188



Panels and walls



•



Both sides mirrored Rabbet dimensions can be defined separately for both sides, but sides are mirrored.



Rabbet position Typically the vertical seams go from the top to the bottom of the sandwich wall. Define the seam offsets for the top and bottom sides. Offsets are applied only to the inner and outer shells.



Concrete Detailing



189



Panels and walls



Sandwich wall window



Sandwich wall window creates a rectangular window opening in a sandwich wall, or alternatively, a window and a door opening. The opening is created through up to four parts (inner shell, foil, insulation, and outer shell). You can select whether the foil is created. A frame can be created, as well as extra foils and additional parts. The frame can be a wooden frame or a concrete border, added to the inner shell. Objects created •



Rectangular opening



•



Wooden frame or concrete border



•



Extra foils



•



Additional parts



Use for Situation



Description Opening in a sandwich wall, with a wooden frame and foil layers.



Concrete Detailing



190



Panels and walls



Situation



Description Opening in a sandwich wall, with a concrete border in the inner shell.



Opening in a sandwich wall, with a door opening.



Selection order 1.



Select the inner shell of the sandwich wall.



2.



Pick the first position.



3.



Pick the second position.



Concrete Detailing



191



Panels and walls



The second position point is needed to complete the input also if you have selected an option for only one input point in the component dialog box. In this case, the second point location does not matter. The opening is created automatically when the second position is picked. Part identification key



Part 1



Sandwich wall element



2



First picked position



3



Second picked position



Picture tab



Use the Picture tab to control the dimensions and parts of the opening. Dimensions Option



Dimensions



Create Window



Concrete Detailing



192



Panels and walls



Option



Dimensions



Create Window + Door Set the Door location to Right side or Left side. The options on the Door side detail tab and Door bottom detail tab are available when you set the Create option to Window + Door. Option 1



Description Set the points for the opening: •



2 points Pick two points to create the opening (points 2 and 3 in the image).



•



Point 1 B H Pick two points to create the opening. With this option, point 2 shown in the image is the reference point. Point 3 is only needed to complete the input. Define the width and height of the opening.



•



Point 2 B H Pick two points to create the opening. With this option, point 3 shown in the image is the reference point. Define the width and height of the opening.



•



2 Points H Pick two points to create the opening (points 2 and 3 in the image). Define the height of the opening.



2



Vertical offset from the insertion point. When you create Window + Door, this is the vertical offset for the window.



3



Horizontal offset from the insertion point.



4



Width of the opening. When you create Window + Door, this is the width of the window.



5



Height of the window.



6



Width of the door.



7



Vertical offset for the door.



Concrete Detailing



193



Panels and walls



Select other layers Option



Description



Insulation, Wall Parts where the opening is created. To create the opening to the insulation and the external layer parts, enter the class numbers. If you do not enter any numbers, the opening is only created to the part you selected when applying the component. Foil



You can use Sandwich wall window both for sandwich panels with a foil and for sandwich panels without a foil (default). If you have a sandwich panel with a foil, select Yes and enter the class number of the foil. The frame shape options shown on the Bottom detail, Left detail, Right detail, and Top detail tabs depend on whether the foil is created or not.



Bottom detail tab / Left detail tab / Right detail tab



Use the Bottom detail tab, Left detail tab, and Right detail tab to control the size, position and shape of the opening bottom, left side, and right side, and the frame size and properties. On the Right detail tab, you can select that the right detail is created the same as the left detail. Frame Part Frame



Description Define the frame profile by selecting the profile from the profile catalog.



Option Pos_No



Default 50*50



Description Prefix and start number for the part position number. You can enter the assembly position number on the second row.



Material



Material grade.



Name



Name that is shown in drawings and reports.



Class



Part class number.



Frame shape The options for inner and outer frame are the same regardless of whether the foil is created or not.



Concrete Detailing



194



Panels and walls



Inner



Outer



Description Default Cut or extension is not created. AutoDefaults can change this option. Any of the three options is used depending on the frame size. Cut or extension is not created.



Extension is created. If the frame is narrower than the insulation, the concrete part is extended to fill the gap.



Cut is created. If the frame is wider than the insulation, the concrete part is cut so that the frame fits.



Concrete Detailing



195



Panels and walls



Middle



Description This option is available when the Foil option is set to Do not create on the Picture tab. Frame is created.



This option is available when the Foil option is set to Do not create on the Picture tab. Frame is not created.



This option is available when you select Yes in the Foil option on the Picture tab. Frame is created.



This option is available when you select Yes in the Foil option on the Picture tab. Frame is created.



This option is available when you select Yes in the Foil option on the Picture tab. Frame is not created.



Concrete Detailing



196



Panels and walls



Additional recess Define the vertical and horizontal dimensions for the additional recess. By default, the recess is not created.



Frame corner cuts Option



Description Frame corners are not cut.



Define the horizontal and vertical dimensions of the frame corner cuts.



Continuous slope Select whether frame edges are sloped. Option



Description By length



By angle



You can set the length or the angle for both sides separately. The default is that frame edges are not sloped.



Concrete Detailing



197



Panels and walls



Top detail tab



Use the Top detail tab to control the size, position, number, and shape of the opening top side. Part Part



Description



Frame



Define the frame profile by selecting the profile from the profile catalog.



Foil2



Foil2 is the additional foil created only on the top side.



Default 50*50



Define the thickness. Option Pos_No



Description Prefix and start number for the part position number. You can enter the assembly position number on the second row.



Material



Material grade.



Name



Name that is shown in drawings and reports.



Class



Part class number.



Top frame shape The options for inner and outer frame are the same regardless of whether the foil is created or not. Inner



Outer



Description Default Cut or extension is not created. AutoDefaults can change this option. Any of the three options is used depending on the frame size.



Concrete Detailing



198



Panels and walls



Inner



Outer



Description Cut or extension is not created.



Extension is created. If the frame is narrower than the insulation, the concrete part is extended to fill the gap.



Cut is created. If the frame is wider than the insulation, the concrete part is cut so that the frame fits.



Middle



Description This option is available when the Foil option is set to Do not create on the Picture tab. Frame is created.



Concrete Detailing



199



Panels and walls



Middle



Description This option is available when the Foil option is set to Do not create on the Picture tab. Frame is not created.



This option is available when you select Yes in the Foil option on the Picture tab. Frame is created.



This option is available when you select Yes in the Foil option on the Picture tab. Frame is not created.



Additional recess Define the vertical and horizontal dimensions for the additional recess. By default, the recess is not created.



Concrete Detailing



200



Panels and walls



Frame corner cuts Option



Description Frame corners are not cut.



Horizontal and vertical dimensions of the frame corner cuts.



Drip mold Option



Description Drip mold is not created.



Drip mold is created. Define the mold dimensions.



Drip mold is created. Define the mold dimensions. The drip mold can be created to any of the shape options. For example, if the shape has a bevel, the drip mold is created at the same angle as the bevel. Continuous slope Select whether frame edges are sloped. Option



Description By length



Concrete Detailing



201



Panels and walls



Option



Description By angle



You can set the length or the angle for both sides separately. The default is that frame edges are not sloped.



Extra foils tab



Use the Extra foils tab to control the creation of extra foils on the top, bottom, right side, and left side of the opening. Part Part Extra foil



Description Thickness of the foil.



Option Pos_No



Default 50*50



Description Prefix and start number for the part position number. You can enter the assembly position number on the second row.



Material



Material grade.



Name



Name that is shown in drawings and reports.



Class



Part class number.



Extra foil dimensions



Concrete Detailing



202



Panels and walls



Description 1



Define whether extra foils are created.



2



Define the inside offset.



3



Define the foil width.



Shells to cut Option



Description All shells are cut. The inner shell is not cut. The inner shell and the foil are not cut. The inner shell and the foil are not cut. An insulation extension is created. Define the width and the material grade of the insulation extension. The outer shell is cut.



Additional parts tab



Use the Additional parts tab to control the size, position, number, and alignment of additional parts. Parts Select whether additional parts, custom component parts, or no additional parts are created. Part



Description



Parts



Define the profile of the additional parts by selecting the profile from the profile catalog.



Custom component parts



Define the custom component parts by selecting the component



Concrete Detailing



203



Panels and walls



Default D5



Part



Description from the Applications & components catalog.



Default



You can also use a configuration file to define the properties. Option Pos_No



Description Prefix and start number for the part position number. You can enter the assembly position number on the second row.



Material



Material grade.



Name



Name that is shown in drawings and reports.



Class



Part class number.



Define distances Select whether to define the distances between the parts by entering the distance dimensions on this tab or by using an external text file. You can use an external file to automate the creation of additional parts when window sizes differ. The name of the external file is SandwichPanelWindowAdditionalParts.dat. The file is located in the .. \Environments\Common\system folder. The image below shows an example of a local standard for creating additional parts. M is a module that is 100 mm.



The SandwichPanelWindowAdditionalParts.dat configuration file that contains the needed specifications for the example above is as follows: BOTTOM; 0;599;1;1 600;1200;1;2;145



Concrete Detailing



204



Panels and walls



1201;1800;1;3;145 TOP; 1201;1800;1;1 LEFT; 0;599;1;1 600;1200;1;2;145 1201;2100;1;3;145 RIGHT; 0;599;1;1 600;1200;1;2;145 1201;2100;1;3;145



The keywords BOTTOM, TOP, LEFT and RIGHT define the side of the window the settings are applied to. The syntax in the file is as follows: bmin;bmax;cm;nd;dmax;d1;d2;d3. bmin



Smallest window dimension to apply the setting.



bmax



Biggest window dimension to apply the setting.



cm



Creation method: •



1 means use the number of parts for nd.



•



2 means use maximum spacing for nd.



Depending on the creation method (cm):



nd



•



Number of parts, when cm is 1.



•



Maximum allowed distance between parts, when cm is 2.



d1



Distance from the start point to the first additional part (optional).



d2



Distance from the first additional part to the second (optional).



d3



Distance from the second additional part to the third (optional).



The additional parts are placed symmetrically, so distances d1, d2 and d3 are also used from the end point. If the optional distances d1, d2 and d3 are not defined, the parts are placed at equal distances. In the image above 0;599;1;1 means that when the window width is equal or bigger than 0, but equal or less than 599, the creation method is by number of parts and 1 part should be created. 600;1200;2;300;145 would mean that when the window width is equal or bigger than 600, but equal or less than 1200, the creation method is use maximum spacing. The maximum allowed spacing between additional parts is 300 mm. The first part (and last part) distance is 145 mm. If the window width is 1200, three more parts are needed (1200 - 2x145)/300=3.03. The spacing between the additional parts will then be (1200 - 2x145)/4 = 227.5 mm. Placement Select whether additional part placement is the same or different on each side.



Concrete Detailing



205



Panels and walls



Option



Description Placement dimensions for the bottom, left side, and right side. If additional part placement is the same on each side, define the bottom dimensions only. Placement dimensions for the top side.



Door edge options The options for controlling door edges are available when you set the Create option to Window + Door on the Picture tab, and the Placement option to Different each side on the Additional parts tab. Option



Description



Create on door side



No, Same as window side, Same as door side



Create in bottom detail



No, Same as bottom



Connections tab



Use the Connections tab to control how the wooden frame, additional parts, extra foil, and extensions are connected to the shells. Add Option



Description



Wooden frame to, Additional parts, Select to which part the wooden Extra foil to frame, additional parts, and extra foil are connected. The Extra foil to option is shown if you have selected to create the foil on the Picture tab.



Concrete Detailing



206



Panels and walls



Connect extensions to their shells Option



Description



Inside shell extension, Outside shell extension, Insulation shell extension, Foil extension



Select how the extension parts are connected to their main parts. The Foil extension option is shown if you have selected to create the foil on the Picture tab.



Edge connection Define the corner connection type for wooden frames. Option



Description Cut both frames in a 45-degree angle.



Extend horizontal frames.



Extend vertical frames.



Door side detail tab / Door bottom detail tab



Use the Door side detail tab and Door bottom detail tab to control the size, position, and shape of the door side and bottom, and the frame size and properties. Create door The options on the Door side detail tab and Door bottom detail tab are available when you set the Create option to Window + Door on the Picture tab. Same as options •



Same as on the Door side detail tab: Select the door short side detail. •



None



•



Same as window side follows the side setting of the window side.



•



Same as door side follows the door side setting.



The door long side detail follows the setting of the corresponding window side.



Concrete Detailing



207



Panels and walls



•



Same as bottom on the Door bottom detail tab: Yes follows the setting of the bottom window.



Frame Part Frame



Description Define the frame profile by selecting the profile from the profile catalog.



Option Pos_No



Default 50*50



Description Prefix and start number for the part position number. You can enter the assembly position number on the second row.



Material



Material grade.



Name



Name that is shown in drawings and reports.



Class



Part class number.



Frame shape The options for inner and outer frame are the same regardless of whether the foil is created or not. Inner



Outer



Description Default Cut or extension is not created. AutoDefaults can change this option. Any of the three options is used depending on the frame size. Cut or extension is not created.



Concrete Detailing



208



Panels and walls



Inner



Outer



Description Extension is created. If the frame is narrower than the insulation, the concrete part is extended to fill the gap.



Cut is created. If the frame is wider than the insulation, the concrete part is cut so that the frame fits.



Middle



Description This option is available when the Foil option is set to Do not create on the Picture tab. Frame is created.



This option is available when the Foil option is set to Do not create on the Picture tab. Frame is not created.



Concrete Detailing



209



Panels and walls



Middle



Description This option is available when you select Yes in the Foil option on the Picture tab. Frame is created.



This option is available when you select Yes in the Foil option on the Picture tab. Frame is created.



This option is available when you select Yes in the Foil option on the Picture tab. Frame is not created.



Additional recess Define the vertical and horizontal dimensions for the additional recess. By default, the recess is not created.



Frame corner cuts Option



Description Frame corners are not cut.



Concrete Detailing



210



Panels and walls



Option



Description Define the horizontal and vertical dimensions of the frame corner cuts.



Door side frame extension Option



Description Frame on the door side is created only to the bottom level of the window. Frame on the door side is extended to the top level of the window. Enter the extension distance in the box.



Continuous slope Select whether frame edges are sloped. Option



Description By length



By angle



You can set the length or the angle for both sides separately. The default is that frame edges are not sloped.



Wall layout tools



Wall Layout tools is a set of components that you can use for creating and modifying all common types of concrete walls, such as solid precast panels from single layers to double walls and sandwich walls, and different wall



Concrete Detailing



211



Panels and walls



structures that are cast on the site. The wall structure may contain several layers, for example, structural layers, insulation, void, and surface treatments. You can use direct modification to flexibly change the wall geometry, layer offsets, openings, and seam lines. Wall layout is the main component in the set and it is used for defining the wall layout. Wall layout is available on the Concrete tab, click Panel --> Wall layout, and in the Applications & components catalog. The other Wall Layout tools are available in the Applications & components catalog: •



Wall layout connector connects the walls to each other.



•



Wall layout opening sets the default values for openings. Use direct modification to create and modify openings.



•



Wall layout seam divides the wall segment into two or more cast units by adding seams. Use direct modification to create seams.



•



Wall layout elementation divides the wall into elements according to length, height, number, weight, or crane lifting capacity.



•



Wall layout layer swapper is intended for swapping the casting order of layers in a double wall. Only certain properties of the two layers are swapped, such as name, class, numbering settings, and all UDAs. The geometry of the layers is not swapped. If one layer is created using the layer creation option Add as sub-assembly (shell 2), and the other layer is defined as Add to cast unit (shell 1), these properties are also swapped.



Wall layout



Wall layout creates a single wall or multiple straight wall segments. The wall can be a single-layer solid wall, a double wall, or a sandwich wall that has any number of layers. Design workflow with Wall layout tools



1.



You can build a shape.



2.



You can build a shape and create openings.



3.



You can create wall type definitions.



4.



You can create wall elementation and define detailed wall geometry.



5.



You can define detailed connections, openings, embeds, and reinforcement.



Concrete Detailing



212



Panels and walls



Selection order 1.



Ensure that the Direct modification



2.



On the Concrete tab, click Panel --> Wall layout.



3.



Select the appropriate command on the contextual toolbar:



•



switch is active.



To create one or more straight wall segments, click two or more points.



, and then pick



Note that you can finish the creation to the first picked point to create a closed wall structure. •



To create the wall layout as a closed wall, click or more points.



, and then pick two



Wall layout will automatically connect the first and the last point that you have picked. 4.



Click the middle mouse button to create the wall.



Depending on how many points you pick and how you pick the points, one or more straight wall segments or a closed wall is created in the model. Each created straight segment is a separate instance of the Wall layout component that you can modify separately. When you create two or more wall segments, an instance of the Wall layout connector component is added between each wall segment. In the image below, there are four wall segments in an open shape between the picked points, 1 - 5, and three wall layout connectors at points 2, 3 and 4. If you had created a closed wall, there would be a fifth wall segment between points 5 and 1.



Concrete Detailing



213



Panels and walls



The modeling direction of the wall layout determines which face of the wall layout is shown in the front view of a cast unit drawing when the cast unit drawing coordinate system is set to Fixed. In the image below, the top-in-form face is not set by Wall layout. The image shows an example of sandwich wall settings that you should use when the outside shell is cast against the pallet, and the inside shell is the uppermost shell in the casting.



Concrete Detailing



214



Panels and walls



Alternatively, you can set the top-in-form face with Wall layout. Set Walllayout.Udas.dat to have the top-in-form face property by adding the following row: option FixedMainView j_FixedDrawingMainView The Walllayout.Udas.dat file can be located in the model folder or any of the system folders. General tab Use the General tab to define the basic properties for the whole Wall layout component. The properties on all other tabs are layer-specific, and apply to the layer that you have currently selected in the layer list. Option H, Z1, Z0



Description You have four options for defining the height and the global Z coordinates: •



Define the wall bottom level according to the creation points, and the Position in depth option and value. Define the height with the H option.



•



Define the wall bottom level with the Z0 option (global Z coordinate), and the height with the H option.



•



Define the wall top level with the Z1 option (global Z coordinate), and the height with the H option.



Concrete Detailing



215



Panels and walls



Option •



Description Define the wall bottom level with the Z0 option (global Z coordinate), and the wall top level with the Z1 option (global Z coordinate).



You can use the H option to modify the height of rectangular walls. If you change the wall shape so that it is not rectangular, you cannot define height with this option. Use direct modification instead. Total thickness



Enter the total thickness of the wall layout. Layer thickness is calculated based on the total thickness. Use the total thickness for double walls where the thickness of the void layer or the CIP layer is often flexible. This means that Wall layout can adjust the thickness so that the total thickness is as defined. •



If there are no flexible layers in the wall layout, you can leave the total thickness option empty. Total thickness is not used if there are no flexible layers.



•



If there is more than one flexible layer, the thickness is divided equally between those layers.



Cast unit name



Enter a name for the cast unit.



Prefix



Enter a prefix for the cast unit.



Start number



Enter a start number for the cast unit.



Position in plane Define the wall layout location in relation to the line between the input points. Enter the offset distance, if needed. Position in depth Define the wall layout vertical location in relation to the line between the input points. Enter the offset distance, if needed. Layer tab Use the Layer tab to define the properties of a single layer. Select the layer in the layer list, or in the preview image. Layer list



Concrete Detailing



216



Panels and walls



Layers



Description



Example



The layer list shows the layers of the wall.



The example image below shows a preview of the wall layers. The Use the buttons to control image is automatically the number and the order updated when you of the layers: change the layer type. • The selected layer is Click to add a new highlighted with a magenta frame. layer. • Click to remove the selected layer. • Click to change the order of the layers by moving the selected layer up or down in the list. Use the check box in front of the layer name to control whether the properties of the selected layer are modified. Use the leftmost check box to control whether the number of layers and the order of the layers are modified when you modify the Wall layout component. Layer properties Option Layer name



Description Enter a name for the layer. This name is shown in the layer list. Layer names are also shown in the direct modification toolbar when you modify wall boundary offsets. You can select which layer to modify. Layer names are not visible in reports or drawings.



Layer type



•



Concrete Detailing



Structure: Typically used for solid walls, double walls, and the concrete layers of sandwich walls. Use



217



Panels and walls



Option



Description this type if you want to create a cast-in-place layer between double wall layers instead of a void. •



Insulation: Insulation layer in a sandwich wall. Insulation gets a different density in Wall layout elementation (100 kg/m³).



•



Void: Void between double wall layers. Use this type if you do not want to create any parts for the layer.



•



Foil: Typically a very thin layer which is not detailed in the corners.



•



Surface: Surface treatment on top of a structural layer. Typically, a surface layer is the first and/or the last layer.



•



Component: Layer is not created as a part. Instead, an instance of the component selected in the Layer component option is added.



Layer elementation



Select whether the layer is split into two pieces using seams.



Layer creation



Select how the layer is created to the precast cast unit: •



Add to cast unit: All layer parts are added to a single main cast unit.



•



Add as sub-assembly: The layer part is added as a sub-assembly to the main cast unit.



•



Do not add to cast unit: The layer part is not added to the main cast unit. It will be its own assembly or cast unit. This option changes the concrete type from precast to cast in place.



Layer component



Select a component when you have set the layer type to Component. Instead of creating the layer as a part, an instance of the component is created.



Attribute settings



Select an attribute file for the layer component. If you need specific component properties for the layer component, you can define the properties in the component dialog box and save them as an attribute file.



Layer thickness



Enter the layer thickness. You can leave the layer thickness empty to let Wall layout set the layer thickness so that the total thickness is correct as defined on the General tab. The



Concrete Detailing



218



Panels and walls



Option



Part name, Class, Material, Pour phase, Surface treatment, Prefix, Start number



Description void layer or the CIP layer in a double wall can often have a flexible thickness.



Define the name, class, material, part prefix and start number of the layer part. Define the pour phase for CIP layers. Select the surface treatment when you have set the layer type to Surface.



Vertical offset tab Use the Vertical offset tab to define the vertical offsets of each layer at the top and bottom horizontal edges of the wall layout. Note that you can define the offsets at any other edge by using direct modification and seams. UDA tab Use the UDA tab to define the user-defined attributes of each layer part in the wall layout. Note that the content of the UDA tab may vary depending on your Tekla Structures environment. You can customize the content of the UDA tab.



Modify the wall layout Modify the geometry of the wall layout You can use direct modification to modify the wall layout. Before you start, ensure that the Direct modification switch is active. Select the wall layout to display the direct modification toolbar. To modify the wall layout, select the appropriate command from the toolbar.



Concrete Detailing



219



Panels and walls



You can modify the outer edges of the wall layout by dragging the edges and corner handles. You can also insert vertices by dragging the edge midpoint handles, and delete vertices by selecting a corner handle or edge, and pressing the Delete key. In addition to the standard polygon modification, you can drag the special line handles at the ends of the wall layout to make the wall layout shorter or longer. You can also drag the line handle perpendicular to the wall layout by holding down the Alt key while dragging. As an alternative to dragging the line handle, you can drag the dimension arrowhead. If you know how much you want to shorten or lengthen the wall layout, select the dimension arrowhead and enter the value by which you want the dimension to change. Note that you can use the dimension arrowheads and line handles in a plan view whereas polygon modification is possible only in 3D or section views.



Concrete Detailing



220



Panels and walls



Modify the offset at layer edges Use the Modify wall boundary offsets command on the direct modification toolbar to modify the offsets of the layers at the outer edges of the wall layout, or at the edges of the openings or seams. Select the layer that you are going to modify from the list on the toolbar.



You have three options for modifying the offset at a particular edge: •



Drag the line handle at the edge. You can only drag the line handle perpendicular to the edge.



•



Drag the dimension arrowhead and enter the measurement value.



•



Select the line handle and enter a new offset value. You can select two or more line handles by holding down the Shift key when selecting the handles.



You can modify the top and bottom offsets at the outer edges in the Wall layout dialog box, and the seam offsets in the Wall layout seam dialog box.



Concrete Detailing



221



Panels and walls



You can define that a certain layer is not cut with the opening. First select the opening. On the direct modification toolbar, select the layer and then Do not create.



Concrete Detailing



222



Panels and walls



Wall layout opening



Use direct modification to add openings to wall layouts. Before you start, ensure that the Direct modification



switch is active.



To add an opening, select the wall layout and then select the appropriate direct modification command. You can create either rectangular or polygonal openings. NOTE Use the Wall layout opening tool from the Applications & components catalog only if you want to change the default settings of the openings. You can define the default settings for adding an opening, and set whether to apply detailing and define detailing attributes.



Concrete Detailing



223



Panels and walls



Add an opening to a wall layout Option



Description Add an opening by picking the opening length in the wall. There are five different dimension options to define the opening bottom and top level. To cycle through the options, click the opening dimension button until it shows the wanted option. The button is marked with a blue frame in the example image on the left. The five options are: •



Enter the distance between the bottom of the wall and the bottom of the opening, 800.00 in this example, and the height of the opening, 2400.00. If Position in depth values are used, the bottom distance is measured from the creation points.



•



Enter the distance between the bottom of the wall and the bottom of the opening, and the distance between the bottom of the wall and the top of the opening. If Position in depth values are used, the bottom distance is measured from the creation points.



•



Enter the global Z coordinate of the opening bottom level, and the height of the opening.



•



Enter the height of the opening, and the global Z coordinate of the opening top level.



•



Enter the global Z coordinate of the opening bottom level, and the global Z coordinate of the opening top level.



You can use an architectural drawing as a reference model where you can pick the opening width and the location. Add a rectangular opening by picking two points.



Concrete Detailing



224



Panels and walls



Option



Description Add a polygonal opening by picking three or more points.



Modify an opening in a wall layout Option



Description



Modify the geometry of an opening You can modify an opening in the same way as the outer edges of the wall layout by using the appropriate direct modification command. You can: •



Drag the edges.



•



Drag the corner handles.



•



Insert vertices by dragging the edge midpoint handles.



•



Delete vertices by selecting the corner handle or edge, and pressing the Delete key.



In addition, you can modify the start or the end of the opening by dragging the line handles, or by using the dimension arrowheads. Move and copy an opening



1.



Select an opening by selecting a face inside the opening.



2.



Start dragging the selected face.



3.



To create a copy of the opening, hold down the Ctrl key. To move an opening without changing the shape of the opening, drag the face handle to the desired location.



Concrete Detailing



225



Panels and walls



Option



Description



Delete an opening



Select a face inside the opening and press the Delete key.



Modify the opening detailing



Wall layout can create an opening without any details. Wall layout can also create a detailed opening by inserting an instance of the Sandwich wall window component, which can create a detailed window, or a window + door opening combination. To create a detailed opening, select the opening. Activate detailing on the direct modification toolbar and select the attributes for Sandwich wall window. Note that you can only use detailing components for rectangular openings, or openings that connect a window and a door with the same top edge line.



Wall layout seam



When you create a wall layout, it is at first a single precast wall. Wall layout seam divides the wall layout into two or more precast wall pieces. In the wall layout, the wall layout layers that have the Layer elementation option set to Yes in the Wall layout dialog box are divided. Add and modify wall layout seams Use the Modify seams command on the direct modification toolbar to add and modify seams. Modify seams opens the Wall layout seam dialog box where you can define the seam properties for each wall layer separately. Select the layer in the preview image and define the properties.



Concrete Detailing



226



Panels and walls



Option



Description



Create a connection component



1.



Define the gap dimension at the seam.



2.



Define the gap offset from the seam input position.



Select Yes to create a connection between the two layer parts at the seam. When you select Yes, you can define the other component options.



Component name



Select a connection component from the Applications & components catalog.



Component attributes



Select the attribute file for the connection.



Component primary input



Select which wall piece is the first input part for the connection, seam, or other components created at the seam.



Option



Description



Add a vertical seam



Use the New seam command to add a vertical seam. Pick a point to create the seam. Note that New seam is selected automatically when you use the Modify seams command and the wall layout does not have any seams yet.



Concrete Detailing



227



Panels and walls



Option



Description



Add a polyseam



Use the New polyseam command to add a polyseam. Pick two or more points to create the seam. Polyseams can contain vertical, horizontal, and sloping segments. Extend the start and the end of the polyseam to make it clearly cross the edges of the wall it is dividing.



Move a seam



Move a vertical seam by dragging the seam. You can also move vertical seams by dragging the horizontal line handle or the dimension arrowhead. Move and modify a polyseam like any other polygonal object.



Copy a seam



Copy a vertical seam or a polyseam by holding down the Ctrl key and dragging the seam.



Delete a seam



Delete a vertical seam by selecting the seam handle and pressing the Delete key. Delete a polyseam by deleting all segments of the polyseam.



Modify the seam properties



Concrete Detailing



228



1.



Select a vertical seam or a segment of a polyseam. When you select the first seam, the current properties of the seam are loaded into the Wall layout seam dialog box.



2.



Select two or more seams. Hold down the Shift key and then select the vertical seams, or the segments of a polyseam.



Panels and walls



Option 3.



Description When you have selected the seams, modify the properties in the dialog box and click Modify.



Wall layout connector



Use Wall layout connector to apply a connection between two wall layouts. Wall layout connector fits the layer parts at the corners. You can control the corner gaps by extending or shortening the layers of the walls, and by adding connections between the connected layer parts. Wall layout connector can also add connections between the layer parts when you are using a connection component at the corners. Note that if you have created several wall layouts at one go using the Wall layout tool, wall layout connectors are automatically added between the wall layouts. Wall layout connector is updated automatically when you change the wall type. If you create a wall layout and later add another next to it, you can add a connection between them using the Wall layout connector component in the Applications & components catalog. Select the two wall layouts to create the connection. Ensure that you select the wall layout component instance, not a single object created by the wall layout. The connector is created when you select the second wall layout. Wall layout connector properties Option



Description Define how the layer parts are fitted. Click the button three times to cycle through the three different corner set-up options.



Define whether the panel ends are square or sloped. You can use this option to set a typical corner detail for double walls. This option is also applied in a connection component used between the layer parts.



Concrete Detailing



229



Panels and walls



Option Free space A



Description Define the gap between the two layer parts. The preview image shows where the gap is located. The gap location depends on the corner set-up. TIP If you are using a connection component, use property name FreeSpace in the custom connection to control that value from Wall layout connector directly.



End offset B



Define the end offset of the longer part. The preview image shows where the offset is located. The offset depends on the corner set-up. TIP If you are using a connection component, use property name EndOffset in the custom connection to control that value from Wall layout connector directly.



Connection



Select a connection component that is created between the two layer parts. If you do not select a connection, only fittings are added according to the gap and the end offsets. If you want to view the current connector properties, select the wall layout connector or double-click the fitting created by the connector.



Attributes



If you have added a connection, select an attribute file for it.



Connection main part



If you have added a connection, set the connection main part.



Wall layout elementation



Wall layout elementation automatically adds new seams to divide the wall layout into two or more precast wall pieces. Openings are taken into account when adding the seams. Openings may affect the final seam position so that the final length or weight of the precast wall is less than the target value. NOTE Weight calculations are based on the wall layout geometry. Any other additional parts in the walls are not taken into account in the calculation. The density in weight calculation is 2500 kg/m³ for the structural layer type and 100 kg/m³ for the insulation layer.



Concrete Detailing



230



Panels and walls



Option Create seams



Description •



By length: Enter one or more desired lengths. If it is not possible divide the wall using the first length, Wall layout elementation tries to use the next length you have entered, and so on.



•



By number: Enter the number of walls you want to create.



•



By weight: Enter the desired weight of a wall piece. The wall layout is divided so that the weight of the precast walls is as close to the desired weight as possible.



•



By crane lifting weight: Divides the wall layout so that the weight of the precast walls is as close to the maximum lifting capacity as possible.



Min length



Enter the minimum length of a wall piece.



Max length



Enter the maximum length of a wall piece. This value is used with all creation methods.



Max weight



Enter the maximum weight of a wall piece. This value is used with all creation methods.



Max crane lifting weight



Select the crane used for erection. When the crane is selected, the maximum weight of the walls is always less than the lifting capacity of the crane. To define a crane set-up, open the Crane properties dialog box by clicking the



button on the right:



1.



Pick the crane location in the model, or enter the X and Y values.



2.



Enter the crane lifting capacity data in the table. Enter the distance in the from-near-to-far order.



3.



Save the crane set-up. You can use the crane name when saving the set-up.



To modify and review the existing crane set-up, select the crane set-up from the list in the Crane properties dialog box. Click Preview to see the crane location on the lifting graph visualized in the model view.



Concrete Detailing



231



Panels and walls



Option



Avoid openings



Description



Select whether the seams may cross the opening. If the seams may not cross the opening, enter the minimum distance from the opening.



Distribution direction



Select the direction of the seams, and the start end at the wall layout. You can add both vertical and horizontal seams.



Seam settings



Select the seam attributes used for new seams. Ensure that the layer offsets are set properly as they may affect the weight and length of the wall.



Create to selected walls



Select the wall layout and click the Create to selected walls button to insert the seams. You can select one or multiple wall layouts.



Wall layout layer swapper



Use Wall layout layer swapper to swap the structural precast layers of one single wall in a wall layout, typically a double wall. You can swap the order of some individual walls in the same wall line if they need to be cast in a different order. Concrete Detailing



232



Panels and walls



To swap layers, select Wall layout layer swapper in the Applications & components catalog, then select a wall layout and the wall part that you want to swap. When you use the swapper tool, a triangular handle is shown at each location of the tool . You can drag these handles to modify the wall to be swapped. To swap another wall in the layout, you can copy the swapper to another location by holding down the Ctrl key while dragging. You can delete the swapper instances by selecting the swapper handles and pressing the Delete key.



Customize the wall layout You can customize the content of the UDA tab by using the WallLayout.Udas.dat file. The WallLayout.Udas.dat file can be located in any of the folders set in the XS_FIRM, XS_PROJECT or XS_SYSTEM advanced options. The file is never read from the model folder. You can use the file to control which user-defined properties of the created layer parts can be used in the wall layout. We recommend that you only use UDAs that are typically common for all precast walls in one wall layout. The sample file shown below contains a full description of all the settings and the format of the file. The lines starting with '//' are comment lines. // // Customized user defined attributes (UDA) for layer parts created by wall layout component // // Each row shall contain 2 or 3 fields separated by tab(s) or semicolon. // Please note that all uda names shall be unique // // Field 1: The data type of the attribute. Valid values are 'distance', 'float', 'option', // 'integer' and 'string' compatible with the actual user defined attributes as // specified in objects.inp // Field 2: UDA name. This is the name of the user defined attribute set for the layer part. // Field 3: Label. This text is shown in the wall layout UDA tab page if the uda is not // defined in objects.inp. Label can be a translatable label or any text or empty text. // string comment j_comment string USER_FIELD_1 j_user_field_1 string USER_FIELD_2 j_user_field_2 string USER_FIELD_3 j_user_field_3 string USER_FIELD_4 j_user_field_4



1.4 Formwork components This section introduces formwork components.



Concrete Detailing



233



Formwork components



Click the links below to find out more: •



Beam Formwork (page 234)



•



Column Formwork (page 238)



•



Wall Formwork (page 242)



•



General Beam Form (page 246)



•



General Wall Form (page 249)



•



General Clamp (page 252)



•



General Clip (page 254)



•



General Tie (page 256)



•



General Tie and Clips (page 258)



Beam Formwork



Beam Formwork creates a timber formwork around a beam. Availability To use the component, go to Tekla Warehouse, locate the Formwork components and click Insert into model. The components are then available in the Applications & components catalog. Objects created •



Timber formwork (bottom and side plywood panels, supports, walers)



•



Ties



•



Clips



Use for Situation



Description Beam formwork



Limitations Beam Formwork works only with rectangular beams.



Concrete Detailing



234



Formwork components



Before you start Create a concrete beam. Selection order 1.



Select the beam.



The beam formwork is created automatically. Part identification key



Part 1



Bottom and side plywood panels



2



Bottom and side supports



3



Waler



4



Tie and clip



See also Beam Formwork: Beam tab (page 235) Beam Formwork: Parameters tab (page 237)



Beam Formwork: Beam tab



Use the Beam tab to control the dimensions, spacings and part properties of the plywood panels and supports in Beam Formwork.



Concrete Detailing



235



Formwork components



Dimensions



Description 1



Spacing between side supports.



2



Beam form length.



3



Distance to first bottom support from the form edge.



4



Spacing between bottom supports.



5



Bottom support length.



Plywood panel and support properties Option



Description



Bottom Profile



Thickness, width and height for the bottom plywood panel.



Side Profile



Thickness, width and height for the side plywood panel.



Bottom Support



Thickness, width and height for the bottom support.



Side Support



Thickness, width and height for the side support. Option



Description



Pos_No



Prefix and a start number for the part position number.



Material



Material grade.



Name



Name that is shown in drawings and reports.



Class



Part class number.



Concrete Detailing



236



Formwork components



Beam formwork properties Option



Description



Beam



Name, prefix and start number for the beam formwork cast unit.



Beam Formwork: Parameters tab



Use the Parameters tab to control the waler properties and the dimensions and spacings of the clips and walers in Beam Formwork. Dimensions



Description 1



Waler extension length.



2



Number of walers and clips in vertical direction.



3



Vertical spacing between clips.



4



Vertical distance to first clip from the form edge.



5



Horizontal distance to first clip from the form edge.



6



Horizontal spacing between clips.



Waler properties Option



Description



Waler Profile



Thickness, width and height for the walers. Option



Description



Pos_No



Prefix and a start number for the part position number.



Material



Material grade.



Name



Name that is shown in drawings and reports.



Concrete Detailing



237



Formwork components



Option



Description



Class



Part class number.



Tie and clip properties Option



Description



Tie Component Name



Define the component that you want to use as tie by selecting it from the Applications & components catalog.



Tie Attribute File



Select an attribute file for the component.



Clip Component Name



Define the component that you want to use as clip by selecting it from the Applications & components catalog.



Clip Attribute File



Select an attribute file for the component.



Column Formwork



Column Formwork creates a timber formwork around a column. Availability To use the component, go to Tekla Warehouse, locate the Formwork components and click Insert into model. The components are then available in the Applications & components catalog. Objects created •



Timber formwork (plywood panels and supports on sides)



•



Clamps



Concrete Detailing



238



Formwork components



Use for Situation



Description Column formwork



Limitations Column Formwork works only with rectangular columns. Before you start Create a concrete column. Selection order 1.



Select the column.



The column formwork is created automatically.



Concrete Detailing



239



Formwork components



Part identification key



Part 1



Plywood panel



2



Support



3



Clamp



See also Column Formwork: Column tab (page 240)



Column Formwork: Column tab



Use the Column tab to control the properties of clamps, plywood panels and supports in Column Formwork.



Concrete Detailing



240



Formwork components



Dimensions



Description 1



Number of clamps.



2



Spacing between clamps.



3



Distance to first clamp from the bottom.



Clamp properties Option



Description



Clamp Name



Define the component that you want to use as clamp by selecting it from the Applications & components catalog.



Attribute File



Select an attribute file for the component.



Plywood panel and support properties Option



Description



Plywood Profile



Thickness, width and height for the plywood panels.



Side Profile



Thickness, width and height for the side supports. Option



Description



Pos_No



Prefix and a start number for the part position number.



Material



Material grade.



Concrete Detailing



241



Formwork components



Option



Description



Name



Name that is shown in drawings and reports.



Class



Part class number.



Column formwork properties Option



Description



Panel



Name, prefix and start number for the column formwork cast unit.



Wall Formwork



Wall Formwork creates a timber formwork around a panel. Availability To use the component, go to Tekla Warehouse, locate the Formwork components and click Insert into model. The components are then available in the Applications & components catalog. Objects created •



Timber formwork (plywood panels, studs, frame and walers)



•



Ties



•



Clips



Use for Situation



Description Wall formwork



Concrete Detailing



242



Formwork components



Limitations Wall Formwork works only with single panels. Before you start Create a concrete panel. Selection order 1.



Select the panel.



The wall formwork is created automatically. Part identification key



Part 1



Stud



2



Walers



3



Plywood panel



4



Tie and clip



5



Frame



See also Wall Formwork: Panel tab (page 244) Concrete Detailing



243



Formwork components



Wall Formwork: Parameters tab (page 245)



Wall Formwork: Panel tab



Use the Panel tab to control the properties of studs, frame and plywood panels in Wall Formwork. Define the dimensions of wall form, studs and frame. Dimensions



Description 1



Distance to first stud from the form edge.



2



Spacing between studs.



3



Width of edge lap.



4



Height of wall form.



5



Length of wall form.



Frame, stud and plywood panel properties Option



Description



Edge Profile



Thickness, width and height for the frames.



Stud Profile



Thickness, width and height for the studs.



Concrete Detailing



244



Formwork components



Option



Description



Plywood Profile



Thickness, width and height for the plywood panels.



Option



Description



Pos_No



Prefix and a start number for the part position number.



Material



Material grade.



Name



Name that is shown in drawings and reports.



Class



Part class number.



Wall formwork properties Option



Description



Panel



Name, prefix and start number for the wall formwork cast unit.



Wall Formwork: Parameters tab



Use the Parameters tab to control the waler profile and the dimensions and spacings of the clips and walers in Wall Formwork. Dimensions



Description 1



Horizontal distance to first clip from the form edge.



2



Horizontal spacing between clips.



3



Length of waler extension.



Concrete Detailing



245



Formwork components



Description 4



Number of walers and clips in vertical direction.



5



Vertical spacing between clips.



6



Vertical distance to first clip from the form edge.



Waler properties Option



Description



Waler Profile



Thickness, width and height for the walers. Option



Description



Pos_No



Prefix and a start number for the part position number.



Material



Material grade.



Name



Name that is shown in drawings and reports.



Class



Part class number.



Tie and clip properties Option



Description



Clip Component Name



Define the component that you want to use as clip by selecting it from the Applications & components catalog.



Clip Component File



Select an attribute file for the component.



Tie Component Name



Define the component that you want to use as tie by selecting it from the Applications & components catalog.



Tie Component File



Select an attribute file for the component.



General Beam Form



General Beam Form creates plywood panels and supports. You can use General Beam Form as a stand-alone component or as a subcomponent for Beam Formwork.



Concrete Detailing



246



Formwork components



Availability To use the component, go to Tekla Warehouse, locate the Formwork components and click Insert into model. The components are then available in the Applications & components catalog. Objects created •



Plywood panels on sides and bottom



•



Supports on sides and bottom



Use for Situation



Description Beam form in a beam formwork.



Limitations General Beam Form works only with rectangular beams. Selection order 1.



Pick the start point.



2.



Pick the end point.



The beam form is created automatically. Part identification key



Concrete Detailing



247



Formwork components



Part 1



Side support



2



Side plywood panel



3



Bottom plywood panel



4



Bottom support



See also Beam Form: Parameters tab (page 248)



Beam Form: Parameters tab



Use the Parameters tab to control the dimensions and properties of beam form in Beam Form. Dimensions



Description 1



Spacing between side supports.



2



Spacing between side plywood panels.



3



Height of side plywood panels.



4



Distance to first bottom support from the form edge.



5



Spacing between bottom supports.



6



Length of bottom support.



Concrete Detailing



248



Formwork components



Plywood panel and support properties Option



Description



Bottom Profile



Thickness, width and height for the bottom plywood panel.



Side Profile



Thickness, width and height for the side plywood panel.



Bottom Support



Thickness, width and height for the bottom support.



Side Support



Thickness, width and height for the side support. Option



Description



Pos_No



Prefix and a start number for the part position number.



Material



Material grade.



Name



Name that is shown in drawings and reports.



Class



Part class number.



Beam form properties Option



Description



Beam



Name, prefix and start number for the beam form cast unit.



General Wall Form



General Wall Form creates a timber form containing a plywood panel, a frame and studs. You can use General Wall Form as a stand-alone component or as a subcomponent for Wall Formwork. Availability To use the component, go to Tekla Warehouse, locate the Formwork components and click Insert into model. The components are then available in the Applications & components catalog. Objects created •



Plywood panel



•



Studs



•



Frame



Concrete Detailing



249



Formwork components



Use for Situation



Description Wall form in a wall formwork.



Selection order 1.



Select the start point.



2.



Select the end point.



The wall form is created automatically. Part identification key



Part 1



Stud



2



Frame



Concrete Detailing



250



Formwork components



Part 3



Plywood panel



See also Wall Form: Parameters tab (page 251)



Wall Form: Parameters tab



Use the Parameters tab to control the properties of the wall form in Wall Form. Dimensions



Description 1



Distance to first stud from the form edge.



2



Spacing between studs.



3



Width of edge lap.



4



Height of wall form.



5



Define whether the wall form is created on the left or right side.



Concrete Detailing



251



Formwork components



Stud, frame and plywood panel properties Option



Description



Edge Profile



Thickness, width and height for the frame.



Stud Profile



Thickness, width and height for the studs.



Plywood Profile



Thickness, width and height for the plywood panel.



Option



Description



Pos_No



Prefix and a start number for the part position number.



Material



Material grade.



Name



Name that is shown in drawings and reports.



Class



Part class number.



Wall form properties Option



Description



Panel



Name, prefix and start number for the wall form cast unit.



General Clamp



General Clamp creates a clamp. You can use General Clamp as a stand-alone component or as a subcomponent for Column Formwork. Availability To use the component, go to Tekla Warehouse, locate the Formwork components and click Insert into model. The components are then available in the Applications & components catalog. Objects created Clamps



Concrete Detailing



252



Formwork components



Use for Situation



Description Clamps in a column formwork.



Selection order 1.



Select the start point.



2.



Select the end point.



The clamps are created automatically. See also General Clamp: Parameters tab (page 253)



General Clamp: Parameters tab



Use the Parameters tab to control the properties and dimensions of clamps in General Clamp. Dimensions



Concrete Detailing



253



Formwork components



Description 1



Length of the clamp.



2



Distance to first slot.



3



Number of slots.



4



Spacing between slots.



5



Profile of slots.



Clamp properties Option



Description



Clamp Profile



Thickness, width and height for the clamps. Option



Description



Pos_No



Prefix and a start number for the part position number.



Material



Material grade.



Name



Name that is shown in drawings and reports.



Class



Part class number.



General Clip



General Clip creates a clip. You can use General Clip as a stand-alone component or as a subcomponent for the Beam Formwork and Wall Formwork. Availability To use the component, go to Tekla Warehouse, locate the Formwork components and click Insert into model. The components are then available in the Applications & components catalog. Objects created Clip



Concrete Detailing



254



Formwork components



Use for Situation



Description Clip and tie in a beam formwork.



Selection order 1.



Select the start point.



2.



Select the end point.



The clip is created automatically. See also General Clip: Parameters tab (page 255)



General Clip: Parameters tab



Use the Parameters tab to control the dimensions and properties of clips in General Clip. Dimensions



Description 1



Length of the clip.



Concrete Detailing



255



Formwork components



Description 2



Width of the slot.



3



Length of the slot.



Clip properties Option



Description



Clip Profile



Thickness, width and height for the clip. Option



Description



Pos_No



Prefix and a start number for the part position number.



Material



Material grade.



Name



Name that is shown in drawings and reports.



Class



Part class number.



General Tie



General Tie creates a tie. You can use General Tie as a stand-alone component or as a sub-component for Beam Formwork and Wall Formwork. Availability To use the component, go to Tekla Warehouse, locate the Formwork components and click Insert into model. The components are then available in the Applications & components catalog. Objects created •



Tie



•



Spacers



Concrete Detailing



256



Formwork components



Use for Situation



Description Tie and clip in a wall formwork.



Selection order 1.



Pick the start point.



2.



Pick the end point.



The tie is created automatically. Part identification key



Part 1



Spacer



2



Tie



See also General Tie: Parameters tab (page 257)



General Tie: Parameters tab



Use the Parameters tab to control tie dimensions and properties in General Tie.



Concrete Detailing



257



Formwork components



Dimensions



Description 1



Length of the tie end extension.



2



Length of the spacer.



3



Define whether or not to create spacers.



Tie and spacer properties Option



Description



Tie Profile



Thickness, width and height for the tie.



Spacer Profile



Thickness, width and height for the spacers. Option



Description



Pos_No



Prefix and a start number for the part position number.



Material



Material grade.



Name



Name that is shown in drawings and reports.



Class



Part class number.



General Tie and Clips



General Tie and Clips creates a tie and clips. You can use General Tie and Clips as a stand-alone component or as a subcomponent for Beam Formwork and Wall Formwork. Availability To use the component, go to Tekla Warehouse, locate the Formwork components and click Insert into model. The components are then available in the Applications & components catalog.



Concrete Detailing



258



Formwork components



Objects created •



Tie



•



Clips



•



Spacers



Use for Situation



Description Tie and clip in a wall formwork.



Selection order 1.



Select the start point.



2.



Select the end point.



3.



The tie and clips are created automatically.



Part identification key



Part 1



Clip



2



Spacer



3



Tie



Concrete Detailing



259



Formwork components



See also General Tie and Clips: Parameters tab (page 260)



General Tie and Clips: Parameters tab



Use the Parameters tab to control the properties of General Tie and Clips. Dimensions



Description 1



Length of the tie end extension.



Tien and clip properties Option



Description



Tie Component Name



Define the component that you want to use as tie by selecting it from the Applications & components catalog.



Tie Attribute File



Select an attribute file for the component.



Clip Component Name



Define the component that you want to use as clip by selecting it from the Applications & components catalog.



Clip Attribute File



Select an attribute file for the component.



1.5 Openings This section introduces components that can be used in concrete openings. Click the links below to find out more: •



Hole Generation (32) (page 260)



•



Polygon Hole Generation (33) (page 263)



Concrete Detailing



260



Openings



Hole Generation (32)



Hole Generation (32) creates a hole in the object, or splits the object in two if the hole cuts the whole object. Use this component, for example, in welded profiles, slabs, or panels generated with a component. Objects created •



Cuts



Use for Situation



Description A hole is created when a point is picked.



Selection order 1.



Select the part or object created by a component to be cut.



2.



Click the middle mouse button.



3.



Pick the position relative to the hole being generated.



See also Hole Generation (32): Parameters tab (page 261)



Hole Generation (32): Parameters tab



Use the Parameters tab to control the hole properties in the Hole Generation (32) modeling tool.



Concrete Detailing



261



Openings



Option



Description Define the hole dimensions and the location of the picked point. The selected Partcut option affects which of these dimensions are available.



To rotate the hole, define the rotation angle. Define the recess depth.



Partcut



Select the hole type. The options are: •



Rectangular creates a rectangular hole using width and height.



•



Circular creates a round hole using height as a diameter.



•



Profile creates a cut using the selected profile.



Profile



If you selected Profile as the hole type, select a suitable profile from the Profile Catalog.



Coordination system



Select the coordination system. The options are: •



Use global xy-plane creates the hole according to the global coordinate system.



•



Use local creates the hole according to the work plane. If the part is sloped or skewed, the Use local option is used automatically.



Concrete Detailing



262



Openings



Option



Description



Cutpart name



Define a name for the cut part.



Rotated



Select whether the cut is rotated 90 degrees in the XY plane.



Polygon Hole Generation (33)



Polygon Hole Generation (33) creates a polygon-shaped hole in the object. Use this component, for example, in welded profiles, slabs, or panels generated with a component. Objects created •



Cut



Use for Situation



Description A polygon-shaped hole in concrete slabs, created by picking five points.



Selection order To create a polygon-shaped hole: 1.



Select the part or object (component) to be cut. TIP You can cut other components, such as Modeling of floor bay (66) with this component.



2.



Click the middle mouse button to end selecting.



3.



Pick the corner points of the polygon-shaped hole.



4.



Click the middle mouse button to end picking.



Polygon Hole Generation (33): Parameters tab



Use the Parameters tab to control the cuts created by Polygon Hole Generation (33).



Concrete Detailing



263



Openings



Field



Description Cutting depth



1.6 Flooring This section introduces components that can be used in concrete floors. Click the links below to find out more: •



Automatic seam recognition (30) (page 264)



•



Seam Applicator (page 266)



•



Modeling of floor bay (66) (page 268)



•



Sloping slab drainage (page 277)



•



Hollow Core Opening Tool (page 280)



•



Hollow Core Lifting Loops (page 284)



•



Floor Tool (page 288)



•



Floor layout (page 292)



•



Floor Layout CIP Filler (page 317)



Concrete Detailing



264



Flooring



Automatic seam recognition (30) Automatic seam recognition (30) is used to add predefined custom seams between parallel parts, such as slabs or wall elements. This tool is useful when you add seams for warped floors. Use for Situation



More information Use to connect parts with predefined custom seams.



Before you start Create parallel parts, for example, concrete slabs or walls. Create custom seam. Defining properties Use the tabs in the Automatic seam recognition (30) dialog box to define the following properties: Property



Description



Seam name



Enter the seam name, or use the browse button (...) to locate the seam in the Select component dialog box.



Seam property file



Enter the name, or use the browse button (...) to locate the name of the seam attribute file (optional).



Seam direction



Select to change the direction.



Seam input part order



Select to reverse the main and secondary part. You may need to change the Seam up direction too.



Seam up direction



Define the direction of the seam.



Concrete Detailing



265



Flooring



Property



Description



Re-calculate seam points for



Position of re-calculated points



Use to re-calculate the seam points for all parts or only for warped parts. •



All parts: use for fully or partially warped decks or floors. This option creates all seam points in the same way, no matter, if the slab is warped or not.



•



Warped parts: use for wall panels and other situations, where warping is not used, or the All parts option does not give desired result.



Control the location of the recalculated seam points. The options in the list box are same as the circles in the following image.



Selection order 1.



Select the main part.



2.



Select secondary parts. Click the middle mouse button to create the seams between the parts.



Seam Applicator



Seam Applicator creates a seam between two double tee slabs, or between a double tee slab and a wall or a spandrel. The double tees can also be warped and/or cambered. To be able to use Seam Applicator you need to have a custom seam. The custom seam can be created in the model, or it can be imported to the model. Objects created •



Seams



Concrete Detailing



266



Flooring



Use for Situation



Description Two double tee slabs with seams



Double tee slab and wall with seams



Before you start Create a custom seam. NOTE When you define the custom seam in Custom Component Wizard, make sure that you select the Allow multiple instances of connection between same parts checkbox on the Advanced tab. Selection order 1.



Select the main part.



2.



Select the secondary part. The seam is created automatically when the secondary part is selected. One of the selected parts must be a double tee slab and the other part can be a double tee slab, a wall, or a spandrel. NOTE If the seam cannot be created between the selected parts for some reason, a dummy beam is created instead. The beam indicates that the seam creation did not succeed.



Concrete Detailing



267



Flooring



See also Seam Applicator: Parameters tab (page 268)



Seam Applicator: Parameters tab



Use the Parameters tab to control the properties of the seam in Seam Applicator. Option



Description



Seam name



Define the custom seam that connects the parts by selecting it from the Applications & components catalog.



Seam property file



Select the attribute file for the custom seam.



Seam direction



Seam direction in relation to the main and the secondary part.



Seam up direction



Seam rotation.



Offset start point



Seam start point offset from the edge of the double tee slab start point.



Offset end point



Seam end point offset from the edge of the double tee slab end point.



Number of copies



Number of seams.



Distance to first seam



Distance between the double tee slab edge and the first seam start point.



Spacing values



Space between the seams.



Copy at equal distances (Ignore spacing values)



Define whether seams are created at equal distances. If you select Yes, the values in Spacing values field are ignored.



Modeling of floor bay (66) Creates an area of concrete slabs between two support lines that you define, for example, between two main frames. Support lines can be polylines or sloped. Parts created Concrete slabs.



Concrete Detailing



268



Flooring



Where to use Situation



More information Slab area created between two support lines.



Before you start Create two support lines with two or more points. Defining properties Use the tabs in the Modeling of floor bay (66) dialog box to define the following properties: Tab



Contents



More information



Paramet The position of the slab. ers



Defining slab position (page 272)



Profiles



Defining slab profile properties (page 275)



The properties of slab profiles.



Picking order 1.



Pick points to define the first support line. To finish, middle-click away from the last point picked.



2.



Pick points to define the second support line. To finish, middle-click away from the last point picked.



3.



Pick a point to indicate the origin of the slabs.



4.



Pick a point to indicate the direction of the slabs.



See also Examples (page 270)



Concrete Detailing



269



Flooring



Examples These examples show how to use the Modeling of floor bay (66) component. Example 1: 1.



Pick 2 points (1, 2) to define support line 1.



2.



To finish, middle-click.



3.



Pick 2 points to define support line 2.



4.



To finish, middle-click.



5.



Pick a point to indicate the origin of the slab.



Concrete Detailing



270



Flooring



6.



Pick a point to indicate the direction of the slab.



Tekla Structures creates the floor bay.



Example 2: 1.



Pick 2 points to define support line 1.



2.



To finish, middle-click.



Concrete Detailing



271



Flooring



3.



Pick 4 points to define support line 2.



4.



To finish, middle-click.



5.



Pick a point to indicate the origin of the slab.



6.



Pick a point to indicate the direction of the slab.



Tekla Structures creates the floor bay.



Concrete Detailing



272



Flooring



Defining slab position Use these options to define the position of the slab: Property



Description The position of the slab relative to the origin line picked when creating the slab. The options are center of profile (default) or center of seam. Select the slab spacing and enter the appropriate dimension. The options are seam (default) or center to center. If you select the seam option, the bottom dimension is enabled. If you select the center-to-center otion, the upper dimension is enabled. Slab offsets from support lines 1 and 2.



Vertical position of the slab. The options are Top (default), Center or Bottom. Enter an optional offset value.



Projection type



Defines how the slabs are spaced on a sloping floor bay. See Defining projection type (page 273).



Concrete Detailing



273



Flooring



Defining projection type Use the Projection type field to define how to handle slab spacing or seams on a sloping floor bay. The options are Global (default), Support line 1, Support line 2, or Both support lines. •



Global: the centers of the slabs remain constant, seam spacing adjusts.



•



Support line 1: Seam spacing on support line 1 does not adjust (effect exaggerated here):



•



Support line 2: Seam spacing on support line 2 does not adjust (effect exaggerated here):



Concrete Detailing



274



Flooring



•



Both support lines: Seam spacing is calculated at the average plane position between both support lines



Along this line, center to center and seam width are exactly as entered in the dialog box. Support line 2 Plane between support lines 1 and 2 Support line 1



Defining slab profile properties Use the options on the Profiles tab to define a default profile for all the slabs in the floor.



Index list Use the Index list to specify different profiles, seam width, and various cutting options for specific slabs or seams. See also Adjustment type (page 276). Input the values individually, or in a list:



Examples for slabs If the origin point is the center of slab:



Concrete Detailing



275



Flooring



If the origin point is the center of seam:



Examples for seams If the origin point is the center of slab:



If the origin point is the center of seam:



Adjustment type Use to define the type of adjustment for the selected slab. The options are: •



Default – Use the default slab profile.



•



Profile – Use the specific slab profile.



•



Cut left side – Cut the left side of the profile. If no profile is defined, uses the default slab profile.



Concrete Detailing



276



Flooring



•



Cut right side – Cut the right side of the profile. If no profile is defined, uses the default slab profile.



•



Cut both sides – Cut both sides of the profile. If no profile is defined, uses the default slab profile.



•



Seam width – Adjust the seam width.



Profile/Seam width Depending on which adjustment type option you choose, defines: •



The width of the default slab profile.



•



The width of the specified profile.



•



Seam width.



Sloping slab drainage



Sloping slab drainage creates a concrete slab topping and a drainage hole. Objects created •



Drainage hole



Use for Situation



Description Drainage holes with valley 1 and hip 2 created.



Limitations Slab topping does not adapt to slab chamfers. You need to define the slab chamfers and topping chamfers separately. Before you start Create or split the slabs so that there is one drainage point in each slab.



Concrete Detailing



277



Flooring



Selection order 1.



Select the main part (slab).



2.



Pick a point to create the drainage hole. The drainage hole is created automatically when the point is picked.



Part identification key



Part 1



Drainage hole



See also Sloping slab drainage: Parameters tab (page 278)



Sloping slab drainage: Parameters tab



Use the Parameters tab to control the type, dimensions and properties of the drainage hole in Sloping slab drainage. Drainage hole type Option



Description A drainage hole is not created.



Concrete Detailing



278



Flooring



Option



Description A rectangular drainage hole is created. A round drainage hole is created.



Drainage hole dimensions Option



Description Define the side dimensions of the rectangular drainage hole.



Define the diameter of the round drainage hole.



Drainage hole properties



Option



Description



Define slab inclination by



Select how the slab is inclined, by a combination of slope (S) or slope percentage (S%), and topping thicknesses (d1, d2). The Slope, d1, and d2 options are available accordingly.



Slope



Slope of the topping, for example, 0.01 (S) or 2 (S%).



d1



Thickness of the topping at the drainage point or at the hole.



d2



Thickness of the topping at the edge of the slab or at the hip.



Concrete Detailing



279



Flooring



Option



Description



Create cast unit



Select how the cast unit is created: •



Yes Topping is part of the slab cast unit.



•



No Each part of the topping forms a cast unit.



•



Topping Topping is a separate cast unit.



Material



Define the material of the topping by selecting it from the material catalog.



Type



Select whether a valley or a hip is created. If you select Hip, you can only pick slab corners.



Hollow Core Opening Tool



Hollow Core Opening Tool creates holes and recesses to hollow core slabs. Hollow Core Opening Tool works with single hollow core slabs, or with floors that are created with the Modeling of floor bay (66) modeling tool. Objects created •



Holes and recesses



Use for Situation



Description Hollow core slab with small and large openings



Concrete Detailing



280



Flooring



Limitations Hollow Core Opening Tool calculates the location for the openings based on the given values and the slab profile data. If needed, you can use an external configuration file in XML format to provide different rules for the openings and the slab profile data. You can define small and large openings. Small openings are placed in the middle of the hollow cores so that no webs are broken. Large openings break webs. Before you start Create a hollow core slab. Selection order 1.



Select the main part (slab).



2.



Pick a position for the opening.



See also Hollow Core Opening Tool: Parameters tab (page 281) Hollow Core Opening Tool: Configuration file tab (page 284)



Hollow Core Opening Tool: Parameters tab



Use the Parameters tab to control the properties of the openings and recesses in the Hollow Core Opening Tool modeling tool. Option



Description Select the shape of the openings and recesses.



Concrete Detailing



•



Square - in the middle of the slab



•



Round - in the middle of the slab



•



At one end of the slab



•



At both ends of the slab



281



Flooring



Option



Hollow positions



Description



If you select to add openings or recesses at one end or at both ends of a slab, enter the positions of the hollows that are cut. The positions are numbered from left to right at the start of the part. The part is viewed from the top in the start-to-end direction. The openings and recesses are created in the same voids at the end of the part.



Size



Define the size of the opening in longitudinal and cross direction, or the diameter for a round opening. Opening width defines whether the opening is small or large.



Opening Type



Select the type of the opening.



Place exactly by point



Select whether the opening is created exactly to the picked position.



Centralize in zone



Select how the center of an opening is centered •



By hollow: The opening is centered to the hollow core.



Concrete Detailing



282



Flooring



Option



Description •



By web: The opening is centered to the web.



Cut full width of hollow



Select whether the opening is cut based on the minimum width of hollows or the number of hollows. To use this option, center the opening By hollow in the Centralize in zone option.



Rules file (XML)



Select the external XML file where you have defined the opening and slab profiles.



Cutpart name



Define a name for the cut part. Define the recess depth.



Define the alignment for the opening.



Concrete Detailing



283



Flooring



Option



Description Select whether the thick side part of the opening is removed.



Hollow Core Opening Tool: Configuration file tab



Use an external .xml file to define the openings and the slab profiles in the Hollow Core Opening Tool modeling tool. Example An example Zones.xml file is located in ..\ProgramData\Tekla Structures\\environments\common\system.



Hollow Core Lifting Loops



Hollow Core Lifting Loops creates lifters for hollow core slabs. Hollow Core Lifting Loops works with single hollow core slabs, or with floors that are created with Modeling of floor bay (66) modeling tool. Objects created •



Lifters



Concrete Detailing



284



Flooring



Use for Situation



Description Hollow core slab with recesses, hollow core fillings and lifting devices.



Limitations You also need a lifting device. The lifting device can be created as a custom part, or it can be imported to the model. Alternatively, you can use an external configuration file in XML format to define the properties for the recess, the lifting device and the slab. Before you start Create a hollow core slab and a lifting device. Selection order 1.



Select the main part (slab). The recess and hollow core fillings are created.



See also Hollow Core Lifting Loops: Basic settings tab (page 285) Hollow Core Lifting Loops: Lifting device settings tab (page 287) Hollow Core Lifting Loops: Configuration file tab (page 287)



Hollow Core Lifting Loops: Basic settings tab



Use the Basic settings tab to control the properties of the lifters and hollow core fillings in the Hollow Core Lifting Loops modeling tool. Configuration file Option Configuration file



Description Select the external XML file where you have defined the recess, the lifting device and the slab profile properties.



Concrete Detailing



285



Flooring



Option Override



Description Define whether the values on the Basic settings and Lifting device settings tabs override the properties defined in the external XML file.



Dimensions



Option



Description



1



Define the minimum distance from the lifter insertion point to the end of the slab.



2



Define the maximum distance from the lifter insertion point to the end of the slab.



3



Define the minimum distance from the lifter insertion point to the edge of an opening.



4



Define the minimum distance between two lifter insertion points.



5



Define the length of the hollow core filling.



6



Define the profile of the recess.



7



Define the depth of the recess.



Hollow core filling Option



Description



Use automatic fill profile



Define whether the automatic hollow core filling profile is used.



Profile



Define the hollow core filling profile.



Prefix



Prefix for the part position number.



Start Number



Start number for the part position number.



Concrete Detailing



286



Flooring



Option



Description



Name



Define a name for the lifter. Tekla Structures uses the name in drawings and reports.



Class



Use Class to group the lifters. For example, you can display lifters of different classes in different colors.



See also Hollow Core Lifting Loops: Lifting device settings tab (page 287) Hollow Core Lifting Loops: Configuration file tab (page 287)



Hollow Core Lifting Loops: Lifting device settings tab



Use the Lifting device settings tab to control the properties of the lifting device in the Hollow Core Lifting Loops modeling tool. Option



Description



Lifter component



Define the custom part that represents the actual lifting device.



Saved properties to use



Select which saved properties to use for the lifting device custom part.



Lifter max load



Define the maximum load for the lifting device.



Rotation



Select the rotation of the lifting device custom part around its axis.



Angle



Define the rotation angle of the lifting device custom part.



Up Direction



Select the lifting device up direction in relation to the local coordinate system.



Offset



Define the offset of the lifting device in relation to the local coordinate system in the corresponding directions.



See also Hollow Core Lifting Loops: Basic settings tab (page 285) Hollow Core Lifting Loops: Configuration file tab (page 287)



Hollow Core Lifting Loops: Configuration file tab



Use an external XML file to define the lifting device, the lifter, and the slab properties in the Hollow Core Lifting Loops modeling tool.



Concrete Detailing



287



Flooring



Example



Floor Tool



Floor Tool creates a floor bay with optional insulation. Objects created •



Hollow core slabs



Use for Situation



Description Floor bay with insulation



Selection order Make sure that you have defined the slab properties. 1.



Pick the contour points of the floor bay. The floor bay is automatically created when you close the polygon.



NOTE The list of picked contour points on the Bay contour tab and the list of slabs on the Slab list tab are created when the slabs are created. See also Floor Tool: Slab properties tab (page 289) Floor Tool: Insulation tab (page 290)



Concrete Detailing



288



Flooring



Floor Tool: Bay contour tab (page 290) Floor Tool: Slab list tab (page 291)



Floor Tool: Slab properties tab



Use the Slab properties tab to control the profile, material and location of the hollow core slabs in the Floor Tool modeling tool. Slab attributes Option



Description



Profile



Define the profile by selecting it from the profile catalog.



Name



Define a name for the slab.



Material



Define the material grade by selecting it from the material catalog.



Class



Define the part class number.



Prefix



Define the part prefix.



Start number



Define the start number for the cast unit.



Cut slab ends



Define whether the slab ends are cut or not. If you select Yes, define the minimum end angle for the slabs.



Rotation



Select an option to rotate the slab.



Vertical location



Define the offset location in the vertical direction.



Offset



Define the offset in the vertical direction.



Minimum end angle



Define the minimum end angle for the slabs. If the line to which the slab ends has a bigger angle than the defined minimum end angle, the part will be aligned to the line.



Additional attributes Option Exposure Class



Description Define the exposure class for the hollow core slab. The exposure class will be saved as a userdefined attribute.



Relative strength



Define the relative strength of the hollow core slab. The relative strength will be saved as a userdefined attribute.



Concrete Detailing



289



Flooring



Option Fire rating



Description Define the fire rating for the hollow core slab. The fire rating will be saved as a user-defined attribute.



User-defined attributes



User-defined attributes are located in the FloorTool.ini file.



Slab direction Option Slab direction



Description Define the direction of the slab. If you select Angle, you need to pick points in the model to define the new direction. The angle you have picked is shown in the Angle field. You can also define the angle directly in the field to rotate the slabs. Note that picking two points does not change the local +X direction.



Floor Tool: Insulation tab



Use the Insulation tab to control the insulation properties of the hollow core slabs in the Floor Tool modeling tool. First define whether to create insulation or not. Insulation is created separately for each slab. Insulation Option



Description



Name



Define a name for the insulation.



Material



Define a material grade by selecting it from the material catalog.



Thickness



Define the thickness of the insulation.



Class



Define the part class number.



Offset at slab start/end



Define the offset between the slab start/end positions and the corresponding positions in the insulation parts.



Left/Right offset



Define the offset between the slab and the insulation for the rightmost and leftmost slab.



Concrete Detailing



290



Flooring



Floor Tool: Bay contour tab



Use the Bay contour tab to control the coordinates of the picked contour points and the horizontal offset of the lines connecting the contour points in the Floor Tool modeling tool. If the coordinates are not visible on the tab, click the Get button. You need to create the hollow core slabs before using the Bay contour tab. Bay contour properties Option



Description



XY-constant Z



Define the Z coordinate for all contour points at the same specific height.



XYZ (sloping floor)



Define the Z constant for each contour point separately. The floor may be sloped.



Offset method



Define the offset method.



Default end offset



Define the default end offset.



Default side offset



Define the default side offset.



Bay contour table The table lists the contour points showing their X, Y, and Z coordinates. You can modify the Z coordinate in the table only if you have selected XYZ (sloping floor). You can modify the Horizontal offset on all rows of the table. The table also shows the lines connecting the points. You can only modify the Horizontal offset. Entering a positive value enlarges the slab area and entering a negative value shrinks the slab area.



Floor Tool: Slab list tab



Use the Slab list tab to list all the hollow core slabs created in the Floor Tool modeling tool. If the slab list is not visible on the tab, click the Get button. Slab properties Option



Description



Slab number



Shows the order of the hollow core slabs starting from the first picked point.



Width



Shows the width of a narrowed slab.



Narrowed from



Define whether the slab is narrowed. The options are:



Concrete Detailing



•



not narrowed (default)



•



Right side



•



Left side



291



Flooring



Option Type



Description Define the slab type. •



Use Slab for normal hollow core slabs.



•



Use PIP for a precast infill piece.



•



Use GAP for an empty space between the slabs. You do not need to define a profile when you select this option.



•



Use CIP to create a concrete part using the width defined in the Width column. The width range that you can use is defined in the FloorTool.ini file. The slabs listed in the FloorTool.ini file can only have a width that is inside the defined range. The slabs that are not listed can have any width. The value you give is rounded down to the nearest allowed value.



Profile



Define the profile by selecting it from the profile catalog.



You can Add and Delete slabs, and move them Up and Down in the list by using the buttons on the left. To restore the default values, click Restore defaults.



Floor layout



Floor Layout creates floors built of precast filigree and hollow core slabs. The floors may contain several layers, such as precast slabs, insulation and a castin-place topping. Floor Layout is most useful for non-rectangular floors that contain one or more openings that split slabs into many pieces, and when slab widths are not constant on the whole floor area. You can modify the floors using direct modification. Objects created •



Slabs



•



Insulation



•



Cast-in-place topping



Concrete Detailing



292



Flooring



Use for Situation



Description Create floor structures that have layers, for example, hollow core slabs at the bottom, insulation as the middle layer, and cast-in-place topping.



Selection order 1.



On the Concrete tab, click Slab --> Floor layout.



2.



Pick the corner points of the floor. You can pick the points at grid lines or the reference points of supporting parts. You can change the offsets later. The default slab direction is from the first (P1) point to the second (P2) point. You can change this later if needed.



3.



Click the middle mouse button to create the floor. Concrete Detailing



293



Flooring



Layer tab



Use the Layer tab to control the layer type, profile, and how the layer is created in Floor Layout. Layer list Layers



Description The layer list shows the current layers of the floor. The first layer in the list is the top layer and the last layer is the bottom layer. In the example image on the left, the FILIGREE layer is the top layer and the CIP layer is the bottom layer. Use the buttons to do the following: • Click



to add a new layer.



Click



to remove the selected layer.



• • Click to change the order of the layers by moving the selected layer up or down in the list. Layer properties Select a layer in the layer list to define the layer properties.



Concrete Detailing



294



Flooring



Option Layer name



Description Enter a name for the layer. This is the layer name shown in the layer list. The name is also shown in the direct modification toolbar when you are modifying offsets



.



This name is not visible in the model so you can enter any suitable name. Layer type



Select the layer type. The Precast layer is the primary layer and any insulation parts are added to precast units. The parts created for a Cast in place layer are not added to any other cast unit.



Create layer as



Select how the layer parts are created: as beam parts, custom parts, or a single part.



Layer component



When the layer parts are created as custom parts, you can select a component and the component attributes.



Component attributes Layer thickness or profile



When the layer parts are created as beam parts or as a single part, you can select the profile or thickness of the layer parts. With parametric profiles, you can replace the width of the profile with the text [W]. When you do this, the beam is never cut but the desired width is achieved by setting the profile name based on the slab width. For example, the profile could be BL80*[W].



Rotation



Select the rotation of the layer parts.



Part name



Define the name, class, material, part prefix and start number of the layer parts. Define the pour phase for CIP layers.



Class Material Pour phase Part prefix, Start no Cast unit prefix, Start no



General tab



Use the General tab to control the default part and gap width, depth position of the layers, and the direction for lining up the slabs in Floor Layout.



Concrete Detailing



295



Flooring



Option Default part width



Description Enter the default width for the slabs in the primary layer. If you define the width of an individual slab in the slab part properties, the Default part width value is not used.



Default gap width Enter the default seam gap width in the primary layer. If you define the width of an individual gap, the Default gap width value is not used. Depth position



Select how the layers are positioned in relation to the plane of input points.



Line up direction



Select the direction for the slabs. By default, the width of the last slab may differ from the width of the other slabs.



Concrete Detailing



296



Flooring



Customizing allowed slab width You can customize the allowed slab widths in the FloorLayout.ini file. This file can be located under the model folder or in any of the folders defined in the XS_FIRM, XS_PROJECT or XS_SYSTEM advanced options. The image below shows an example of the FloorLayout.ini file:



Advanced tab



Use the Advanced tab to control the minimum angles, and the width and length of the slabs in Floor Layout. Option Minimum end angle Minimum start angle



Description Controls how the slab ends are modeled. When the angle of the floor edge is smaller than the minimum angle, you can select a suitable option from the list to make the slab end straight.



Concrete Detailing



297



Flooring



Option



Description Minimum slab width. Slabs narrower than the minimum width are not created.



Minimum slab length. Slabs shorter than the minimum length are not created.



Minimum required width of a single neck on either side of the slab when there is a large opening in the slab. If either of the necks on the sides of the opening is smaller than the defined neck width, the neck is cut off completely. In addition, the total width of the necks must be bigger than the minimum slab middle zone neck width, otherwise the slab is split into two separate slabs (the width of the actual opening is the same as the width of the slab). Minimum end nose width and length. If there are noses on both sides of the slab, these two end noses are checked separately and cut off if the width of the single nose gets smaller than the given minimum required nose width.



Default offsets



Use the Default offsets tab to set the default offsets for each layer. These default offsets will be used whenever a specific value is not given for the edge.



Concrete Detailing



298



Flooring



Description 1



Default offset for the side offset. Offset that is parallel to the bearing direction.



2



Default offset for the end offset. All other offsets that are not side offsets.



3



Default offset for the break line. The default value is 10. If the break line value is 0, the objects are not split.



Detailing tab



Use the Detailing tab to select the components that are applied to all slabs in the floor. Option Component name



Description Select a component that is applied to the slabs in the floor.



Component attr Select the settings that are used with the component you file name have selected. The list contains all the files that are available for the selected component. Adding a component to the component name list The component name list is empty by default. You can add components to the list: 1.



Select Add new from the list. The Detailing component data dialog box is displayed. Concrete Detailing



299



Flooring



2.



Enter a suitable name in the Name in dropdown box.



3.



Click



4.



Select a component and click OK.



to open the Applications & components catalog.



The component name or number is added to the Component name box. 5.



Click OK.



When you have added the needed components, the names of the components are shown in the component name list as shown in the example image below. Select a component from the list:



The list is stored in the \attributes folder under the model folder. If you want to predefine the list to contain your favorite components in any new models, you can copy the LayoutConfiguration.datx file from the



Concrete Detailing



300



Flooring



\attributes folder under the model folder to any of the folders defined in the XS_FIRM, XS_PROJECT or XS_SYSTEM.



User defined tab



Use the User defined tab to set the user-defined attribute values for the slabs in Floor Layout. If you have defined the user-defined attributes in the part properties dialog box and want to use those values, leave the User defined tab empty. The content of the tab may vary depending on your environment, see below how to customize the content. Customizing the User defined tab You can customize the content of the User defined tab using the floorlayout.objects.inp file. Note that you cannot create new userdefined attributes with the file. The user-defined attributes on the tab are existing user-defined attributes that have been defined in the objects.inp file. The floorlayout.objects.inp file has the same format as the objects.inp file. The floorlayout.objects.inp file can be located in any of the folders set in the XS_FIRM, XS_PROJECT or XS_SYSTEM advanced options. The file is never read from the model folder. Below is an example of the floorlayout.objects.inp file:



Concrete Detailing



301



Flooring



Modifying a floor



You can use direct modification to modify the floor. Before you start, ensure that the Direct modification the direct modification toolbar.



switch is active. Select the floor to display



To modify the floor, select the appropriate command from the toolbar.



Button



Description Add a polygonal opening. Add a rectangular opening. Add a break line to split the slab into two slabs.



Concrete Detailing



302



Flooring



Button



Description Modify the openings or exterior boundary of the floor. This command is active by default. Make the floor warped by offsetting one or more vertices of the exterior boundary polygon from the plane. Modify the offsets at floor boundaries Modify the layout of the floor: •



Modify the width or profile of any of the slabs in the floor.



•



Modify the side of the cut when the slab is cut to a smaller width.



•



Modify the gaps between the slabs.



•



Modify the direction of the slabs.



•



Modify the order of slabs when the slabs do not the have the same width or profiles.



Add or modify the detailing components that are applied only to certain slabs in the floor layout. The detailing components are listed on the Detailing tab. You can apply the same detailing component settings to all slabs in the floor layout using the floor layout attributes. Known limitations Floor layout is not designed to work with floors where the layout is not in one plane. Egdes can be offset from the plane only to warp the floor, not to make floors that have several planes. The image below shows an example where Floor layout has been used to create several planes. If precast slabs are used in this way, the outcome is not correct. Use multiple Floor layout components to create precast floors with several planes.



Adding a polygonal opening .



1.



Click



2.



Pick the corner points of the opening.



Concrete Detailing



303



Flooring



You can pick the points at grid lines or you can pick the reference points of supporting parts. You can change the offsets later.



Adding a rectangular opening 1.



Click



2.



Pick the corner points of the opening.



.



Concrete Detailing



304



Flooring



You can pick the points at grid lines or you can pick the reference points of supporting parts. You can change the offsets later.



Adding a break line to split the slab into two slabs 1.



Click



.



2.



Pick the end points of the break line.



Concrete Detailing



305



Flooring



Modifying the openings and exterior boundary of the floor 1.



The



button is active by default.



The handles are shown for the exterior boundary and for all openings in the floor. 2.



Do any of the following: •



To move an edge, drag any of the edge lines. Hold down the left mouse button when dragging.



Concrete Detailing



306



Flooring



•



To move a corner point, drag the handle in the corner.



•



To add new points to the edge, drag the handle in the middle of the edge.



Concrete Detailing



307



Flooring



•



To delete any of the points, select the handle in the corner and press the Delete key.



•



To make the floor warped, offset the vertices of the exterior boundary so that all vertices are not in the same plane. Drag a handle normally to move the vertices in the original floor plane.



Hold down the Alt key while dragging to move the vertex perpendicular to the floor plane.



Concrete Detailing



308



Flooring



Hold down the Alt and Shift keys to move the vertex both in the plane and off from the plane by snapping to any point in the model.



Modifying the offset at floor boundaries 1.



Click



.



The handles for modifying the offset are shown. If there are offsets, the offset dimensions are also shown. 2.



To adjust the offset, do one of the following: •



Drag the edge offset lines.



Concrete Detailing



309



Flooring



•



Select one or more offset lines by holding down the Shift key. When you have the offset lines selected, right-click on any of the selected lines. Enter the offset value to the toolbar that is displayed and click



.



Note that when you use the offset command, the direct modification toolbar shows the floor layout layers. Each layer may have different offsets. You can select which layers to modify. The simplest way is to select all layers and have the offsets equal in each layer.



Concrete Detailing



310



Flooring



Concrete Detailing



311



Flooring



Modifying the layout of the floor 1.



Click



.



The following direct modification elements are shown:



2.



To modify the layout of the floor, do any of the following: •



•



To modify slab width, do one of the following: •



To move all seams, select one seam and start dragging.



•



To add a new seam, select a seam, hold down the Ctrl key and start dragging. When you stop dragging and release the mouse key, a new seam is added to that location.



•



To make one slab smaller, select a seam, hold down the Alt key and start dragging. The slab on the left or right side is made smaller and all slabs on the other side will move with the seam.



To modify the profile, width, and cut side of a slab, right-click the slab handle.



When the profile of the slab is fixed (not parametric), the slab is cut on either side when the width is smaller than the original width. The Concrete Detailing



312



Flooring



Default cut side is leading edge for the first slab and trailing edge for all others in relation to the layout direction. You can modify the properties of multiple slabs at the same time by holding down the Shift key when selecting slabs. •



To modify the gap width between the slabs, do one of the following: •



Drag the end of the gap dimension.



•



Right-click a seam line handle, enter the width and click



.



You can modify multiple gaps at same time by holding down the Shift key when selecting seam line handles. •



To move a slab or change the order of slabs, drag the slab handles.



Concrete Detailing



313



Flooring



•



To change the direction of slabs, drag the slab direction handle.



Concrete Detailing



314



Flooring



•



To remove a slab from the layout, select the slab handles and press the Delete key.



Adding and modifying detailing components 1.



Click



to open the detailing toolbar.



2.



Do any of the following to add, remove or modify the detailing strips that control how and to which slabs the detailing components are added in the floor: Button/ Option



Description Add a new detailing strip. Pick the start and end points for the strip. In practice, the selected detailing component will be added into the slabs that the strip touches, see the example image below. You can also add new detailing strips by dragging an existing strip and holding down the Ctrl key. Delete a detailing strip. Select the strip that you want to delete. You can select multiple strips by holding down the Shift key.



Concrete Detailing



315



Flooring



Button/ Option



Description



Componen Select the actual detailing component from the Component name list. t name The content of the list may vary depending on your environment. You can also add new components to the list by selecting the Add new option. Note that you can only add detailing components that use one input part. Componen Select the detailing component attributes that are used for the t attribute slab. file name Note that the content of the list varies depending on the component that you have selected. Modify the detailing component and/or attribute file of the detailing strip. Select the detailing strip and select the component name and/or attribute file from the list. Click the button to modify the selected detailing strips. You can select multiple strips by holding down the Shift key. Close the detailing toolbar to continue the other modifications of the floor layout. Note that the detailing toolbar is also closed when you select any other modification tool in the Floor Layout direct modification toolbar. The image below shows an example of a floor layout containing three detailing strips.



Concrete Detailing



316



Flooring



Floor Layout CIP Filler Floor Layout CIP Filler creates CIP filler parts into the empty areas in floors created with Floor layout. The empty areas are spaces created by offsets



Concrete Detailing



317



Flooring



around the exterior and interior boundaries. There may also be empty areas when the slab is too narrow to be created with Floor layout.



Floor Layout CIP filler properties Option



Description



Minimum width Minimum width of the part. If the empty space is smaller than this width, the part is not created in this location. Cast unit prefix, Cast unit prefix of the CIP filler part Start no Cast unit start number of the CIP filler part Name, Class, Define the name, class, material, finish and pour phase of Material, Finish, the CIP filler parts. Pour phase



1.7 Concrete stairs Tekla Structures includes the following tools you can use to create concrete stairs and stairwells: •



Concrete stairs (65) (page 319)



Concrete Detailing



318



Concrete stairs



•



Stairwells and elevator shafts (90) (page 334)



•



Reinforced concrete stair (95) (page 338)



Concrete stairs (65)



Concrete stairs (65) creates precast stairs with optional landings, ridges, stringers, and anti-skid and kick plate profiles. It contains five different step shapes and options to create round or chamfered step edges. Objects created •



Stairs



•



Landings



•



Ridges



•



Stringers



•



Anti-skid



•



Kick plate



Use for Situation



Description Staircase with •



square step shape



•



stringers on both sides



•



top and bottom landings



Staircase with



Concrete Detailing



319



•



chamfered step corners



•



ridges on both sides



Concrete stairs



Situation



Description Staircase with •



rounded step corners



•



anti-skid profile



•



bottom landing



Staircase with •



square step shape



•



rounded step corners



•



ridges on both sides



•



anti-skid and kick plate profiles



Selection order Selection order depends on the selected Creation method option on the Stairs tab. When Creation method is set to Default: 1.



Pick the first point to indicate the start point of stairs.



2.



Pick the second point to indicate the direction of stairs.



The stairs are created automatically.



Concrete Detailing



320



Concrete stairs



Part identification key



Part 1



Landings



2



Stringers



3



Ridges



4



Kick plates



5



Steps



6



Anti-skids



See also Concrete stairs (65): Stairs tab (page 321) Concrete stairs (65): Step shapes tab (page 324) Concrete stairs (65): Landings tab (page 326) Concrete stairs (65): Ridges tab (page 327) Concrete stairs (65): Stringers tab (page 330) Concrete stairs (65): Anti-skid/Kick plate tab (page 332) Concrete stairs (65): Attributes tab (page 333) Concrete stairs (65): UDA tab (page 334)



Concrete stairs (65): Stairs tab



Use the Stairs tab to define how the stairs are created and what are the dimensions of the stairs in Concrete stairs (65).



Concrete Detailing



321



Concrete stairs



Creation method Option



Description



Creation method



Select the creation method of the stairs. Creation method defines how many and which points you need to pick when you create the stairs. •



Default Number of steps is calculated automatically using the vertical distance between the two input points.



•



One point - N & L & H: define N, L, and H (number, length, and height of the steps).



•



Two points - N & L: define N and L. Height of the steps is calculated automatically using the vertical distance between the two input points.



•



Two points - N & H: define N and H. Length of the steps is calculated automatically using the horizontal distance between the two input points.



•



Two points - L & H: define L and H. Number of steps is calculated automatically using the vertical distance between the two input points.



•



Two points - N: define N. Height and length of steps is calculated automatically using the horizontal and vertical distance between the two input points. You can define the length of the top step.



No of steps, N



Concrete Detailing



Define the number of steps, if the Two points - L & H option is not selected.



322



Concrete stairs



Option



Description



Position



Define the horizontal position of the staircase, relative to the line joining the picked points.



Distance



Enter a distance to move the stairs in the horizontal direction from the line joining the picked points. The selected Position option has an effect on this dimension.



Rotation



Define the angle between the line joining the steps and the line joining the selected points.



Cast unit type



Select the cast unit type: •



Precast



•



Cast in place



Stair dimensions



Concrete Detailing



323



Concrete stairs



Description 1



Height of the step.



2



Length of the step.



3



Length of the top step.



4



Height of the top step.



5



Width of the top corbel.



6



Slope from the corbel to the underside of the stairs.



7



Thickness of the slab.



8



Chamfering for the underside of stairs.



9



Chamfer or radius values.



10 11



Height of the bottom step.



12



Height of the stair foot.



13



Chamfering for the bottom of stairs.



14



Slope from the foot nose to the foot base.



15



Length of the bottom cut.



16



Length of the stair foot.



17



Width of the staircase, including stringers.



Create foot Define whether a foot is created at the bottom of the stairs.



Concrete stairs (65): Step shapes tab



Use the Step shapes tab to define the shape of steps in Concrete stairs (65). All other steps/Last step at foot Select the step shape. You can define the shape of the last step at the bottom if you set Last step same as other step to No. Option



Description Default Beveled From the list below the step shape options, select whether you want to enter a dimension or an angle. AutoDefaults can change this option.



Concrete Detailing



324



Concrete stairs



Option



Description



Straight step



Top straight, bottom beveled Enter two dimensions.



Top beveled, bottom straight Enter the vertical dimension and then select whether you want to enter an angle or a horizontal dimension.



Top and bottom staight Enter vertical dimensions and then select whether you want to enter an angle or a horizontal dimension.



out Select the shape of the step front edge and enter the required dimensions. •



Default



Concrete Detailing



325



Concrete stairs



•



Radius: Creates rounded edge.



•



Chamfer: Creates chamfered edge.



•



No: Creates square edge.



in Select the shape of the step inner corner and enter the required dimensions. •



Default



•



Radius: Creates rounded inner corner.



•



Chamfer: Creates chamfered inner corner.



•



No: Creates square inner corner.



Concrete stairs (65): Landings tab



Use the Landings tab to create top and/or bottom landings in Concrete stairs (65). Create landings Define whether one or two landings are created, or whether there are no landings.



Concrete Detailing



326



Concrete stairs



Landing dimensions and extensions



Description 1



Thickness of the bottom landing.



2



Length of the bottom landing.



3



Length of the top landing.



4



Thickness of the top landing.



5



Left and right extensions of the bottom landing.



7 6



Left and right extensions of the top landing.



8



Concrete stairs (65): Ridges tab



Use the Ridges tab to create horizontal and/or vertical ridges on both sides or only on the other side of the stairs in Concrete stairs (65).



Concrete Detailing



327



Concrete stairs



Dimensions



Description 1



Thickness of the vertical ridge.



2



Width of the vertical ridge.



3



Width of the horizontal ridge.



4



Thickness/height of the horizontal ridge.



Horizontal ridges Part



Description



Create



Define whether horizontal ridges are created.



Concrete Detailing



328



Concrete stairs



Part



Description



Create at foot



Define whether horizontal ridges are created at the foot of the stairs. This option works in the same way as the Create option.



Inside chamfer



Select the type of the inside chamfer and enter the required dimensions.



1 Corner chamfer



Select the type of the corner chamfer and enter the required dimensions.



2 Slope



Set the slope as an angle or a dimension. The slope makes the ridge inclined.



3 Foot corner chamfer



Define whether corner chamfers are created at the stair foot.



Top and foot ridges Define the horizontal ridge length at the stair top step and at the stair foot. When no foot is created, vertical ridges continue to the bottom level of the stairs.



Concrete Detailing



329



Concrete stairs



Vertical ridges Part



Description



Create



Define whether vertical ridges are created.



Slope



Set the slope as an angle or a dimension. The slope makes the ridge inclined.



Concrete stairs (65): Stringers tab



Use the Stringers tab to create stringers and ridges on the left, right, or both sides of the stairs in Concrete stairs (65). Parts Part



Description



Create stringers



Define whether stringers are created.



Create top ridge



Select an option to create top ridges.



Create bottom ridge



Select an option to create bottom ridges.



Concrete Detailing



330



Concrete stairs



Part



Description



Slope



Use to incline the inner surface of the stringers.



You can define the slope using an angle or a dimension. Inside chamfer



Define whether the inside edge of stringer is chamfered or not.



Outside chamfer



Define whether the outside edge of stringer is chamfered or not.



Stringer height



Define how the stringer height is determined.



Dimensions



Description 1



Height of the stringer bottom ridge.



2



Horizontal offset of the bottom ridge from the bottom step.



3



Height of the stringer top ridge.



Concrete Detailing



331



Concrete stairs



Description 4



Width of the stringer.



5



Difference in height that is the perpendicular distance between the step edge and stringer edge. You can enter this dimension if Stringer height is Diff in height.



6



Total height of the stringer. You can enter this dimension if Stringer height is Default or Total height.



Concrete stairs (65): Anti-skid/Kick plate tab



Use the Anti-skid and Kick plate tabs to create slip resistant surfaces in Concrete stairs (65). Parts Part



Description



Creation anti-skid



Define whether anti-skids or kick plates are created.



Creation kick plate Create anti-skid on foot



Define whether anti-skids are created at the stair foot.



Create cutout



Define whether you want to create cutouts with the anti-skid profile. By default, the cutouts are not created.



Include in cast unit



Define whether anti-skids or kick plates are included in cast unit.



Profile



Define the anti-skid or kick plate profile by selecting it from the profile catalog.



Rotation



Select an option to rotate the antiskid or kick plate profile.



Concrete Detailing



332



Concrete stairs



Anti-skid/kick plate position



Description 1



Anti-skid or kick plate distance from the left edge of the step.



2



Anti-skid or kick plate distance from the right edge of the step.



Description 1



Distance from the step front edge.



2



Depth for the anti-skid or kick plate.



Concrete stairs (65): Attributes tab



Use the Attributes tab to control the properties of different stair parts in Concrete stairs (65).



Concrete Detailing



333



Concrete stairs



Part attributes Option Pos_No



Description



Default



Prefix and start number for the part position number. Some components have a second row of fields where you can enter the assembly position number.



Material



Material grade.



Name



Name that is shown in drawings and reports.



Class



Part class number.



The default part start number is defined in the Components settings in File menu --> Settings --> Options.



The default material is defined in the Part material box in the Components settings in File menu --> Settings --> Options.



Concrete stairs (65): UDA tab



Use the UDA tab to provide additional information about the parts created in Concrete stairs (65). TIP The user-defined attributes are case sensitive. Check the correct spelling of an attribute from the objects.inp file.



Stairwells and elevator shafts (90) Creates a rectangular stairwell or elevator shaft to represent the structure in the design stage. When you detail the structure, you can apply seams, connections, and reinforcement to complete the details of a stairwell or elevator shaft. This component uses the Concrete stairs (65) (page 319) component for creating stairs. Parts created •



Wall panels



•



Landings (optional)



•



Flights of stairs (optional)



•



Roof slab (optional)



•



Openings (optional)



Concrete Detailing



334



Concrete stairs



Where to use Situation



More information A stairwell over four floors created using the default options. As shown, the points picked and the dimensions on the Stairs and landings tab determine the length of the stairwell. Walls consist of one or more precast concrete panels. 1 First point picked 2 Second point picked



Stairwells always contain a first floor and a top floor. Indicate the number of additional floors on the Plan view tab, Levels field. This stairwell has 2 additional floors, for a total of 4 floors. 1 Top floor 2 Additional floor 3 Additional floor 4 1st or ground floor Elevator shaft created by selecting the Elevator shaft option on the Stairs and landings tab, Type field, for all floors.



Limitations The minimum floor height between floors is 200 mm.



Concrete Detailing



335



Concrete stairs



Defining properties Use the tabs in the Stairwells and elevator shafts (90) dialog box to define the following properties: Tab Plan view



Contents Number of floors or levels. Position of picked points.



More information Stairwells and elevator shafts (90): Defining stairwell properties (page 336)



Length and width of shaft. Wall panel dimensions. Openings



Opening dimensions for Each wall may have a each wall panel and for single opening, or no the first, additional, and opening. top floors.



Stairs and landings



Stair and landing options and dimensions. Option to create elevator shaft (in the Type list boxes).



Attributes



Basic part properties for Part properties walls, stairs, and landings. Option to use the saved properties from the Concrete stairs (65) (page 319) component for the first, additional, and top stairs.



Picking order 1.



On the Plan view tab, check the Position option. The default is in the middle of walls 3 and 4.



2.



Pick a point to indicate the position of wall 3.



3.



Pick a point to indicate the position of wall 4.



Concrete Detailing



336



Concrete stairs



Stairwells and elevator shafts (90): Defining stairwell properties Use the Plan view tab in the Stairwells and elevator shafts (90) dialog box to define the properties of the stairwell or elevator shaft.



Stairwells and elevator shafts (90): Defining number of floors and height To define the number of levels and floor heights, enter a height for each floor level in the Levels field, for example:



You can also define negative floor levels, for example:



You can also use multiplier to define many floors, as in the following US imperial example:



Tekla Structures also uses these values to calculate the total height of the stairwell.



Stairwells and elevator shafts (90): Defining position To create the stairwell or elevator shaft, you pick two points in the model. Use the Position field to define the location of the stairwell or elevator shaft relative to these points. The options are: •



Middle (default)



•



Left



•



Right



Enter the offset distance from the selected position. Here, the offset is from the middle of wall.



Concrete Detailing



337



Concrete stairs



Stairwells and elevator shafts (90): Defining length and width To manually define the total length and total width of the stairwell or elevator shaft, enter the following values: L - total length W - total width Leave both fields blank to have Tekla Structures automatically calculate these dimensions from the the points picked:



Description 1



First point picked.



2



Second point picked.



3



Total width, W



4



Total length, L



NOTE The dimensions defined on the Stairs and landings tab may override the total length or width that is automatically calculated or that you manually enter.



Reinforced concrete stair (95)



Reinforced Concrete Stair (95) creates reinforced concrete stairs. Objects created •



Stairs



•



Landings (optional)



•



Ridges (optional)



•



Stringers (optional)



•



Anti-skid (optional)



•



Main bars and stirrups of stair reinforcement (Bar A - Bar L tabs) (optional)



•



Meshes in stairs and landings (optional)



Concrete Detailing



338



Concrete stairs



•



Mesh bars (optional)



•



Anchor bars (optional)



•



Landing end bars (optional)



Use for Situation



Description Reinforced concrete stairs.



Reinforced concrete stairs with chamfered steps, ridges and stringers.



Reinforced concrete stairs with reinforced landings.



Selection order 1.



Pick the first point to indicate the start point of the stairs. Concrete Detailing



339



Concrete stairs



2.



Pick the second point to indicate the direction of the stairs.



3.



Select any number of parts to be cut by the stairs (optional).



4.



Click the middle mouse button to create the stairs.



Parameters tab



Use the Parameters tab to control the shape of the stairs, number of steps, stair creation method and the stairs width. Stair dimensions Description



Concrete Detailing



340



1



Horizontal dimension of the steps area



2



Vertical dimension of the steps area



3



Step length



4



Step height



5



Shape options for stair bottom



6



Shape options for stair top



Concrete stairs



Description 7



Stair width



Stair creation method Option P1 P2 step length



Description Create stairs between points P1 and P2. Stair dimension are defined by the distance between P1 and P2 and step length.



P1 P2 step height



Create stairs between points P1 and P2. Stair dimension are defined by the distance between P1 and P2 and step height.



P1 step length step height N steps



Create stairs from point P1 to point P2.



P2 step length step height N steps



Create stairs from point P1 to point P2.



P1 horizontal and vertical step distance



Create stairs from point P1 to point P2.



P2 horizontal and vertical step distance



Create stairs from point P1 to point P2.



Stair dimensions are defined by P1 and step height, length and number of steps. Stair dimensions are defined by P2 and step height, length and number of steps. Stair dimensions are defined by P1 and horizontal and vertical step distance. Stair dimensions are defined by P2 and horizontal and vertical step distance.



Parts tab



Use the Parts tab to control the material, name, class, positioning, cast unit type and step chamfering. Step chamfer settings Option



Description



Middle for all



All steps are chamfered according to the Middle steps settings.



Bottom different



Bottom step is chamfered according to the 1st step at bottom settings. All other steps are chamfered according to the Middle steps settings.



Concrete Detailing



341



Concrete stairs



Option Top different



Description Top step is chamfered according to the Last top step settings. All other steps are chamfered according to the Middle steps settings.



Bottom and top different



Bottom step is chamfered according to the 1st step at bottom settings. Top step chamfered are according to the Last top step settings. All other steps are chamfered according to the Middle steps settings.



Step chamfer settings are set in the same way for 1st step at bottom, Middle steps and Last top step. Option



Description Size of step cut is defined by the distance.



Size of step cut is defined by the angle.



Corner chamfer types Corner chamfers 1. and 2. can be defined by the Radius x or by the sides of the Chamfer x, y.



Stairs and landings tab



Use the Stairs and landings tab to control the size and type of the bottom landing and the top landing.



Concrete Detailing



342



Concrete stairs



Bottom landing cut option Option



Description Bottom landing with no cut.



Bottom landing with cut defined by its length and distance from the top side of landing.



Bottom landing with cut defined by its length and distance from the bottom side of landing.



Bottom landing with L shape cut defined by its three dimensions and distance from the top side of landing. Bottom landing cut defined by a profile and its position in landing.



Top landing cut option Option



Description Top landing with no cut.



Top landing with cut defined by its length and distance from the top side of landing.



Top landing with cut defined by its length and distance from the bottom side of landing.



Concrete Detailing



343



Concrete stairs



Option



Description Top landing with L shape cut defined by its three dimensions and distance from the top side of landing.



Top landing cut defined by a profile and its position in landing.



Landing dimensioning Description Use the top view setting to define the dimensions of the bottom landing and the top landing.



Ridges tab



Use the Ridges tab to create horizontal and/or vertical ridges on both sides or only on one side of the stairs. Dimensions Description



Concrete Detailing



1



Thickness of the vertical ridge.



2



Width of the vertical ridge.



3



Width of the horizontal ridge.



4



Thickness/height of the horizontal ridge.



344



Concrete stairs



Horizontal ridges Option



Description



Create



Define whether horizontal ridges are created.



Create at foot



Define whether horizontal ridges are created at the foot of the stairs. This option works in the same way as the Create option.



Chamfering



1 Inside chamfer: Select the type of the inside chamfer and enter the required dimensions. 2 Corner chamfer: Select the type of the corner chamfer and enter the required dimensions. 3 Slope: Set the slope as an angle or a dimension. The slope makes the ridge inclined.



Foot corner chamfer



Define whether corner chamfers are created at the stair foot.



Concrete Detailing



345



Concrete stairs



Vertical ridges Option



Description



Create



Define whether vertical ridges are created.



Slope



Set the slope as an angle or a dimension. The slope makes the ridge inclined.



Stringers tab



Use the Stringers tab to create the stringers and ridges on the left, right, or both sides of the stairs.



Concrete Detailing



346



Concrete stairs



Description



Slope



1



Height of the stringer bottom ridge.



2



Horizontal offset of the bottom ridge from the bottom step.



3



Height of the stringer top ridge.



4



Width of the stringer.



Use to incline the inner surface of the stringers.



You can define the slope using an angle or a dimension. Inside chamfer



Define whether the inside edge of stringer is chamfered or not.



Outside chamfer



Define whether the outside edge of stringer is chamfered or not.



Stringer height



Stringer height based on the total height or distance from inner/outer step corner.



Anti-skid tab



Use the Anti-skid tab to create slip resistant surfaces.



Concrete Detailing



347



Concrete stairs



Option



Description



Creation anti-skid Define whether anti-skids are created. Create anti-skid on foot/top



Define whether anti-skids are created at the stair foot/ top.



Create cutout



Define whether you want to create cutouts with the anti-skid profile. By default, the cutouts are not created.



Include in cast unit



Define whether anti-skids are included in the cast unit.



Profile



Define the anti-skid profile by selecting it from the profile catalog.



Rotation



Select an option to rotate the anti-skid profile.



Bar A tab



Use the Bar A tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing bar spacing and reinforcing bar properties of a stair reinforcing bar group. Option



Description Geometry and concrete cover thickness.



Spacing, number of bars and concrete cover thickness of the reinforcing bar group.



Bar B tab



Use the Bar B tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing bar spacing and reinforcing bar properties of a stair reinforcing bar group.



Concrete Detailing



348



Concrete stairs



Bar B bottom ending options Define geometry and concrete cover thickness of the bar B bottom ending. Option



Description Bar B simple bottom ending.



Bar B bottom ending bent once to fit the bottom footing of the stairs.



Bar B bottom ending bent twice to fit the bottom footing of the stairs.



Bar B bottom ending bent up to three times to fit the bottom footing of the stairs.



Bar B top ending options Define geometry and concrete cover thickness of the bar B top ending. Option



Description Bar B simple top ending.



Concrete Detailing



349



Concrete stairs



Option



Description Bar B top ending bent once to fit the top geometry of the stairs.



Bar B top ending bent twice to fit the top geometry of the stairs. Last leg length is defined by the cover thickness.



Bar B top ending bent twice to fit the top geometry of the stairs.



Reinforcing bar spacing Option



Description Spacing, number of bars and concrete cover thickness of the reinforcing bar group.



Bar C tab



Use the Bar C tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing bar spacing and reinforcing bar properties of a stair reinforcing bar group.



Concrete Detailing



350



Concrete stairs



Option



Description Geometry and concrete cover thickness.



Spacing, number of bars and concrete cover thickness of the reinforcing bar group.



Extra I bars Option



Description The purple color in the dialog box represents the extra I bars. Define whether to create the extra I bars. Select the check boxes next to the purple points.



Cover thickness of the reinforcing bars.



Bar D tab



Use the Bar D tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing bar spacing and reinforcing bar properties of a stair reinforcing bar group.



Concrete Detailing



351



Concrete stairs



Option



Description Geometry and concrete cover thickness.



Spacing, number of bars and concrete cover thickness of the reinforcing bar group.



Extra I bars Extra I bars are straight bars crossing bar D. You can create up to four extra I bars. Option



Description The purple color in the dialog box represents the extra I bars. Define whether to create the extra I bars. Select the check boxes next to the purple points.



Cover thickness of the reinforcing bars.



Concrete Detailing



352



Concrete stairs



Bar E tab



Use the Bar E tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing bar spacing and reinforcing bar properties of a stair reinforcing bar group. Create options Option



Description



No



Bar is not created.



Stirrup



Bar is created as stirrup.



Pin



Bar is created as pin.



Concrete Detailing



353



Concrete stairs



Option



Description



Option



Description Geometry and concrete cover thickness.



Spacing, number of bars and concrete cover thickness of the reinforcing bar group.



Bar F tab



Use the Bar F tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing bar spacing and reinforcing bar properties of a stair reinforcing bar group



Concrete Detailing



354



Concrete stairs



Option



Description Geometry and concrete cover thickness.



Spacing, number of bars and concrete cover thickness of the reinforcing bar group.



Bar G tab



Use the Bar G tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing bar spacing and reinforcing bar properties of a stair reinforcing bar group.



Concrete Detailing



355



Concrete stairs



Option



Description Geometry and concrete cover thickness.



Spacing, number of bars and concrete cover thickness of the reinforcing bar group.



Extra I bars Extra I bars are straight bars crossing bar G. You can create up to four extra I bars. Option



Description The purple color in the dialog box represents the extra I bars. Define whether to create extra I bars. Select the check boxes next to the purple points.



Cover thickness of the reinforcing bars.



Bar H tab



Use the Bar H tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing bar spacing and reinforcing bar properties of a stair reinforcing bar group. Concrete Detailing



356



Concrete stairs



Create option Option



Description •



Do not create bar H



•



Create bar H



•



Create only bottom bar H reinforcing bar group



Bar H geometry option Option



Description Two bent reinforcing bar groups. Define geometry and concrete cover thickness.



Top reinforcing bar group is straight, bottom reinforcing bar group is bent on both sides. Define geometry and concrete cover thickness. Two bent reinforcing bar groups. Define geometry and concrete cover thickness.



Bar I tab



Use the Bar I tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing bar spacing and reinforcing bar properties of a stair reinforcing bar group.



Concrete Detailing



357



Concrete stairs



Option



Description Positioning, spacing and concrete cover thickness.



Concrete cover thickness of the reinforcing bar groups.



Bar J tab



Use the Bar J tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing bar spacing and reinforcing bar properties of a stair reinforcing bar group. You can create several bar J reinforcing bar groups. Each group has its own color representation on the Bar J tab. Color group options Option



Description Use the color group option to define which combination of bar J reinforcing bar groups (blue, green, brown) is created.



Concrete Detailing



358



Concrete stairs



Option



Description Positioning and concrete cover thickness for reinforcing bar groups based on the color representation.



Concrete cover thickness for all reinforcing bar groups.



Bar K tab



Use the Bar K tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing bar spacing and reinforcing bar properties of a stair reinforcing bar group. Option



Description Geometry and concrete cover thickness.



Spacing, number of bars and concrete cover thickness of the reinforcing bar group.



Extra I bars Extra I bars are straight bars crossing bar K. You can create up to three extra I bars.



Concrete Detailing



359



Concrete stairs



Option



Description The purple color in the dialog box represents the extra I bars. Define whether to create extra I bars by selecting the check boxes next to the purple points.



Cover thickness of the reinforcing bars.



Bar L tab



Use the Bar L tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing bar spacing and reinforcing bar properties of a stair reinforcing bar group. Option



Description Define whether an L shaped reinforcing bar group is created at the stair footing.



Define offsets for the reinforcing bar groups in the two top steps.



Define geometry for reinforcing bar groups in all steps, except for the two top steps.



Spacing, number of bars and concrete cover thickness of the reinforcing bar group.



Concrete Detailing



360



Concrete stairs



Bar L geometry options Option



Description L shape reinforcing bar groups.



L shape reinforcing bar groups with hooks.



Mesh picture tab



Use the Mesh picture tab to define bottom landing meshes, stair meshes and top landing meshes. Side view Description



Concrete Detailing



361



1



Bottom landing mesh (top). Define offsets and cover thickness of the mesh.



2



Bottom landing mesh (bottom). Define offsets and cover thickness of the mesh.



3



Stair mesh (top). Define offsets and cover thickness of the mesh.



4



Stair mesh (bottom). Define offsets and cover thickness of the mesh.



5



Top landing mesh (top). Define offsets and cover thickness of the mesh.



6



Top landing mesh (bottom). Define offsets and cover thickness of the mesh.



Concrete stairs



Top view Description 1



Cover thickness of bottom landing mesh (top).



2



Cover thickness of bottom landing mesh (bottom).



3



Cover thickness of stair mesh (top).



4



Cover thickness of stair mesh (bottom).



5



Cover thickness of top landing mesh (top).



6



Cover thickness of top landing mesh (bottom).



Mesh attributes tab



Use the Mesh attributes tab with the Mesh picture tab to define the properties, positioning and creation type of bottom landing meshes, stair meshes and top landing meshes.



Cross bar location Description Cross bar above. Cross bar below.



Concrete Detailing



362



Concrete stairs



Creation type Description Create mesh as reinforcement mesh. Create mesh as two independent reinforcing groups.



Mesh bars tab



Use the Mesh bars tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing bar spacing, and reinforcing bar properties of the mesh bars in the top and bottom landing. You can create up to three reinforcing bar groups. Description 1



Cover thicknesses of all mesh bar groups in the stair bottom landing. Use the color representation in the dialog box.



2



Vertical cover thicknesses of all mesh bar groups in the stair bottom landing. Use the color representation in the dialog box.



3



Cover thicknesses of all mesh bar groups in the stair top landing. Use the color representation in the dialog box.



4



Vertical cover thicknesses of all mesh bar groups in the stair top landing. Use the color representation in the dialog box.



Bottom anchor bars tab



Use the Bottom anchor bars tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing bar spacing, and reinforcing bar properties of the bottom anchor bars. You can create up to three reinforcing bar groups. Creation type Option



Description



No



No reinforcing bar group created.



Type1



L shape anchor reinforcing bar group.



Concrete Detailing



363



Concrete stairs



Option



Type2



Description



Simple straight anchor reinforcing bar group.



Top anchor bars tab



Use the Top anchor bars tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing bar spacing, and reinforcing bar properties of the top anchor bars. You can create up to three reinforcing bar groups. Creation type Option



Description



No



No reinforcing bar group created.



Type1



L shape anchor reinforcing bar group.



Type2



Simple straight anchor reinforcing bar group.



Concrete Detailing



364



Concrete stairs



Option



Description



Z anchor bars tab



Use the Z anchor bars tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing bar spacing, and reinforcing bar properties of the Z anchor bars. You can create up to three reinforcing bar groups. Description 1



Cover thicknesses of all Z anchor bar groups in the stair bottom landing. Use the color representation in the dialog box.



2



Vertical cover thicknesses of all Z anchor bar groups in the stair main part. Use the color representation in the dialog box.



3



Cover thicknesses of all Z anchor bar groups in the stair top landing. Use the color representation in the dialog box.



Bot Length of the Z anchor L bars that extend from the stair bottom landing. Top Length of the Z anchor L bars that extend from the stair top landing.



Concrete Detailing



365



Concrete stairs



Landing end bars tab



Use the Landing end bars tab to reinforce the stair landings and to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing bar spacing, and bar properties of the landing end bars. Bottom end Reinforcement of bottom landing. Description 1



Landing end bars. U-shape geometry follows the shape of the landing based on the defined cover thicknesses. Color representation in the picture: blue, green.



2



Define whether to create extra cross bars. Select the check boxes next to the purple points.



3



Define whether to create extra cross bars. Select the check boxes next to the red points.



Top end Reinforcement of top landing. Description 1



Landing end bars. U-shape geometry follows the shape of the landing based on defined cover thicknesses. Color representation in the picture: blue, green.



2



Define whether to create extra cross bars. Select the check boxes next to purple points.



3



Define whether to create extra cross bars. Select the check boxes next to red points.



Side cover thickness Option



Description Side cover thickness of all reinforcing bar groups defined on the Landing end bars tab.



Concrete Detailing



366



Concrete stairs



UDA tab



Use the UDA tab to define user-defined attributes for the stairs. You can define multiple UDAs. UDAs can be used as filters, and they can be displayed in drawings and reports.



Configuration tab



Use the Configuration tab to define the default cover thicknesses and bending radiuses of all reinforcing bars created by Reinforced Concrete Stair (95). Cover thickness for reinforcing bar groups A - C Define the default cover thickness for reinforcing bar groups A - C. Option



Description



Value



Default cover thickness defined by a value.



Rebar diameter



Default cover thickness multiplied by reinforcing bar diameter.



General cover thickness bars D - L Define the default cover thickness for reinforcing bar groups D - L and all reinforcing bars except the reinforcing bar groups A - C and meshes. Option



Description



Value



Default cover thickness defined by a value.



Rebar diameter



Default cover thickness multiplied by reinforcing bar diameter.



Bending radius Define the default bending radius of all reinforcing bars. Option



Description



Rebar_database.inp



Default bending radius defined by rebar_database.inp file.



Relative to diameter



Default bending radius according to the reinforcing bar diameter.



Bending radius



Default bending radius defined by value.



Mesh cover thickness Define the default cover thickness for the meshes created by Reinforced Concrete Stair (95).



Concrete Detailing



367



Foundations



1.8 Foundations This section introduces components that can be used in concrete foundations. Click the links below to find out more: •



Precast foundation block (1028) (page 368)



•



Concrete foundation (1030) (page 373)



Precast foundation block (1028)



Precast foundation block (1028) creates a concrete foundation block. The block can be divided in three sections. All three sections can be dimensioned separately. Parts created •



Foundation block



•



Embed



•



Regulator



Use for Situation



Description Precast foundation block with three sections.



Concrete Detailing



368



Foundations



Situation



Description Precast foundation block with one section.



Selection order 1.



Select the main part (concrete column).



2.



Pick a position. The detail is created automatically.



See also Precast foundation block (1028): Picture tab (page 369) Precast foundation block (1028): Parts tab (page 372) Precast foundation block (1028): Grooves tab (page 372)



Precast foundation block (1028): Picture tab



Use the Picture tab to dimension the foundation block in Precast foundation block (1028).



Concrete Detailing



369



Foundations



The foundation block can be dimensioned in both the front view and in the side view.



Description 1



Width of the top chord in section 1 (in front view).



2



Width of the inclined column cut-out.



3



Height of the column cut-out.



4



Offset of the plate that is under the block. The offset is relative to the foundation block.



5



Thickness of the plate under the block.



6



Width of the bottom chord in section 1 (in front view). Width of section 2 and section 3 (in front view).



7



Distance between the foundation block and the sides of the column.



8



Select how the sections in the foundation block are connected.



9



Select the reference point of the foundation block.



Concrete Detailing



370



Component insertion point is at the bottom side of the foundation block.



Foundations



Description Note that the red part (additional plate under the block) is not taken into account.



Additionally, you can set the vertical offset:



Component insertion point is at the bottom side of the cut-out of the column.



Component insertion point is at the bottom side of the column.



Component insertion point is at the top of the foundation block. 10



Width of the top chord in section 1 (in side view).



11



Distance from the bottom of the column to the foundation block.



12



Width of the bottom chord in section 1 (in side view). Width of section 2 and section 3 (in side view).



Concrete Detailing



371



Foundations



Precast foundation block (1028): Parts tab



Use the Parts to define the profiles for the foundation block, embed and regulator, and the embed dimensions in Precast foundation block (1028).



Opti on 1



Description Foundation block profiles, regulator and embed properties. If you do not select any material, Precast foundation block (1028) uses the same material as the column.



2



Select whether the regulator and the embed is created, and how they are connected to the foundation block.



3



Dimensions of the three sections of the foundation block. Additionally, you can define the column cut-out in the upper section. For sections 2 and 3 you can define the height of the inclined plane.



4



Dimensions of the embed.



Precast foundation block (1028): Grooves tab



Use the Grooves tab to define the grooves in Precast foundation block (1028).



Concrete Detailing



372



Foundations



Example:



Description 1



Height of the groove.



2



Distance between the grooves.



3



First distance related to the bottom of the column.



4



Depth for the grooves.



5



Number for the grooves.



Concrete foundation (1030)



Concrete foundation (1030) creates a concrete foundation plate at the bottom of a selected concrete column. Objects created •



Concrete foundation plate



Concrete Detailing



373



Foundations



•



Injection tubes and injection hoses in concrete column



•



Up to 4 concrete piles under the foundation plate (optional)



•



Stirrups for the reinforcing bars



Use for Situation



Description Concrete foundation plate with chamfers, piles, injection tubes with curved injection hoses, reinforcing bars and stirrups.



Concrete foundation plate with more than 4 edges, recesses in the foundation plate, and multiple reinforcing bars.



Concrete Detailing



374



Foundations



Situation



Description Concrete foundation plate with multiple reinforcing bars.



Selection order 1.



Select a concrete column.



2.



Pick a point. The concrete foundation plate is created automatically when the point is picked.



Concrete Detailing



375



Foundations



Part identification key



Part 1



Concrete column



2



Point The point defines the new bottom level of the column.



See also Concrete foundation (1030): Picture tab (page 376) Concrete foundation (1030): Parts tab (page 381) Concrete foundation (1030): Massive tab (page 383) Concrete foundation (1030): Piles tab (page 385) Concrete foundation (1030): Inj. tube and rebar tab (page 386) Concrete foundation (1030): Column tab (page 389) Concrete foundation (1030): Stirrups tab (page 390)



Concrete foundation (1030): Picture tab



Use the Picture tab to control the dimensions of the reinforcing bars and injection tubes in Concrete foundation (1030).



Concrete Detailing



376



Foundations



Dimensions



Description



Default



1



Length of the injection tube extension from the top of reinforcing bar.



180 mm



2



Reinforcing bar height in the column.



400 mm



3



Reinforcing bar top and bottom cover thickness.



0,5 * foundation plate thickness



4



5



The bottom cover thickness is used only if you do not define the top cover thickness. Pile thickness.



300 mm



The pile thickness value on the Parts tab overrides this value. 6



Distance from the bottom of the foundation plate to the bottom of the pile.



Concrete Detailing



377



Foundations



5000 mm



Description



Default



7



Pile depth in the foundation plate.



50 mm



8



Foundation plate thickness.



800 mm



9



Distance between the column and the foundation plate.



0 mm



10



Vertical offset from the picked point.



0 mm



11



Reinforcing bar height.



800 mm 400 mm + 50% of height of concrete footing



12



Injection tube elevation 1.



500 mm



13



Injection tube elevations 2 and 3. Vertical offset for the injection tubes if the tubes are pointing to the same direction. Define the level to use on the Inj. Tube and rebar tab.



Injection tube Select the shape and dimensions of the injection tubes.



Concrete Detailing



378



Foundations



Option



Description Injection tube in one piece, 90 degree angle.



Injection tube in one piece. Use value a to define the slope of the tube.



Injection tube and a 90 degree injection hose.



Injection tube and a sloped injection hose. Use value a to define the slope of the hose.



Concrete Detailing



379



Foundations



Option



Description Straight injection tube. No injection tube opening is created.



Description



Default



1



Define the height of a sloped injection 30 mm tube or hose angle.



2



Define the height of a curved injection 0 mm hose.



Reinforcing bar hook length Define the reinforcing bar hook length. You can define also the end angle of the reinforcing bar. The default value is 10 * reinforcing bar diameter.



Concrete Detailing



380



Foundations



Concrete foundation (1030): Parts tab



Use the Parts tab to control the profile properties of the foundation plate, foundation piles, stirrups and injection tubes in Concrete foundation (1030). Concrete massive, Piles Define the profile properties of the concrete foundation plate and the foundation piles. If you leave the pile thickness value empty on the Parts tab, the pile thickness value defined on the Picture tab is used instead together with the Pile profile type prefix (e.g. D). Option



Description



t, b, h



Part thickness, width and height.



Pos_No



Prefix and a start number for the part position number.



Material



Material grade.



Name



Name that is shown in drawings and reports.



Class



Part class number.



Comment



Add a comment for the part.



Concrete Detailing



381



Foundations



Reinforcing bars Option Type of reinforcing bars



Description Select the profile type for the reinforcing bars. •



Default: the same as Reinforcing bar



•



Poly-profile: profile catalog



•



Reinforcing bar: reinforcing bar catalog



Reinforcement bars



Size of the reinforcing bars.



Radius



Radius of the reinforcing bar hook.



Reinf. bars belong to



Define to which part the reinforcing bars belong. •



Default: the same as Columns



•



Concrete massive: reinforcing bars belong to the concrete foundation plate.



•



Column: reinforcing bars belong to the column.



Injection tubes and curve Option



Description



Injection tubes



Size of the injection tubes.



Curve



Size of the injection hoses.



Article number



Article number for the injection hose and the injection tube. The entered values are saved to the user-defined attribute of the part. Define how the injection hoses are connected to the injection tubes.



Concrete Detailing



382



•



Default: injection hoses are loose parts.



•



Part-add gain: injection hoses are added to the injection tubes.



•



Weld gain: injection hoses are welded to the injection tubes.



•



Cast unit column: injection hoses are added to the column.



•



Weld to column: injection hoses are welded to the column.



Foundations



Option



Description



Pile profile type prefix (e.g. D)



Default parametric profile prefix for the piles. This value works only if you have set the pile thickness on the Picture tab. You can override this value by setting the pile thickness on the Parts tab.



Reinf. bar profile type prefix (e.g.D) Default parametric profile prefix for the reinforcing bar profiles.



Concrete foundation (1030): Massive tab



Use the Massive tab to control the shape and the dimensions of the concrete foundation plate and the recesses in Concrete foundation (1030). Concrete foundation plate type Option



Description



Type of massive



Select the plate type for the rectangular foundation plate.



Massive direction



Select the direction of the foundation plate.



Concrete foundation plate dimensions



Concrete Detailing



383



Foundations



Description 1



Offset from the concrete column in the x direction.



2



Offset from the concrete column in the y direction.



3



Select the shape of the foundation plate.



4



Width of the foundation plate.



5



Length of the straight part of the foundation plate.



6 7



Offset from the foundation plate center line.



8



Width of the straight part of the foundation plate.



9



Length of the foundation plate.



Recess dimensions



Concrete Detailing



384



Foundations



Description 1



Select the type of the recess.



2



Width of the recesses.



3



Depth of the recesses.



4



Distance between the bottom of the reinforcing bar and the bottom of the recess.



5



Distance between the center line of the reinforcing bar and the left side of the recess.



6



Distance between the center line of the reinforcing bar and the right side of the recess. Option



Description



Chamfer type for rectangular massive



Chamfer type for the rectangular foundation plate.



Chamfer X



Chamfer size in the x direction.



Chamfer Y



Chamfer size in the y direction.



Concrete foundation (1030): Piles tab



Use the Piles tab to control the position of the foundation piles in Concrete foundation (1030). Pile positions



Description 1



Select the position and the offset of the piles.



2



Distance between the first pile and the column in the x direction.



4



Distance between the second pile and the column in the x direction.



Concrete Detailing



385



Foundations



Description 6 8



Distance between the third pile and the column in the x direction.



3



Distance between the first pile and the column in y direction.



5



Distance between the second pile and the column in y direction.



7 9



Distance between the fourth pile and the column in the x direction.



Distance between the third pile and the column in y direction. Distance between the fourth pile and the column in y direction.



10



Pile offset from the concrete column in the x direction.



11



Pile offset from the concrete column in the y direction. Option



Description



Piles direction



Define the direction of the piles.



Join piles to massive



Define how the piles are connected to the foundation plate.



Concrete foundation (1030): Inj. tube and rebar tab



Use the Inj. tube and rebar tab to control the creation, number and position of the reinforcing bars and injection tubes in Concrete foundation (1030). Option



Description



Create



Select which parts are created.



Injection tubes bend radius



Radius of the injection tubes.



Concrete Detailing



386



Foundations



Injection tube properties



Description 1



Select the direction of the bent bars.



2



Select the direction of the injection hoses.



3



Number of injection tubes.



4



Center-to-center distance between the injection tubes.



5



Define the level of the curved injection parts. This is useful if the curved parts are pointing to the same direction. You can define the levels on the Picture tab.



Concrete Detailing



387



Foundations



Description



Example:



6



Define the distance from the center of the injection tube to the outer contour of the concrete foundation.



Concrete Detailing



388



Foundations



Example



Concrete foundation (1030): Column tab



Use the Column tab to control the dimensions of the column cut-out in Concrete foundation (1030).



Concrete Detailing



389



Foundations



Column dimensions



Description 1



Size of the column cut-out.



2



Height of the column cut-out.



Concrete foundation (1030): Stirrups tab



Use the Stirrups tab to control the stirrup properties in Concrete foundation (1030). Stirrup properties Option



Description Select whether the stirrups are created. Define the length of the laps.



Grade



Grade of the stirrups.



Size



Size of the stirrups.



End conditions left Hook for the start point of the stirrups. End conditions right



Hook for the end point of the stirrups.



Bend lengths left



Hook length for the start point of the stirrup.



Bend lengths right



Hook length for the end point of the stirrup.



Concrete Detailing



390



Foundations



Option Creation method



Description Creation method of the stirrups. Number of bars: Enter the number of the stirrups.



By spacing: Enter a spacing value.



Define the comment, name, class, serie and start number for the stirrups.



Concrete Detailing



391



Foundations



Description 1



Select the start point of stirrups, either from the bottom of the column to the first stirrup or from the top of the reinforcing bar to first stirrup.



2



Define the distance from the bottom of the reinforcing bar to the last stirrup.



Example



Concrete Detailing



392



Foundations



2



Reinforcement



This section introduces components that can be used in reinforcement. See also Reinforcement for foundations (page 393) Beam, column, and slab reinforcement (page 405) Lifting (page 592)



2.1 Reinforcement for foundations Tekla Structures includes the following components that you can use to automatically create reinforcement for foundations: Component



Description



Strip footing (75) (page 393)



Creates reinforcement for a concrete strip footing.



Pile cap reinforcement (76) (page 396)



Creates reinforcement for a concrete pile cap.



Pad footing (77) (page 400)



Creates reinforcement for a concrete pad footing.



Starter bars (page 402)



Creates starter bars in a footing and a pedestal for a column. Creates starter bars in a footing for a column.



Reinforcement



393



Reinforcement for foundations



Strip footing (75) Creates reinforcement for a concrete strip footing. Bars created •



Longitudinal bars for the top and bottom surfaces and sides of the footing



•



Stirrups



Use for Situation



More information



Straight strip footings that have rectangular cross sections Main bars entirely inside the footing, no side bars, stirrup laps at stirrup corners. Main bars protruding from the footing, two bars on both sides, stirrup laps in the middle of the top surface. Do not use for Footings that have: •



Irregular cross sections



•



Skew or cut corners



Before you start •



Create the concrete strip footing.



•



Calculate the required area of reinforcement.



Defining properties Use the following tabs in the Strip footing (75) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab Picture



Contents



See also



Concrete cover thickness, location of side bars and first stirrups



Reinforcement



394



Reinforcement for foundations



Tab



Contents



See also



Main bars



Grade, size, number, spacing, and bond lengths of the top, bottom, left, and right bars



Stirrups



Grade, size, spacing, and bend type of stirrups



Attributes



Numbering properties, name, and class of the top, bottom, left, and right bars, and stirrups



Strip footing reinforcement properties (page 395)



Picking order 1.



Concrete strip footing.



Strip footing reinforcement properties Bond length of main bars Bond lengths define how far main bars extend into adjacent structures at the ends of strip footings. Use the Bond length 1 fields on the Main bars tab for the first end of the footing (with the yellow handle), and the Bond length 2 fields for the second end of the footing (with the magenta handle). You can define bond lengths separately for: •



Top bars



•



Bottom bars



•



Bars on the left side of the footing



•



Bars on the right side of the footing



Bend type for stirrups To define the location of the stirrup laps in the strip footing, select an option from the Bend type list box on the Stirrups tab. The options are: Option



Examples



At mid



Reinforcement



395



Reinforcement for foundations



Option



Examples



At corner



Pile cap reinforcement (76) Creates reinforcement for a concrete pile cap. Bars created •



Bars in two directions for the top and bottom surfaces of the pile cap



•



Lacer bars



Use for Situation



More information Bottom bars concentrated over the piles, top bars under the column. Two lacer bars.



Bars evenly distributed on the bottom and top surfaces. No lacer bars.



Rectangular footings with or Pad footing and pile cap without cut corners, footings shapes (page 397) that are skewed on one or both sides Bars on the top, bottom, or both surfaces of the footing



Reinforcement



396



Reinforcement for foundations



Situation



More information



Straight or bent bar ends Before you start •



Create the concrete pile cap.



•



Calculate the required area of reinforcement.



Defining properties Use the following tabs in the Pilecap reinforcement (76) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab



Contents



Picture



See also



Concrete cover thickness, primary bar direction



Primary top Grade, size, hooks, bend bars lengths, distribution (by number or spacing), and Secondary arrangement/location of top bars the top and bottom bars Primary in two directions bottom bars



Bar distribution (page 398)



Secondary bottom bars Lacer bars



Option to create lacer Lacer bars for pad bars, grade, size, number, footings and pile spacing, location, type, caps (page 399) orientation, and laps of lacer bars



Attributes



Numbering properties, name, and class of the top, bottom, and lacer bars



Picking order 1.



Concrete pile cap



2.



Piles and/or columns



3.



Click the middle mouse button to finish.



Reinforcement



397



Reinforcement for foundations



Pad footing and pile cap shapes Use the Pile cap reinforcement (76) and Pad footing (77) tools to create reinforcement for the following shapes of foundations: Shape



Description Rectangular



Skewed on two sides



Skewed on one side



Rectangular with cut corners



Bar distribution Pad footings In pad footings, you can arrange the main reinforcing bars into: •



One zone of bars that have the same bar properties



•



Three zones of bars that have different bar properties



You set the options separately for primary and secondary bars. Select an option from the Arrangement list box on the relevant tab in the Pad footing (77) dialog box. Pile caps Define the pile cap reinforcement using the following properties in the Pile cap reinforcement (76) dialog box: Field To suit pile/column



Reinforcement



Description Select Yes to concentrate main bars over piles and under columns.



398



Reinforcement for foundations



Field % of pile/column width



Description The area where the bars are concentrated, as a percentage of the width of the pile or column. For example, if the pile diameter or width is 500 mm, enter 120 in the % of pile width field to concentrate bars in a 600 mm-wide area over the pile.



Bar portioning (%)



The proportion of bars concentrated over a pile or under a column.



Bar portioning (number of bars)



The number of bars concentrated over a pile or under a column.



You can define these properties separately for: •



Primary top bars



•



Secondary top bars



•



Primary bottom bars



•



Secondary bottom bars



Lacer bars for pad footings and pile caps Lacer bars are reinforcing bars that loop around the sides of a concrete footing. You can create up to six different groups of lacer bars in a footing. Each group can contain different values for: •



Grade



•



Bar size



•



Number of bars



•



Spacing



•



Shape



•



Dimensions



To create lacer bars for a footing: 1.



Open the footing reinforcement properties dialog box and click the Lacer bars tab.



2.



In the Lacer bar option list box, select Yes to create lacer bars.



3.



Enter properties for each lacer bar group:



Reinforcement



399



Reinforcement for foundations



Property



Description Quantity, spacing, and location of lacer bar groups. Tekla Structures only uses information from some of the fields, in this order of priority: 1.



Number of bars and Spacing



2.



Number of bars, Start, and End



3.



Spacing, Start, and End



Type



The number and location of laps. The options are:



Orientation



The options are Default, Front, and Back.



p1...p4



The exact locations and lengths of lacer bar laps. Locations are measured from the corner of the bar to the midpoints of laps.



L1...L4



The location of the topmost lacer bar, measured from the end of main bars. Entering a value here overrides the location defined in the End field.



Reinforcement



400



Reinforcement for foundations



Pad footing (77) Creates reinforcement for a concrete pad footing. Bars created •



Bars in two directions for the bottom surface of the pad footing



•



Lacer bars



Use for Situation



More information Rectangular footing, 90degree hooks at the primary bar ends, 180-degree hooks at the secondary bar ends, no lacer bars.



Rectangular footing, three zones of primary bars with different spacing, straight bar ends, three lacer bars.



Footing skewed on two sides, two groups of lacer bars with different spacing.



Rectangular footings with or Pad footing and pile cap without cut corners, footings shapes (page 397) that are skewed on one or both sides Before you start •



Create the concrete pad footing.



•



Calculate the required area of reinforcement.



Reinforcement



401



Reinforcement for foundations



Defining properties Use the following tabs in the Pad footing (77) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab



Contents



Picture



See also



Concrete cover thickness



Primary bar Arrangement, grade, size, Bar distribution hooks, bend lengths, and (page 398) Secondary distribution (by number bar or spacing) of the primary and secondary bars, primary bar direction Lacer bar



Grade, size, number, spacing, location, type, orientation, and laps of lacer bars



Lacer bars for pad footings and pile caps (page 399)



Attributes



Numbering properties, name, and class of the primary, secondary, and lacer bars



Picking order 1.



Concrete pad footing



Starter bars Starter bars for pillar (86) and Starter bars for footing (87) create starter bars in a footing for a column. Starter bars may go through a pedestal or straight to the column. Starter bars can be in a rectangular or circular form. Bars created •



Starter bars (straight or L-shaped)



•



Stirrups (optional)



Reinforcement



402



Reinforcement for foundations



Use for Situation



More information Starter bars for footing (87) places starter bars in a footing in rectangular or circular form. Starter bars can be straight or L-shaped, and can have stirrups.



Starter bars for pillar (86) creates straight or L-shaped starter bars that go through a rectangular or circular pedestal. Starter bars can have stirrups.



Before you start •



Create the footing.



•



Calculate the required area of reinforcement.



Defining properties Use the following tabs in the Starter bars for pillar (86) and Starter bars for footing (87) dialog boxes to define the component properties: Tab Picture



Contents



See also



86: Bar dimensions and locations, number and spacing of bars, stirrup type, concrete cover thickness



Starter bar stirrups (page 404)



87: Bar dimensions and locations, number and spacing of bars, concrete cover thickness



Reinforcement



403



Reinforcement for foundations



Tab



Contents



Location



See also



87 only: Location of bars, stirrup type



Starter bar location (page 404) Starter bar stirrups (page 404)



Parameters Grade, size, name, class, and numbering properties of bars Picking order 1.



Footing



2.



Pedestal (only for Starter bars for pillar (86))



Starter bar stirrups Use these options to define stirrup laps in footings: Option



Description Laps on the side of the stirrups 45-degree hooks at bar ends Laps at stirrup corners 135-degree hooks at bar ends Laps at stirrup corners 90-degree hooks at bar ends If the starter bars are in a circular form, you must define the angle of stirrup overlap.



Reinforcement



404



Reinforcement for foundations



Starter bar location When you use Starter bars for footing (87), you must define the location of starter bars. Enter the distance from the center of the bar group to the center of the footing, in two directions:



2.2 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement Tekla Structures includes the following components that you can use to automatically create reinforcement for beams, columns, and slabs: •



Detailing manager (page 406)



•



Mesh Bars (page 408)



•



Mesh Bars by Area (page 414)



•



Slab bars (18) (page 438)



•



Slab Reinforcement Tool (page 440)



•



Beam reinforcement (63) (page 444)



•



Double tee reinforcement (64) (page 448)



•



Beam end reinforcement (79) (page 450)



•



Corbel reinforcement (81) (page 454)



•



Round column reinforcement (82) (page 459)



•



Rectangular column reinforcement (83) (page 467)



•



Hole reinforcement for slabs and walls (84) (page 479)



•



Hole creation and reinforcement (85) (page 481)



•



Braced girder (88) (page 485)



•



Braced girder (89) (page 505)



•



Reinforcement mesh array in area (89) / Reinforcement mesh array (91) (page 524)



•



Wall panel reinforcement / Double wall edge and opening reinforcement (page 529)



•



Multiple Wire Size Mesh (page 536)



•



Embedded anchors (8) (page 540)



Reinforcement



405



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



•



Embed (1008) (page 581)



•



Continuous Beam Reinforcement (page 591)



Detailing manager



Detailing manager is used to apply detailing components into any structure. With Detailing manager you can define rules to apply multiple components at one go to detail the structure of a cast unit or the entire model. You can use selection filters to define detailing rules for automating repetitive detailing tasks. You can add custom details, extensions or system components with Detailing manager. You have three options: •



Use Detailing manager to have a part as input. All parts in the cast unit are examined and detailed by the set rules.



•



Use Detailing manager to have a cast unit as input. All parts in the cast unit are examined and detailed by the set rules.



•



Use Detailing manager to have a component as input, for example, tools such as Floor layout or Wall layout where the same tool creates multiple parts. All parts in the component are examined and detailed by the set rules.



The image below shows an example of Detailing manager. In the example, the Mesh bars component is created to the outside shell of the cast unit because it has the class 4 filter selected and there is a selection filter for objects with class 4.



Reinforcement



406



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Properties Option Rule



Description Use the rules to define detailing settings. to The maximum number of rules is 10. Click add a new rule. You can rename a rule by right-clicking the rule tab. You can also delete rules.



Component



Click to select the component that you want to use to detail a structure. Double-click the component in the Applications & components catalog to add it to the Component box.



Attribute



Select the attribute file for the component. If you do not select a file, the standard file is used.



Component input



Define the creation method of the selected component: •



Part: Select the part to which you are creating the component.



•



Part + one point: Select the part and one additional point on the part. With this option, Detailing manager places the center of the object boundary box to that point. Use this setting with custom component details.



•



Filter



Part + two points: Select the part and two additional points on the part. With this option, Detailing manager uses the start and the end point of the part as insertion points.



Select which parts inside the selected cast unit or component get the selected component. The available selection filters are listed in the filter list. You can also create new selection filters. You can use five selection filters if you want to create an intersection of the filters.



Create on selected objects



Detailing manager is created to selected parts, cast units or components. The rule settings that are currently set in the Detailing manager dialog box are used.



Create as



•



Detailing manager plug-in: Components are inserted as Detailing manager plug-ins and not as separate components. Select this option if you use a component as input.



Reinforcement



407



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option •



Description Separate components: With this setting, the inserted components do not have any connection to Detailing manager.



Mesh Bars



Mesh Bars creates reinforcement for concrete slabs or walls. Objects created •



Primary bars



•



Crossing bars



Use for Situation



Description Reinforcement for the bottom or the top surface of the concrete element, or for both.



Selection order 1.



Select a concrete slab. The reinforcement is created automatically.



Reinforcement



408



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



See also Mesh Bars: Picture tab (page 409) Mesh Bars: Detailing tab (page 410) Mesh Bars: Bar end conditions tab (page 412) Mesh Bars: Splicing tab (page 413) Mesh Bars: Attributes tab (page 414)



Mesh Bars: Picture tab



Use the Picture tab to define how the top and bottom bars are created in Mesh Bars. Option



Description



Create bars



Top bars with primary bars above secondary bars Top bars with secondary bars above primary bars No bars



The same options are available for the bottom bars as well. The value defined in the box is the cover thickness for the top/ bottom layer. Same as bottom



Select whether the top bars are created using the same properties as the bottom bars. If you select No, enter the top bar properties.



Bar type



Select whether the bars are created as a bar group or as a mesh.



Size



Select the diameter of a bar. You can set the size separately for the top primary and secondary bars, and for the bottom primary and secondary bars.



Grade



Define the strength of the steel used in the bars. You can set the grade separately for the top primary and secondary bars, and for the bottom primary and secondary bars.



Spacing type



Select whether the spacing is based on the number of bars or the spacing value.



Reinforcement



409



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option • • Spacing



Description By spacings: enter the distance between the bars in the Spacing box. Number of bars: enter the number of bars in the Number of bars box.



Distance between the bars. Tekla Structures calculates the number of bars. You can set the spacing separately for the top primary and secondary bars, and for the bottom primary and secondary bars.



Number of bars



Number of bars. Tekla Structures calculates the distance between bars. You can set the number of bars separately for the top primary and secondary bars, and for the bottom primary and secondary bars.



Primary bars direction



The direction of the primary bars. Use to change bar direction. If the Auto option is selected, the primary bars are created along the two longest parallel sides of a slab. If there are no parallel sides, then the bars are created along the slab x direction instead.



Up direction



Select which sides are regarded as the top and bottom sides of the slab. If the Auto option is selected, then the bars are created on the side with the greatest area.



Mesh Bars: Detailing tab



Use the Detailing tab to control how the bars are distributed in Mesh Bars. Option



Description



Bar edge distances



Define the edge distance of the bars.



Adjustment



Select how the bars are distributed. The same options are available for both the primary and the secondary bars. Equal distribution by target spacing value.



Reinforcement



410



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Description By exact spacing value with flexible first space without first bar. By exact spacing value with flexible last space without last bar. By exact spacing value with flexible first and last space without first and last bars. By exact spacing value with flexible first space.



By exact spacing value with flexible last space.



By exact spacing value with flexible first and last space.



Bar grouping



Select whether tapered bars are grouped or not. If you group the tapered bars, select how the bars along tapered the edge are handled. Tapered bars are handled normally.



Creates as many bars as possible with same length in the tapered edge. Bar behavior at cuts



Select how bars next to openings are handled. •



Cut bars: Select whether the bars are cut and which cuts are ignored.



Reinforcement



411



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option • • Minimum length of bar to be created



Description Ignore openings smaller than: The minimum value by which the bar is shortened. Lower values are ignored. Cover thickness in holes: Distance between the bar end/start point to the edge of the opening.



Bars that are shorter than this value are not created.



Mesh Bars: Bar end conditions tab



Use the Bar end conditions tab to control the cover thickness and bar hooks in Mesh Bars. Option



Description



Cover thickness on sides



•



Different each side: Each end of a bar group can have different distances from part edges.



•



Same all sides: All ends of the bar groups have the same distance from part edge.



End conditions



Creates a 90° hook at a given end of bar Creates a 135° hook at a given end of bar. Creates a 180° hook at a given end of bar. Creates a straight bar without a hook at the given end of a bar. Creates a hook with a free angle at the given end of a bar. Creates a double bent hook at the given end of a bar.



Bending radius



Bending radius at bar ends



Bending length



Bending length at bar ends



Reinforcement



412



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Mesh Bars: Splicing tab



Use the Splicing tab to control the splicing of the reinforcing bars in Mesh Bars. Option



Description



Splice bars



Select whether the reinforcing bars are spliced or not.



Manufacturer



Select the manufacturer of the reinforcement. The maximum bar lengths and lap lengths are then listed by the grade and size of the bar. If needed, you can modify these splicing definitions in the MeshBarsSplicing_Manufacturers.dat file. You can also copy the default file from .. \ProgramData\Tekla Structures\ \environments\common\system, edit it, and save it to your project or firm folder.



Maximum length of bars



Maximum reinforcing bar length after which the bars are spliced.



Lapping length



Length of the lapping connection.



Splicing in same cross section



Select how many reinforcing bars can be spliced in the same location.



Splicing symmetry



Reinforcement



•



1/1 = all reinforcing bars are spliced in the same cross section.



•



1/2 = every second reinforcing bar is spliced in the same cross section.



•



1/3 = every third reinforcing bar is spliced in the same cross section.



•



1/4 = every fourth reinforcing bar is spliced in the same cross section.



Select the symmetry that is applied when the reinforcing bars are spliced. •



Not Symmetrical: The splice pattern of the reinforcing bar is not symmetrical and the uneven length is only at one side.



•



Symmetrical with different lengths at sides: The splice pattern of the reinforcing bar is symmetrical with uneven lengths at the sides.



•



Symmetrical with different length at center: The splice pattern of the reinforcing bar is symmetrical with uneven length in the center.



413



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Description



Splicing offset



Offset of the splice center point from the point where the reinforcing bars originally met.



Minimum splitting distance



Minimum longitudinal distance between two splices in consecutive bars.



Splicing type



Select the type of the splice.



Bar position



Select whether the lapping bars are on top of each other or parallel to each other.



Mesh Bars: Attributes tab



Use the Attributes tab to control the bar group or mesh properties in Mesh Bars. Option



Description



Name



Name of the bar group or mesh.



Prefix



Prefix for the position number of the bar group or mesh.



Start number



Start number for the position number of the bar group or mesh.



Class



Class of the bar group or mesh. If you create a mesh, only the class of primary bars is taken into account.



Mesh Bars by Area



Mesh Bars by Area creates reinforcement for concrete slabs or walls. Objects created •



Primary bars



•



Crossing bars



Use for Situation



Description Reinforcement for the bottom or top surface of the concrete element, or for both.



Reinforcement



414



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Situation



Description



Selection order 1.



Select a concrete slab.



2.



Select a group of points to define a working polygon. The reinforcement is created automatically.



See also Mesh Bars by Area: Picture tab (page 415) Mesh Bars by Area: Detailing tab (page 418) Mesh Bars by Area: Bar end conditions tab (page 420) Mesh Bars by Area: Splicing tab (page 420) Mesh Bars by Area: Attributes tab (page 422)



Mesh Bars by Area: Picture tab



Use the Picture tab to define how the top and bottom bars are created in Mesh Bars by Area. Option



Description



Create bars



Top bars with primary bars above secondary bars Top bars with secondary bars above primary bars



Reinforcement



415



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Description No bars



The same options are available for the bottom bars as well. The value defined in the box is the cover thickness for the top/ bottom layer. Mesh area perimeter



Select the outline that the mesh follows. The meshes in the examples are created by picking the same points but with different mesh area perimeters. Part, for example:



Part



Polygon, for example:



Polygon



Reinforcement



416



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Description Part + polygon, for example:



Polygon + part



Same as bottom



Select whether the top bars are created using the same properties as the bottom bars. If you select No, enter the top bar properties.



Bar type



Select whether the bars are created as a bar group or as a mesh.



Size



Select the diameter of a bar. You can set the size separately for the top primary and secondary bars, and for the bottom primary and secondary bars.



Grade



Define the strength of the steel used in the bars. You can set the grade separately for the top primary and secondary bars, and for the bottom primary and secondary bars.



Spacing type



Select whether the spacing is based on the number of bars or the spacing value.



Spacing



•



By spacings: enter the distance between the bars in the Spacing box.



•



Number of bars: enter the number of bars in the Number of bars box.



Distance between the bars. Tekla Structures calculates the number of bars. You can set the spacing separately for the top primary and secondary bars, and for the bottom primary and secondary bars.



Number of bars



Number of bars.



Reinforcement



417



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Description Tekla Structures calculates the distance between bars. You can set the number of bars separately for the top primary and secondary bars, and for the bottom primary and secondary bars.



Primary bars direction



The direction of the primary bars. Use to change bar direction. If the Auto option is selected, the primary bars are created along the two longest parallel sides of a slab. If there are no parallel sides, then the bars are created along the slab x direction instead.



Up direction



Select which sides are regarded as the top and bottom sides of the slab. If the Auto option is selected, then the bars are created on the side with the greatest area.



Mesh Bars by Area: Detailing tab



Use the Detailing tab to control how the bars are distributed in Mesh Bars by Area. Option



Description



Bar edge distances



Define the edge distance of the bars.



Adjustment



Select how the bars are distributed. The same options are available for both the primary and the secondary bars. Equal distribution by target spacing value.



By exact spacing value with flexible first space without first bar. By exact spacing value with flexible last space without last bar.



Reinforcement



418



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Description By exact spacing value with flexible first and last space without first and last bars. By exact spacing value with flexible first space.



By exact spacing value with flexible last space.



By exact spacing value with flexible first and last space.



Bar grouping Select whether tapered bars are grouped or not. If you group the tapered bars, select how the bars along tapered the edge are handled. Tapered bars are handled normally.



Creates as many bars as possible with same length in the tapered edge. Bar behavior Select how bars next to openings are handled. at cuts • Cut bars: Select whether the bars are cut and which cuts are ignored. •



Ignore openings smaller than: The minimum value by which the bar is shortened. Lower values are ignored.



•



Cover thickness in holes: Distance between the bar end/ start point to the edge of the opening.



Minimum Bars that are shorter than this value are not created. length of bar to be created



Reinforcement



419



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Mesh Bars by Area: Bar end conditions tab



Use the Bar end conditions tab to control the cover thickness and bar hooks in Mesh Bars by Area. Option



Description



Cover thickness on sides



•



Different each side: Each end of a bar group can have different distances from part edges.



•



Same all sides: All ends of the bar groups have the same distance from part edge.



End conditions



Creates a 90° hook at a given end of bar Creates a 135° hook at a given end of bar. Creates a 180° hook at a given end of bar. Creates a straight bar without a hook at the given end of a bar. Creates a hook with a free angle at the given end of a bar. Creates a double bent hook at the given end of a bar.



Bending radius



Bending radius at bar ends



Bending length



Bending length at bar ends



Mesh Bars by Area: Splicing tab



Use the Splicing tab to control the splicing of the reinforcing bars in Mesh Bars by Area. Option Splice bars



Reinforcement



Description Select whether the reinforcing bars are spliced or not.



420



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option Manufacturer



Description Select the manufacturer of the reinforcement. The maximum bar lengths and lap lengths are then listed by the grade and size of the bar. If needed, you can modify these splicing definitions in the MeshBarsSplicing_Manufacturers.dat file. You can also copy the default file from .. \ProgramData\Tekla Structures\ \environments\common\system, edit it, and save it to your project or firm folder.



Maximum length of bars



Maximum reinforcing bar length after which the bars are spliced.



Lapping length



Length of the lapping connection.



Splicing in same cross section



Select how many reinforcing bars can be spliced in the same location.



Splicing symmetry



•



1/1 = all reinforcing bars are spliced in the same cross section.



•



1/2 = every second reinforcing bar is spliced in the same cross section.



•



1/3 = every third reinforcing bar is spliced in the same cross section.



•



1/4 = every fourth reinforcing bar is spliced in the same cross section.



Select the symmetry that is applied when the reinforcing bars are spliced. •



Not Symmetrical: The splice pattern of the reinforcing bar is not symmetrical and the uneven length is only at one side.



•



Symmetrical with different lengths at sides: The splice pattern of the reinforcing bar is symmetrical with uneven lengths at the sides.



•



Symmetrical with different length at center: The splice pattern of the reinforcing bar is symmetrical with uneven length in the center.



Splicing offset



Offset of the splice center point from the point where the reinforcing bars originally met.



Minimum splitting distance



Minimum longitudinal distance between two splices in consecutive bars.



Splicing type



Select the type of the splice.



Bar position



Select whether the lapping bars are on top of each other or parallel to each other.



Reinforcement



421



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Mesh Bars by Area: Attributes tab



Use the Attributes tab to control the bar group or mesh properties in Mesh Bars by Area. Option



Description



Name



Name of the bar group or mesh.



Prefix



Prefix for the position number of the bar group or mesh.



Start number



Start number for the position number of the bar group or mesh.



Class



Class of the bar group or mesh. If you create a mesh, only the class of primary bars is taken into account.



Rebar coupler



Rebar coupler creates couplers to split reinforcing bars and bar groups, or to bars and bar groups whose ends are in contact and parallel. Rebar coupler is a part of Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools. Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools is a set of four components that help to model and manage •



reinforcing bar couplers that connect two bars



•



end anchors that are devices at the unreserved end of the bar.



The following components belong to Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: •



Rebar coupler (page 422)



•



Rebar end anchor (page 425)



•



Split rebar and add coupler (page 429)



•



Rebar end trimming (page 433)



In addition, you can manage the user-defined attributes (UDAs) of the Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools with the Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Update rebar attributes (page 435) component. Objects created •



Round parts The parts are connected between two reinforcing bar groups.



Reinforcement



422



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Use for Situation



Description Couplers with split reinforcing bars.



Before you start Couplers can be created between reinforcing bar groups or single reinforcing bars and reinforcement meshes. The two selected reinforcement objects can be of different type and they can even have different number of bars. The only requirement is that one or more bar ends are in contact and parallel. Selection order 1.



Select the first bar or bar group.



2.



Select the second bar or bar group.



Couplers are created at each location where •



the bar ends are parallel enough (angle < 5 degree) and



•



the gap along the bar end is less than the length of the coupler and



•



the offset perpendicular to the bar end legs is less than the diameter of the bars



When there is no valid and no parallel end-to-end location between the selected bars, the component creates a dummy part that identifies the unsuccessful coupler insertion. All couplers are automatically added to the parent part of the reinforcing bar. This allows them to be shown in reports and drawings because they are added to the sub-assembly of the cast unit. In some cases the reinforcing bars can move outside of the concrete. This may happen with reinforcing bars that are modeled with two points (straight bars and straight bars with hooks). If the reinforcing bars move outside of the concrete, change the cover thickness to either a negative or a positive value depending on what is required. Two report templates Rebar Extra Fabrication Length.rpt and Rebar Thread Length.rpt can be used to inquire Threaded Length and Extra Fab. Length of the reinforcing bars in the BOMs or BOQs. See also Rebar coupler: Parameters tab (page 424) Reinforcement



423



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Rebar coupler: Attributes tab (page 425) Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Customize attribute files, part mapping and user-defined attributes (UDAs) (page 436)



Rebar coupler: Parameters tab



Use the Parameters tab to define the coupler properties in Rebar coupler. Option



Description



Use manually entered values



Enter values for the coupler properties.



Use auto attribute file



The values in the auto attribute file override the coupler component values. Typically the auto attributes file contains one or more attribute values to be used with certain bar sizes. Go to Tekla Warehouse to get auto attribute files for your project. For more information on the structure of the auto attribute files, see Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Customize attribute files, part mapping and user-defined attributes (UDAs) (page 436).



Option



Description



Use custom component Select Yes to create the coupler as a custom part. Select No to create the coupler as a normal part. Name



Type the name of the custom component, or select it from the Applications & components catalog. Ensure that the selected component is a custom part.



Attribute



Type the name of the attribute file of the custom component. The coupler custom part is created using the saved attributes given here.



Input points



The order of the start and the end points of the custom component.



Option



Description



Numbering series



Prefix and a start number for the coupler part position number.



Attributes



Name, diameter, material, finish and class of the coupler parts.



Reinforcement



424



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Description The overall end-to-end length of the coupler. If you use a custom part, this is the length between the start point and the end point of the custom part. This is also the maximum gap between the bar ends. If the gap is bigger than the length of the coupler, the coupler cannot be inserted.



When you create the couplers as custom parts, the properties in the Numbering series and Attributes sections can be filled from the custom part settings if you have named the properties in a certain way. For an example, see Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Customize attribute files, part mapping and user-defined attributes (UDAs) (page 436).



Rebar coupler: Attributes tab



Use the Attributes tab to define the user-defined attributes (UDAs) in Rebar coupler. Option Threaded length



Description The value is written to the reinforcing bar UDA. The fields are used for checking which bars have threads and what are the thread values so that they can be shown in drawings and reports.



Extra fabrication length



This value is written to the reinforcing bar UDA.



Method



UDAs written to the reinforcing bars.



Type



You can set the reinforcing bar end method and the coupler type, and add a product name and a code for reporting purposes.



Product Code



This value does not affect the length of the reinforcing bar. You need to add this value in your drawings and reports to get the correct length if required.



The used attribute name depends on which end of the reinforcing bar the coupler was created to.



NOTE The above user-defined attributes affect numbering. Reinforcing bars with different attribute values get different part marks.



Reinforcement



425



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Rebar end anchor



Rebar end anchor creates end anchors at the ends of reinforcing bars and bar groups. Rebar end anchor is a part of Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools. Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools is a set of four components that help to model and manage •



reinforcing bar couplers that connect two bars



•



end anchors that are devices at the unreserved end of the bar.



The following components are part of Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: •



Rebar coupler (page 422)



•



Rebar end anchor (page 425)



•



Split rebar and add coupler (page 429)



•



Rebar end trimming (page 433)



In addition, you can manage the user-defined attributes (UDAs) of the Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools with the Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Update rebar attributes (page 435) component. Objects created •



Round parts The parts are attached to the end of a reinforcing bar group.



Use for Situation



Description Reinforcing bars with end anchors.



Selection order 1.



Select the reinforcing bar or bar group.



2.



Pick any point close to the bar end where you want to create the end anchors.



Reinforcement



426



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



All end anchors are automatically added to the parent part of the reinforcing bar. This allows them to be shown in reports and drawings because they are added to the sub-assembly of the cast unit. Two report templates Rebar Extra Fabrication Length.rpt and Rebar Thread Length.rpt can be used to inquire Threaded Length and Extra Fab. Length of the reinforcing bars in the BOMs or BOQs. See also Rebar end anchor: Parameters tab (page 427) Rebar end anchor: Attributes tab (page 428) Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Customize attribute files, part mapping and user-defined attributes (UDAs) (page 436)



Rebar end anchor: Parameters tab



Use the Parameters tab to define the end anchor properties in Rebar end anchor. Option



Description



Use manually entered values



Enter values for the end anchor properties.



Use auto attribute file



The values in the auto attribute file override the end anchor component values. Typically the auto attributes file contains one or more attribute values to be used with certain bar sizes. Go to Tekla Warehouse to get auto attribute files for your project. For more information on the structure of the auto attribute files, see Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Customize attribute files, part mapping and user-defined attributes (UDAs) (page 436).



Option Use custom component



Description Select Yes to create the end anchor as a custom part. Select No to create the end anchor as a normal part.



Name



Type the name of the custom component, or select it from the Applications & components catalog. Ensure that the selected component is a custom part.



Reinforcement



427



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option Attribute



Description Type the name of the attribute file of the custom component. The end anchor custom part is created using the saved attributes given here.



Input points



The order of the start and the end points of the custom component.



Option



Description



Numbering series



Prefix and a start number for the end anchor part position number.



Attributes



Name, diameter, material, finish and class of the end anchor parts. The dimensions of the end anchor. If you use a custom part, define the length between the start point and the end point of the custom part using these values. The offset of the far most point of the coupler measured from the physical end of the reinforcing bar. Note that you cannot control the end of the reinforcing bar with this component. You need to make sure the end concrete cover of the reinforcing bar is greater or equal to this offset plus the minimum concrete cover.



When you create the end anchors as custom parts, the properties in the Numbering series and Attributes sections can be filled from the custom part settings if you have named the properties in a certain way. For an example, see Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Customize attribute files, part mapping and user-defined attributes (UDAs) (page 436).



Rebar end anchor: Attributes tab



Use the Attributes tab to define the user-defined attributes (UDAs) in Rebar end anchor. Option Threaded length



Description The value is written to the reinforcing bar UDA. The fields are used for checking which bars have threads and what are the thread values so that they can be shown in drawings and reports.



Reinforcement



428



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option Extra fabrication length



Description This value is written to the reinforcing bar UDA. This value does not affect the length of the reinforcing bar. You need to add this value in your drawings and reports to get the correct length if required.



Method



UDAs written to the reinforcing bars.



Type



You can set the reinforcing bar end method and the coupler type, and add a product name and a code for reporting purposes.



Product Code



The used attribute name depends on which end of the reinforcing bar the coupler was created to.



NOTE The above user-defined attributes affect numbering. Reinforcing bars with different attribute values get different part marks.



Split rebar and add coupler



Split rebar and add coupler splits a reinforcing bar group and adds couplers in relation to the direction of the picked points. Split rebar and add coupler is a part of Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools. Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools is a set of four components that help to model and manage •



reinforcing bar couplers that connect two bars



•



end anchors that are devices at the unreserved end of the bar.



The following components are part of Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: •



Rebar coupler (page 422)



•



Rebar end anchor (page 425)



•



Split rebar and add coupler (page 429)



•



Rebar end trimming (page 433)



In addition, you can manage the user-defined attributes (UDAs) of the Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools with the Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Update rebar attributes (page 435) component. Objects created •



Round parts The parts are connected between two reinforcing bar groups.



Reinforcement



429



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Use for Situation



Description Staggered couplers with split reinforcing bars.



Selection order 1.



Double-click Split rebar and add coupler to open the component properties.



2.



Click Split rebar with coupler.



3.



Select the reinforcing bar or bar group to be split.



4.



Pick the first split point.



5.



Pick the second split point. This point defines the line at which the reinforcing bar or bar group is split and couplers are inserted.



6.



Pick the third point. This point defines the side of the main reinforcing bar or bar group. This is needed if you have applied different properties for the first bar or group and the second bar or group.



7.



Repeat the steps 3 - 6, or press Esc to cancel picking.



All couplers are automatically added to the parent part of the reinforcing bar. This allows them to be shown in reports and drawings because they are added to the sub-assembly of the cast unit. In some cases the reinforcing bars can move outside of the concrete. This may happen with reinforcing bars that are modeled with two points (straight bars and straight bars with hooks). If the reinforcing bars move outside of the concrete, change the cover thickness to either a negative or a positive value depending on what is required. Two report templates Rebar Extra Fabrication Length.rpt and Rebar Thread Length.rpt can be used to inquire Threaded Length and Extra Fab. Length of the reinforcing bars in the BOMs or BOQs. See also Split rebar and add coupler: Parameters tab (page 431) Split rebar and add coupler: Attributes tab (page 433)



Reinforcement



430



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Customize attribute files, part mapping and user-defined attributes (UDAs) (page 436)



Split rebar and add coupler: Parameters tab



Use the Parameters tab to define the coupler properties in Split rebar and add coupler. Option



Description



Use manually entered values



Enter values for the coupler properties.



Use auto attribute file



The values in the auto attribute file override the coupler component values. Typically the auto attributes file contains one or more attribute values to be used with certain bar sizes. Go to Tekla Warehouse to get auto attribute files for your project. For more information on the structure of the auto attribute files, see Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Customize attribute files, part mapping and user-defined attributes (UDAs) (page 436).



Option Use custom component



Description Select Yes to create the coupler as a custom part. Select No to create the coupler as a normal part.



Name



Type the name of the custom component, or select it from the Applications & components catalog. Ensure that the selected component is a custom part.



Attribute



Type the name of the attribute file of the custom component. The coupler custom part is created using the saved attributes given here.



Input points



The order of the start and the end points of the custom component.



Option Numbering series



Reinforcement



Description Prefix and a start number for the coupler part position number.



431



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Description



Attributes



Name, diameter, material, finish and class of the coupler parts.



Staggered type



•



None Couplers are placed along the two picked points.



•



Left Couplers are placed to the left side of the two picked points.



•



Right Couplers are placed to the right side of the two picked points.



•



Middle Couplers are placed on both sides of the two picked points.



The overall end-to-end length of the coupler. If you use a custom part, this is the length between the start point and end the point of the custom part. This is also the maximum gap between the bar ends. If the gap is bigger than the length of the coupler, the coupler cannot be inserted. Coupler position



Location of the couplers in relation to the selected split line. If you select the Left or the Right option, the actual left or right depends on the third input point which defines the side of the first bar. This option is available only when there is no staggering. Example:



Reinforcement



432



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Description



When you create the couplers as custom parts, the properties in the Numbering series and Attributes sections can be filled from the custom part settings if you have named the properties in a certain way. For an example, see Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Customize attribute files, part mapping and user-defined attributes (UDAs) (page 436).



Split rebar and add coupler: Attributes tab



Use the Attributes tab to define the user-defined attributes (UDAs) in Split rebar and add coupler. Option Threaded length



Description The value is written to the reinforcing bar UDA. The fields are used for checking which bars have threads and what are the thread values so that they can be shown in drawings and reports.



Extra fabrication length



This value is written to the reinforcing bar UDA. This value does not affect the length of the reinforcing bar. You need to add this value in your drawings and reports to get the correct length if required.



Method



UDAs written to the reinforcing bars.



Type



You can set the reinforcing bar end method and the coupler type, and add a product name and a code for reporting purposes.



Product Code



The used attribute name depends on which end of the reinforcing bar the coupler was created to.



NOTE The above user-defined attributes affect numbering. Reinforcing bars with different attribute values get different part marks.



Reinforcement



433



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Rebar end trimming



Rebar end trimming adjusts the space between two reinforcing bar ends. Rebar end trimming is a part of Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools. Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools is a set of four components that help to model and manage •



reinforcing bar couplers that connect two bars



•



end anchors that are devices at the unreserved end of the bar.



The following components are part of Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: •



Rebar coupler (page 422)



•



Rebar end anchor (page 425)



•



Split rebar and add coupler (page 429)



•



Rebar end trimming (page 433)



In addition, you can manage the user-defined attributes (UDAs) of the Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools with the Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Update rebar attributes (page 435) component. Use for Situation



Description Space between reinforcing bar ends.



Selection order 1.



Select the couplers you want to modify.



2.



Modify the properties.



3.



Click Apply to selected couplers.



OR 1.



Modify the properties.



2.



Click Select rebars.



3.



Select the reinforcing bars whose ends are adjusted according to the value set for the gap.



See also Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Customize attribute files, part mapping and user-defined attributes (UDAs) (page 436)



Reinforcement



434



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Rebar end trimming: Adjusting reinforcing bar ends Option Get free gap from auto attributes file



Description Select Yes if you want to use the gap defined in the Auto attribute file for the couplers. When you select Yes, only the coupler components that have the Use auto attribute file in use are adjusted. See Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Customize attribute files, part mapping and user-defined attributes (UDAs) (page 436). Select No if you want to manually enter the free gap. The gap when Get free gap from auto attributes file is set to No.



Trim both bars



Select which of the reinforcing bars is modified.



Apply to selected couplers



Select the couplers you want to modify and click the Apply to selected couplers button to adjust the bars according to the value set for the gap.



Select rebars



Click the Select rebars button and select the reinforcing bars whose ends you want to adjust according to the value set for the gap. The reinforcing bar ends need to be close to each other.



Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Update rebar attributes



Use Update rebar attributes to manage the user-defined attributes (UDAs) of the couplers and the end anchor parts created by the Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools. With Update rebar attributes you can check the current values of the selected reinforcing bars or all reinforcing bars. Update rebar attributes is a part of Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools. Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools is a set of four components that help to model and manage •



reinforcing bar couplers that connect two bars



•



end anchors that are devices at the unreserved end of the bar.



The following components are part of Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: •



Rebar coupler (page 422)



Reinforcement



435



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



•



Rebar end anchor (page 425)



•



Split rebar and add coupler (page 429)



•



Rebar end trimming (page 433)



If you have added coupler or end anchor components to reinforcing bars, the UDA values are controlled by the coupler or the end anchor components and their properties. If you delete the coupler or the end anchor component, the UDAs defined by those components are not cleared automatically. Use Update rebar attributes to clear the obsolete attribute values. Option



Description



Selected



The values of all coupler and end anchor UDAs of the selected reinforcing bars in the model.



All



The values of all coupler and end anchor UDAs of all reinforcing bars in the model.



Update



Deletes the values of all coupler and end anchor UDAs of all reinforcing bars on the selected rows. Only the obsolete coupler UDAs of the reinforcing bar are deleted. You can select multiple rows by holding down Ctrl or Shift.



Show only rebar with attributes



Select this check box if you want to show only reinforcing bars that have values in their coupler or end anchor UDAs. After you have selected the check box, click Selected or All to refresh the table.



See also Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Customize attribute files, part mapping and user-defined attributes (UDAs) (page 436)



Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Customize attribute files, part mapping and user-defined attributes (UDAs) Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools is a set of four components that help to model and manage •



reinforcing bar couplers that connect two bars



•



end anchors that are devices at the unreserved end of the bar.



The following components are part of Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: •



Rebar coupler (page 422)



Reinforcement



436



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



•



Rebar end anchor (page 425)



•



Split rebar and add coupler (page 429)



•



Rebar end trimming (page 433)



In addition, you can manage the user-defined attributes (UDAs) of the Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools with the Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Update rebar attributes (page 435) component. Auto attribute files The attribute table files are text files that can locate in any of the system folders, or in a model folder. You can have as many attribute table files as you need. There are different attribute tables for end anchors (one input reinforcing bar) and coupler components (two input reinforcing bars). The extensions for attribute table files are •



.couplers.csv for Rebar coupler and Split rebar and add coupler components



•



.anchors.csv for Rebar end anchor component.



The attribute table contains a header line, including the column names and one or more table rows containing the attribute values. Columns are either selector columns or attribute columns. The selector column names are Primary.Size, Primary.Grade, Secondary.Size, and Secondary.Grade. The attribute columns contain the attribute value that is the name given in the header row. The component attribute values given in the table row are used whenever the component input (primary + secondary for Rebar coupler and secondary for Rebar end anchor) matches with the selector values. Go to Tekla Warehouse to get auto attribute files for your project. Custom part mapping When you create the coupler or the end anchors as custom parts, the properties in the Numbering series and Attributes sections can be filled from the custom part settings if you have named the properties in a certain way. The following example shows the mapping between the Numbering series and Attributes properties and the custom part properties.



Reinforcement



437



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



User-defined attributes (UDAs) You can customize the content of the Attributes tab and the UDAs in the Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools components. The UDAs are defined in a text file named RebarCoupler.Udas.dat, located in the ...\ProgramData\Tekla Structures\\Environments \Common\system folder. The file can also be placed in some other system folder or in a firm folder. Note that the file is not read from the model folder. The RebarCoupler.Udas.dat file only defines which UDAs are shown on the Attributes tab. If you modify the file, include only existing UDAs to the file. If you want to create new UDAs, ensure that you define them properly. NOTE The UDAs affect numbering if the UDAs' special numbering flag (special_flag) is set to yes in the objects_couplers.inp file. Reinforcing bars with different UDA values will then get different part marks.



Slab bars (18) NOTE Alternatively, you can use the Mesh Bars and the Mesh Bars by Area components to create reinforcement to concrete slabs or walls. See Mesh Bars (page 408) and Mesh Bars by Area (page 414).



Creates reinforcement for a concrete slab. Bars created •



Primary slab bars



•



Crossing slab bars



Reinforcement



438



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Use for Situation



More information Slab bars (18) creates reinforcement for the bottom or top surface of the slab, or for both. See Slab reinforcement properties (page 440).



Before you start •



Create the concrete slab.



•



Calculate the required area of reinforcement.



Defining properties Use the following tabs in the Slab bars (18) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab



Contents



See also



Picture



Concrete cover thickness, which bars to create (bottom/top/both), primary bar direction, which sides are regarded as top and bottom sides



Bottom bars



Grade, size, spacing, and Slab reinforcement generation type of bottom properties (page 440) bars, concrete cover thickness on slab sides, crossing bar location in relation to primary bars, end hooks and bend lengths



Top bars



Grade, size, spacing, and generation type of top bars, Reinforcement



439



Slab reinforcement properties (page 440)



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Tab



Contents concrete cover thickness on slab sides, crossing bar location in relation to primary bars, end hooks and bend lengths



Attributes



See also



Numbering properties, name, and class of bars



Picking order 1.



Concrete slab



Slab reinforcement properties Tekla Structures creates slab reinforcement using the properties in the Slab bars (18) dialog box: Field Create bars



Primary bar direction



Up direction



Description Defines on which surface(s) to create bars. The options are: •



Both sides



•



Bottom side



•



Top side



The direction of primary bars. Use to change bar direction. The options are: •



Use slab x direction



•



Use slab y direction



•



Use global x direction



•



Use global y direction



Defines which sides are regarded as the top and bottom sides of the slab.



Bar generation Defines whether Tekla Structures treats the bars type as a group or a mesh. Cross bar location



Defines whether the crossing bars are located above or below the primary bars.



End conditions The hook angles at bar ends. The options are Straight, 90, 135, and 180 degrees. Bend lengths



The bend lengths at bar ends.



Reinforcement



440



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Slab Reinforcement Tool



Slab Reinforcement Tool creates reinforcement to irregularly shaped concrete slabs. The reinforcement is created as reinforcing bar groups. It is also possible to splice the reinforcing bars. Objects created •



Reinforcement



Use for Situation



Description Slab with reinforcement



Before you start Create a slab. Selection order 1.



Select the main part (slab).



2.



Pick points to define the direction of the reinforcing bars.



3.



If the area to be reinforced is set to By polygon, pick the polygon points to define the reinforced area.



See also Slab Reinforcement Tool: Parameters tab (page 441) Slab Reinforcement Tool: Advanced tab (page 443)



Slab Reinforcement Tool: Parameters tab



Use the Parameters tab to control the reinforcement properties, cover thickness, and reinforcing bar spacing and area in the Slab Reinforcement Tool modeling tool.



Reinforcement



441



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Reinforcing bars Option



Description



Prefix



Define a prefix for the part position number.



Start number



Define a start number for the part position number.



Name



Define the name for the reinforcing bars. Tekla Structures uses the name in drawing and reports.



Size



Define the diameter of the reinforcing bar.



Grade



Define the strength of the steel used in the reinforcing bars.



Class



Use the Class to group reinforcement. For example, you can display reinforcement of different classes in different colors.



Cover thickness Option



Description



Cover thickness



Define the concrete cover thickness on the different sides of the slab.



Depth



Define the concrete cover, either from the top or from the bottom of the slab.



Depth value



Define the depth value for concrete cover thickness.



Spacing and area Option



Description



Spacing Method



Define the reinforcing bar spacing method.



Number of Bars



Define the number of reinforcing bars in a reinforcement.



Spacing



Define the space between the reinforcing bars.



Adjustment



Define how the reinforcing bars are placed in the slab. The placing is based on the slab width and the cover thickness at sides.



Reinforcement



•



Target spacing: The reinforcing bars are placed at even spacing.



•



Exact spacing cover at left/right side: The reinforcing bars are placed starting from the left/ right side.



•



Exact spacing centered both covers: The reinforcing bars are centered and at equal distance from the sides.



442



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option Area to be Reinforced



Description Define the area to be reinforced in the slab. •



By part perimeter: The reinforcing bars are created in the whole area of the slab.



•



By polygon: The reinforcing bars are created to a picked polygon shaped area in the slab.



Slab Reinforcement Tool: Advanced tab



Use the Advanced tab to control the reinforcing bar end hooks, splicing, and opening properties in Slab Reinforcement Tool modeling tool. Bar Ends Option



Description



Start/End



Define the type of the hooks to be used at the reinforcing bar ends. If you select Custom Hook, you can define a custom hook’s Angle, Radius and Length.



Angle



Define the hook angle by entering a value between –180 and +180 degrees.



Radius



Define the internal bending radius of the hook.



Length



Define the length of the straight part of the hook.



Splicing Option



Description



Splice Bars



Define whether the reinforcing bars are spliced or not.



Maximum Length of Bar



Define the maximum reinforcing bar length after which the bars are spliced.



Splicing in Same Cross Section



Define how many reinforcing bars can be spliced in the same location.



Reinforcement



•



1/1 = all reinforcing bars are spliced in the same cross section.



•



1/2 = every second reinforcing bar is spliced in the same cross section.



•



1/3 = every third reinforcing bar is spliced in the same cross section.



443



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option • Splicing Symmetry



Splicing Offset



Description 1/4 = every fourth reinforcing bar is spliced in the same cross section.



Define the symmetry that is applied when the reinforcing bars are spliced. •



Not Symmetrical: The splice pattern of the reinforcing bar is not symmetrical and the uneven length is only at one side.



•



Symmetrical with different lengths at sides: The splice pattern of the reinforcing bar is symmetrical with uneven lengths at the sides.



•



Symmetrical with different length at center: The splice pattern of the reinforcing bar is symmetrical with uneven length in the center.



Define the offset of the splice center point from the point where the reinforcing bars originally met.



Minimum splitting distance Define the minimum longitudinal distance between two splices in consecutive bars. Splicing Type



Define the type of the splice.



Lapping Length



Define the length of the lapping connection.



Openings Option



Description



Cut Bars at Opening



Define whether reinforcing bars are cut in slab openings.



Cover thickness for openings



Define the concrete cover thickness on the sides of the openings.



Minimum Size of Large Opening



Define the minimum size of an opening that is considered to be large. This field is available if you set Cut Bars at Opening to At Large Opening Only.



Beam reinforcement (63) Creates reinforcement for a concrete beam. Bars created •



Longitudinal main bars



Reinforcement



444



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



•



Corner and side bars



•



Main stirrups



•



Stirrups for one or two ledges



Use for Situation



More information Rectangular beams



L-shaped beams (RCL profiles)



RCX profiles



Inverted T-beams (RCDL profiles)



Reinforcement



445



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Before you start •



Create the concrete beam.



•



Calculate the required area of reinforcement.



Defining properties Use the following tabs in the Beam reinforcement (63) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab



Contents



See also



Parameters Concrete cover thickness, number, size, and location of bars, stirrup size, option to place main bars only inside the main stirrups or distributed to the ledges



Beam reinforcement (63): Beam reinforcement properties (page 446)



Stirrup spacing



Distances from the part ends to the first stirrups, number of spaces and spacing of main and ledge stirrups in five zones along the length of the part, option to create different stirrups in two ledges, ledge stirrup spacing method



Beam reinforcement (63): Stirrup spacing tab (page 447)



Advanced



Grade, name, class, and numbering properties of the bottom, top, and side bars, and main and ledge stirrups



Picking order 1.



Concrete beam



Reinforcement



446



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Beam reinforcement (63): Beam reinforcement properties Use the following fields on the Parameters tab in the Beam reinforcement (63) dialog box to define the beam reinforcement properties:



Description 1



Main stirrup size



2



Size of corner bars



3



Ledge stirrup size



4



Number of bars



5



Size of bars



Beam reinforcement (63): Stirrup spacing tab



Use the Stirrup spacing tab in the Beam reinforcement (63) dialog box to define the spacing of the beam stirrups. Additional stirrup spacing type Defines how the ledge stirrups are distributed along the length of the beam. The options are:



Reinforcement



447



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Description



Target



Tekla Structures creates equal spaces between the bars, aiming the spacing value as closely as possible to the value you specify. This is the default option.



Exact



The first and last space of a zone adjust themselves to even out bar distribution. The spaces in the middle of each zone are exactly the size you specify.



Double tee reinforcement (64) Creates prestressed strands and other reinforcement for a concrete double tee. Bars created •



Prestressed strands in double tee ribs



•



Stirrups in double tee ribs



•



Reinforcement mesh on the top surface of the double tee



Use for Situation Straight strands Different strand pattern and number of strands When you use different stirrup shapes and spacings Before you start •



Create the concrete double tee.



•



Calculate the required area of strands and other reinforcement.



Reinforcement



448



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Defining properties Use the following tabs in the Double tee reinforcement (64) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab



Contents



See also



Parameters Concrete cover thickness, size, number, and pattern of strands, stirrup size and type, size and spacing of longitudinal and crossing bars in the mesh Stirrup spacing



Distances from the part ends to the first stirrups, number of spaces and spacing of stirrups in five zones along the length of the part



Advanced



Grade, name, class, and numbering properties of the strands, stirrups, and mesh bars



Double tee reinforcement properties (page 449)



Picking order 1.



Concrete double tee



Double tee reinforcement properties Strand pattern Use the following options to define the strand pattern in double tee ribs: Grid



Staggered 1st Staggered 2nd



Stirrups Use the following options to define the stirrups and stirrup hooks in double tees:



Reinforcement



449



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Example



Closed



Open



Open with 90 degree hooks



Open with 135 degree hooks



Open with 180 degree hooks



Reinforcement



450



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Beam end reinforcement (79) Creates reinforcement for the end of a concrete beam or strip footing. Bars created •



Horizontal U-shaped bars (types 1 and 2)



•



Vertical U-shaped bars (types 3A and 3B)



•



Oblique bar (type 4)



•



Stirrups (types 5A and 5B)



Description 1



Horizontal U bars (type 2)



2



Horizontal U bars (type 1)



3



Oblique bar (type 4)



4



Vertical U bars (type 3A)



5



Stirrups (type 5A)



6



Vertical U bars (type 3B)



7



Stirrups (type 5B)



Use for Situation



More information



Standard beams



Use bars 3A and 5A for the beam end.



Dapped beams Beams with anchor bolt hole in the notched area Beams and strip footings that have a rectangular cross section Do not use for Parts that have irregular cross sections.



Reinforcement



451



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Before you start •



Create the concrete beam or strip footing.



•



Calculate the required area of reinforcement.



Defining properties Use the following tabs in the Beam end reinforcement (79) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab



Contents



Picture



Concrete cover thickness, distances from the concrete surface to the bars, angle of bar 4



Bars



Bar dimensions of each bar type, which bars to create, option to splice bars 3A and 3B



Groups



Number and spacing of bars in each group of bar types. If the spacing varies, enter each value individually.



See also



Beam end reinforcing bars (page 452)



In the Bar 4 list box, select Yes to create the bar. Attributes



Grade, size, class, and numbering properties of the bars



Picking order 1.



Select concrete beam or strip footing.



2.



Pick position.



Beam end reinforcing bars Horizontal U bars 1 and 2 (page 452) Vertical U bars 3A and 3B (page 453) Stirrups 5A and 5B (page 454)



Reinforcement



452



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Horizontal U bars 1 and 2 Use the following options to create bars in the lower area of the beam end, in the horizontal planes (bar type 1): Option



Description Two bars on each plane. One in the middle of the beam end, the other extending to the sides of the beam. One bar on each plane, extending to the sides of the beam.



One bar on each plane, in the middle of the beam end.



Two identical, overlapping bars on each plane.



To create bars in the upper area of the beam end, around a hole, enter dimensions for bar 2.



Vertical U bars 3A and 3B To create vertical U-shaped bars, enter dimensions for: •



Bar 3A: for the notched area of the beam.



•



Bar 3B: for the higher part of the beam.



Splicing bars 3 You can create vertical U bars (bar type 3) of two bars joined with a splice. To do this, use the following list box on the Bars tab:



Reinforcement



453



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



If you choose to splice bars, you can select the splice type: Option



Description



Lap up



Creates a lap splice above the horizontal center line of the beam end.



Lap down



Creates a lap splice below the horizontal center line of the beam end.



Lap both



Creates a lap splice centered to the horizontal center line of the beam end.



Coupler



Creates a coupler.



Weld joint



Creates a welded joint.



For lap splices, you can define the lap length L and whether the bars are on top of each other or parallel to each other. For all splice types, you can define the offset of the splice center point from the horizontal center line of the beam end.



Stirrups 5A and 5B To create stirrups for beam ends, enter dimensions for: •



Bar 5A: for the notched area of the beam.



•



Bar 5B: for the higher part of the beam.



Corbel reinforcement (81)



Corbel reinforcement (81) creates reinforcement for one or two corbels in a concrete column. The two corbels must have the same top level, thickness, and horizontal location. Objects created •



Main bars



•



Stirrups



•



Additional bars



Reinforcement



454



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Use for Situation



Description Two corbels, beveled and rounded, with the same top level, thickness, and horizontal location. Two additional bars crossing each other.



One straight corbel. One additional bar.



Limitations Do not use Corbel reinforcement (81) for two very different corbels. Before you start •



Create the concrete column and beam(s).



•



Create the corbel(s). Use Corbel connection (14) or a Seating connection to create the corbel(s).



Selection order 1.



Select the main part (concrete column).



2.



Select the secondary part(s) (one or more corbels).



3.



Click the middle mouse button to create the reinforcement.



Reinforcement



455



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



See also Corbel reinforcement (81): Main bars tab (page 456) Corbel reinforcement (81): Stirrups/Transverse Stirrups/Diagonal Stirrups tabs (page 457) Corbel reinforcement (81): Additional bars tab (page 458)



Corbel reinforcement (81): Main bars tab



Use the Main bars tab to control the main bar length, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing bar spacing, and reinforcing bar properties in Corbel reinforcement (81).



Description 1



Main bar length.



2



Distance from the concrete surface to the main bar. Option



Description



Grade



Strength of the steel used in the reinforcing bars.



Size



Diameter of the reinforcing bar.



Name



Define a name for the main bars. Tekla Structures uses the name in drawings and reports.



Class



Use Class to group reinforcement. For example, you can display reinforcement of different classes in different colors.



Prefix



Prefix for the part position number.



Reinforcement



456



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Description



Start number



Start number for the part position number. Option



Description



Concrete cover



Concrete cover thickness.



Number of bars



Number of bars in the reinforcement.



Bar spacing



Space between the reinforcing bars.



Corbel reinforcement (81): Stirrups/Transverse Stirrups/Diagonal Stirrups tabs



Use the Stirrups, Transverse Stirrups and Diagonal Stirrups tabs to control the stirrup creation, stirrup type, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing bar spacing, and reinforcing bar properties in the Corbel reinforcement (81) modeling tool. Stirrups Option



Description



Stirrup location



Define the distance from the concrete surface to the stirrups.



Number of bars



Define the number of bars in the reinforcement.



Bar spacing



Define the space between the reinforcing bars.



Name



Define a name for the stirrups. Tekla Structures uses the name in drawings and reports.



Size



Diameter of the reinforcing bar.



Stirrup type Option



Description The stirrup consists of a bent single reinforcing bar. Define the hook length. The default values (for the standard 90 degree stirrup hook) are read from the rebar_database.inp file. Select a suitable overlap position for this stirrup type.



Reinforcement



457



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Description The stirrup consist of two overlapping U bars that face each other. Define minimum and maximum overlapping length.



Concrete cover Option



Description



Thickness



Define the concrete cover thickness.



Grade



Strength of the steel used in the reinforcing bars.



Size



Diameter of the reinforcing bar.



Name



Define a name for the stirrups. Tekla Structures uses the name in drawings and reports.



Class



Use Class to group reinforcement. For example, you can display reinforcement of different classes in different colors.



Prefix



Prefix for the part position number.



Start number



Start number for the part position number.



Concrete cover



Define whether the concrete cover thickness is same on all sides.



Corbel reinforcement (81): Additional bars tab



Use the Additional bars tab to control the creation of additional bars in corbels, concrete cover thickness, and additional bar properties in the Corbel reinforcement (81) modeling tool. Additional bars Option



Description No additional bars.



One additional bar.



Reinforcement



458



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Description Two additional bars parallel to each other.



Two additional bars crossing each other.



Two pairs of additional bars crossing each other.



Option



Description



Concrete cover



Define the concrete cover thickness.



Grade



Strength of the steel used in the reinforcing bars.



Size



Diameter of the reinforcing bar.



Name



Define a name for the additional bars. Tekla Structures uses the name in drawings and reports.



Class



Use Class to group reinforcement. For example, you can display reinforcement of different classes in different colors.



Prefix



Prefix for the part position number.



Start number



Start number for the part position number.



Round column reinforcement (82)



Round column reinforcement (82) creates reinforcement for a concrete column that has a round cross section. Objects created •



Longitudinal main bars (6)



•



Stirrups



•



Column end reinforcement



Reinforcement



459



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Use for Situation



Description Round concrete column with main bars bent outside the column. Continuous spiral stirrup.



Round concrete column with straight main bars protruding from the column, or entirely inside the column. Separate stirrups. Top of the column is reinforced.



Limitations Do not use for rectangular columns. Selection order 1.



Select the main part (column). The component is created automatically when the part is selected.



Reinforcement



460



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Part identification key



Part 1



Main bars



2



Stirrups



3



Column end reinforcement



Reinforcement



461



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Main bars tab



Use the Main bars tab to control the length of the vertical and horizontal extensions of the main bars at the top and bottom of the column, the thickness of the concrete cover over stirrups, and the cranking of the main bars. Main bar properties Option



Description



Number of bars



Number of main bars.



Rotation



Rotation of main bars.



Grade



Strength of the steel used in the reinforcing bars.



Size



Diameter of the main bars.



Bending radius



Bending radius of the main bars.



Class



Use Class to group reinforcement. For example, you can display reinforcement of different classes in different colors.



Name



Name for the main bars. Tekla Structures uses the name in drawings and reports.



Prefix



Prefix for the part position number.



Start number



Start number for the part position number.



Cranking You can create cranked reinforcing bars at the top of the column. Enter the horizontal distance dimensions for the bars.



Stirrups tab



Use the Stirrups tab to control the thickness of the concrete cover over the stirrups at the top and bottom of the column, spacing and number of stirrups or laps in each stirrup group, stirrup types and stirrup shapes.



Reinforcement



462



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Stirrup dimensions



1.



Thickness of the concrete cover over the stirrups at the top and the bottom of the column. The default cover thickness is 50 mm. Group 1 is the top stirrup group, 5 is the bottom stirrup group. Group 3 is always created.



2.



Spacing of stirrups in each stirrup group.



3.



Number of stirrups in each stirrup group.



4.



Select how the stirrups are distributed. •



Exact space, flexible at ends: Tekla Structures uses exactly the spacing value you specify, and evens out the stirrup distribution at the column ends.



•



Target space: Tekla Structures creates the stirrups at even spacings and tries to use the spacing value you specify.



Stirrup types Option



Description Separate stirrups



Single, continuous spiral stirrup



Separate spiral stirrups



Reinforcement



463



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Description Single, continuous stirrup



Stirrup shape Select the shape of the stirrup from the list.



Stirrup overlap Select the angle or the length of stirrup overlap. The option is not active if you have created spiral stirrups.



The overlapping angle can be of maximum 180 degrees. The overlapping length can be in millimeters or inches.



Stirrup attributes tab



Use the Stirrup attributes tab to control the grade, size, class, name, and numbering properties of the stirrups. Stirrup properties Option



Description



Grade



Strength of the steel used in the reinforcing bars.



Size



Diameter of the stirrups.



Reinforcement



464



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option Name



Description Name for the stirrups. Tekla Structures uses the name in drawings and reports.



Class



Use the Class to group reinforcement. For example, you can display reinforcement of different classes in different colors.



Prefix



Prefix for the part position number.



Start number



Start number for the part position number.



Top tab



Use the Top tab to control the thickness of the concrete cover of the top reinforcement, the number of top bars, and their spacing and rotation. Column top reinforcement



1.



Define the concrete cover thickness.



2.



Define the length of the ultimate leg.



Column top reinforcement rotation Select how to rotate the reinforcement at the top of columns.



Column top reinforcement properties Option



Description



Number of bars



Number of top bars.



Grade



Strength of the steel used in the reinforcing bars.



Size



Diameter of the top bars.



Class



Use the Class to group reinforcement. For example, you can display reinforcement of different classes in different colors.



Reinforcement



465



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option Name



Description Name for the top bars. Tekla Structures uses the name in drawings and reports.



Prefix



Prefix for the part position number.



Start number



Start number for the part position number.



Bottom tab



Use the Bottom tab to control the thickness of the concrete cover of the bottom reinforcement, the number of bars, and their spacing and rotation. Column bottom reinforcement



1.



Define the concrete cover thickness.



2.



Define the length of the ultimate leg.



Column bottom reinforcement rotation Select how to rotate the reinforcement at the bottom of columns.



Column bottom reinforcement properties Option



Description



Number of bars



Number of bottom bars.



Grade



Strength of the steel used in the reinforcing bars.



Size



Diameter of the reinforcing bar.



Class



Use the Class to group reinforcement. For example, you can display reinforcement of different classes in different colors.



Name



Name for the bottom bars. Tekla Structures uses the name in drawings and reports.



Reinforcement



466



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Description



Prefix



Prefix for the part position number.



Start number



Start number for the part position number.



Advanced (main bars) tab



Use the Advanced (main bars) tab to control the main bar extensions separately for each bar in Round column reinforcement (82). In Bar index, enter the bar number for which to define the extension. Define the size, the distance from the column edge and the length of each extension. Select whether the main bars are tapered or moved according to the upper surface, if the top of the column is skewed.



Rectangular column reinforcement (83)



Rectangular column reinforcement (83) modeling tool creates reinforcement for a concrete column that has a rectangular cross section. Objects created •



Longitudinal main bars: corner bars (4), side bars



•



Stirrups



•



Intermediate links



•



Column end reinforcement



Reinforcement



467



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Use for Situation



Description Rectangular concrete column with corner bars and side bars bent outside the column. Side bars on long sides. Intermediate links tie side bars at every second stirrup.



Rectangular concrete column with straight corner and side bars entirely inside the column. End of column reinforced.



Limitations Do not use for round columns. Selection order 1.



Select the main part (column). The component is created automatically when the part is selected.



Reinforcement



468



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Part identification key



Part 1



Corner bars



2



Side bars



3



Stirrups



4



Intermediate links



See also Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Main bars tab (page 470) Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Bar ends tab (page 471)



Reinforcement



469



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Side bars tab (page 472) Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Stirrups tab (page 473) Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Intermediate links tab (page 475) Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Top / Bottom tab (page 477)



Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Main bars tab



Use the Main bars tab to control the corner bar properties, the symmetry options, rotation, and concrete cover thickness in the Rectangular column reinforcement (83) modeling tool. Basic corner bar properties Define the grade, size and bending radius of the corner bars. The active fields depend on the selected symmetry option. Option



Description



Grade



Define the strength of the steel used in the reinforcing bars.



Size



Define the diameter of the reinforcing bar.



Bending radius



Define the bending radius of the corner bars.



Define the concrete cover thickness. Symmetry options



Select the symmetry option. Using the symmetrical conditions you can define which of the corner bars have the same grade, size and bending radius properties. The corners bars that have same properties are symmetrical.



Reinforcement



470



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Rotation



In square columns, you can select the perpendicular sides of a column if the sides require different reinforcement. You can rotate all reinforcement in a square column by 90 degrees. Additional corner bar properties Option Class



Description Use the Class to group reinforcement. For example, you can display reinforcement of different classes in different colors.



Name



Define a name for the main bars. Tekla Structures uses the name in drawing and reports.



Prefix



Define a prefix for the part position number.



Start number



Define a start number for the part position number.



Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Bar ends tab



Use the Bar ends tab to control the length of vertical and horizontal extensions for the corner and side bars at the top and bottom of the column, and the cranking in the Rectangular column reinforcement (83) modeling tool. Bar creation Select whether the extensions of corner bars and side bars are created symmetrically on both sides of the column. If you select Not symmetrical, you can enter separate extension values for the opposite sides of the column. Vertical extension Define the length of the vertical extension outside the column for corner bars and side bars. The active fields depend on the Bar creation options: Symmetrical or Not symmetrical.



Reinforcement



471



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Horizontal extension Define the length of the horizontal extension for corner bars and side bars. The active fields depend on the Bar creation options: Symmetrical or Not symmetrical. Corner bar direction Select how to rotate the bent corner bars. Cranking You can create cranked reinforcing bars at the top of the column.



In the Corner bar direction option list, select to activate the cranking options. When you select this option, you can enter the horizontal distance dimensions for the cranked bars. To successfully create the cranked reinforcing bars, ensure that the bending radius is not too large. Define the distance from the column corner to the point where the cranking



starts



.



Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Side bars tab



Use the Side bars tab to control the number of side bars, their spacing and placing, symmetry options, and side bar properties in the Rectangular column reinforcement (83) modeling tool. Number of side bars Define the number and spacing of side bars. You can define two sets of side bars on each side of the column. You can define the side bars separately for each side of the column. The active fields depend on the selected symmetry option. Placing of side bars Select the horizontal and vertical placing for the side bars. Select whether the bars are placed starting from the corner or at equal spaces.



Reinforcement



472



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Distance between corner bars and side bars.



Distance between side bars.



Symmetry options



Select the symmetry option. Using the symmetrical conditions you can define which side bars are symmetrical, and which side bars use the same properties. Side bar properties Define the side bar properties for side bars 1 and side bars 2. Option



Description



Grade



Define the strength of the steel used in the reinforcing bars.



Size



Define the diameter of the reinforcing bar.



Bending radius



Define the bending radius of the side bars.



Class



Use the Class to group reinforcement. For example, you can display reinforcement of different classes in different colors.



Name



Define a name for the side bars. Tekla Structures uses the name in drawing and reports.



Prefix



Define a prefix for the part position number.



Start number



Define a start number for the part position number.



Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Stirrups tab



Use the Stirrups tab to control the stirrup properties in the Rectangular column reinforcement (83) modeling tool.



Reinforcement



473



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Stirrup dimensions



1.



Define the thickness of the concrete cover over the stirrups at the top and the bottom of the column. The default cover thickness is 50 mm. Group 1 is the top stirrup group, 5 is the bottom stirrup group. Group 3 is always created.



2.



Define the spacing of stirrups in each stirrup group.



3.



Define the number of stirrups in each stirrup group.



4.



Select how the stirrups are distributed.



5.



If you select the Distance list option, enter different spacing values for the groups.



6.



Define the cover thickness for each stirrup group.



Bar lapping at stirrup corners Select the how the bars lap at the stirrup corners. The options are 135-degree hooks at the bar end or 90-degree hooks at the bar end.



Create as one group Select whether all the stirrups are created as a single group. If you select Yes, all stirrup groups are created and they have the same properties as Group 3.



Reinforcement



474



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Ignore cuts If you have a recess or a hole in the column, you can select to ignore the cuts at the top and bottom of the column when stirrups are created. Stirrup properties Option



Description



Grade



Define the strength of the steel used in the reinforcing bars.



Size



Define the diameter of the reinforcing bar.



Name



Define a name for the stirrups. Tekla Structures uses the name in drawing and reports.



Class



Use the Class to group reinforcement. For example, you can display reinforcement of different classes in different colors.



Prefix



Define a prefix for the part position number.



Start number



Define a start number for the part position number.



Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Intermediate links tab



Use the Intermediate links tab to control the intermediate links in order to tie all side bars in the Rectangular column reinforcement (83) modeling tool. If you have rectangular columns that have very large cross sections, the side bars may be a far from the corners of the stirrups. You will need to create intermediate links to tie all side bars, and to prevent them from buckling when they are in compression. Intermediate links are created for each stirrup group. NOTE Intermediate links are created between Side bars 1 or Side bars 2 that are symmetrical. For Side bars 2 intermediate links are created only if no Side bars 1 are created. Properties of intermediate links Option



Description



Grade



Define the strength of the steel used in the reinforcing bars.



Size



Define the diameter of the reinforcing bar.



Name



Define a name for the stirrups. Tekla Structures uses the name in drawing and reports.



Reinforcement



475



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option Class



Description Use the Class to group reinforcement. For example, you can display reinforcement of different classes in different colors.



Prefix



Define a prefix for the part position number.



Start number



Define a start number for the part position number.



Spacing of intermediate links Spacing is the same as stirrup spacing. Spacing is double the stirrup spacing (intermediate links at every second stirrup). Same as above, but for alternate stirrups. No intermediate links are created.



Intermediate link type Select the type of the link.



Intermediate link pattern Select whether intermediate links go in one direction or in a crossing pattern.



Reinforcement



476



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Hook orientation Select the hook orientation for both sides. Closed stirrups as intermediate links Select whether to use closed stirrups as intermediate links. If you select Yes, select the type of the bar lapping at the stirrup corners. Zone without intermediate links Define the zone length where intermediate links are not created. In this zone the stirrups tie the side bars. The distance is measured from the stirrup corner. If you have selected the Yes option in Use closed stirrups always when possible, you can define the distance from the corner of the closed stirrup.



Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Top / Bottom tab



Use the Top and Bottom tabs to control the top and bottom reinforcement thickness of concrete cover, the number of bars and their spacing and rotation in the Rectangular column reinforcement (83) modeling tool. Number and spacing of top or bottom bars Define the number and spacing of the top or bottom bars. You can define the number of transverse bars in both cross directions.



Reinforcement



477



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Column top / bottom reinforcement



1.



Define the concrete cover thickness.



2.



Define the length of the ultimate leg.



Placing of top or bottom bars Select the horizontal and vertical placing for the top or bottom bars. Select whether the bars are placed starting from the corner or at equal spaces. Distance between corner bars and side bars.



Distance between side bars.



Rotation Select how to rotate the reinforcement at the top or bottom of columns. No rotation. Transverse bars are perpendicular to the longer side of the column. Rotation angle is 90 degrees. Transverse bars are parallel to the longer side of the column. Top and bottom reinforcement properties Option



Description



Grade



Define the strength of the steel used in the reinforcing bars.



Size



Define the diameter of the reinforcing bar.



Bending radius



Define the bending radius of the top or bottom bars.



Reinforcement



478



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option Class



Description Use the Class to group reinforcement. For example, you can display reinforcement of different classes in different colors.



Name



Define a name for the top or bottom bars. Tekla Structures uses the name in drawing and reports.



Prefix



Define a prefix for the part position number.



Start number



Define a start number for the part position number.



Hole reinforcement for slabs and walls (84) Creates a hole in a concrete slab or wall and reinforcement around the hole.



Bars created •



Straight bars along hole edges



•



Diagonal bars close to hole corners



•



U-shaped edge bars



Use for Situation



More information



Rectangular or round holes in concrete slabs and walls



Reinforcement



479



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Situation



More information Straight and edge bars only, no diagonal bars.



Diagonal and edge bars only, no straight bars.



Hole rotated from the direction of the slab. One diagonal bar at each corner.



Different number of bars on each side of the hole in the wall. No diagonal bars.



Before you start •



Create the concrete slab or wall.



•



Calculate the required area of reinforcement.



Reinforcement



480



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Defining properties Use the following tabs in the Hole reinforcement for slabs and walls (84) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab



Contents



Picture



See also



Shape of the hole (rectangular or round):



Hole dimensions, bar dimensions and location, concrete cover thickness Rotation angle of the hole:



Horizontal Which bars are closest to and vertical the surface of the bars concrete (vertical or horizontal), number, grade, size, numbering properties, name, and class of each bar group along the sides of the hole Edge bars



Spacing, grade, size, numbering properties, name, and class of bar group on each side



Diagonal bars



Number, grade, size, numbering properties, name, and class of bar group at each corner of the hole



The slab or wall direction defines the direction of the hole and which bars are to the left and right of, and above and below the hole.



Picking order 1.



Center of the hole



2.



Concrete slab or wall



Reinforcement



481



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Hole creation and reinforcement (85) Creates a hole in a concrete part and reinforcement around the hole. Bars created •



Straight bars at hole edges



•



Stirrups



•



Z-shaped bars



Use for Situation



More information Rectangular hole, stirrups on each side of the hole, no Zshaped bars.



Round hole, Z-shaped bars, no stirrups around the hole.



Concrete beams or columns Round or rectangular holes



Hole only. No additional reinforcement around it.



With or without Z-shaped bars or stirrups Do not use for Parts that have round or irregular cross sections. Before you start •



Create the concrete part.



•



Calculate the required area of reinforcement.



Reinforcement



482



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Defining properties Use the following tabs in the Hole creation and reinforcement (85) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab



Contents



See also



Picture



Hole shape, direction, and Reinforcement dimensions, bar around holes dimensions and location, (page 483) concrete cover thickness, angle of Z-shaped bars



Bars



The number, grade, size, name, class, and numbering properties of:



Stirrups



•



Straight bars above and below the hole



•



Z-shaped bars on the left and right side of the hole



Number, spacing, grade, size, name, class, and numbering properties of stirrups Additional stirrup settings Stirrups at holes (page 484)



Picking order 1.



Center of the hole



2.



Concrete part



Reinforcement around holes Use these options to create holes and additional reinforcement: Option



Description Creates a hole and additional reinforcement around it. Only creates a hole, no reinforcement.



Use these options to define the direction of holes:



Reinforcement



483



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Description Hole along the local y direction of the part. Hole along the local z direction of the part.



Use these options to define Z-shaped bars around round holes: Option



Description Concrete cover measured in the direction of the radius of the hole. Concrete cover measured from the corner of the bounding box around the hole.



Use these options to define the direction of Z-shaped bars: Option



Description



Stirrups at holes Use these options to define the stirrups around holes: Option



Description Single stirrups



Reinforcement



484



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Description Bundled stirrups



Hooks Option



Description 135-degree hooks



90-degree hooks



Braced girder (88)



Braced girder (88) creates braced girders in a precast concrete part, such as in a thin-shell slab or in a sandwich wall panel. The girders are cast into the concrete part and they also work as a part of the reinforcement and as a connector between the precast and cast-in-place concrete. Objects created The girders consist of the following parts: •



Bottom reinforcing bars (2)



•



Top reinforcing bar



•



Connecting reinforcing bars (2)



Instead of using reinforcing bars, you can use profiles from the profile catalog to create the braced girders. Use for Situation



Description Braced girders are created in the precast concrete slab.



Reinforcement



485



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Situation



Description Braced girders are created in the precast concrete sandwich panel.



Braced girders are created in a wide plate floor with an opening. Braced girders are created in a hollow wall.



Profile as a girder.



Reinforcement



486



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Selection order 1.



Select the concrete part. The girders are created automatically.



Part identification key



Part 1



Top reinforcing bar



2



Connecting reinforcing bar



3



Bottom reinforcing bar



See also Braced girder (88): Picture tab (page 487) Braced girder (88): Parts tab (page 490) Braced girder (88): Geometry tab (page 501) Braced girder (88): Double wall tab (page 503)



Braced girder (88): Picture tab



Use the Picture tab to control the shape and dimensions of reinforcing bars in Braced girder (88).



Reinforcement



487



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Reinforcing bar dimensions and shape



Description 1



Distance between the end of the top reinforcing bar and the part end.



2



Distance between the end of the connecting reinforcing bar and the part end.



3



Distance between the end of the bottom reinforcing bar and the part end.



4



Radius of the connecting reinforcing bar.



5



Distance between bendings.



Define the distance between the bottom reinforcing bars, and the distance between the top and bottom reinforcing bars.



Reinforcement



488



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Examples



Reinforcement



489



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Examples



Reinforcing bar properties Define the reinforcing bar properties for the top, bottom and the connecting reinforcing bars. Option



Description



Size



Size of the reinforcing bar.



Grade



Grade of the reinforcing bar.



Comment



A comment, name, and class for the reinforcing bar, and a prefix and a start number for the part position number.



Name Class Serie Start number Create



Select whether the reinforcing bar in question is created or not.



UDAs You can define UDAs.



Braced girder (88): Parts tab



Use the Parts tab to control the girder creation, positioning and number of girders in Braced girder (88).



Reinforcement



490



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Girder creation



Option



Description



Creation method



Select the type of the girders.



Profile



If you use a profile as a girder, select the profile from the profile catalog. In addition, define a prefix and a start number for the part position number, a material and a name.



Workplane orientation



Option Workplane position



Description Select the work plane position. Use the Position in plane, Rotation and Position in depth options to define the orientation of the girder on the work plane.



Girder position in z direction



Select how the girders are positioned in the z direction.



Reinforcement



491



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Examples



Geometry



Reinforcement



492



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option Multiple L factor



Description Define the accuracy for the rounding of the girder length. The default value is 1.0. With the default value, there are no decimals in the girder length.



Geometry



Select the geometry for the connecting reinforcing bars. Examples:



Reinforcement



493



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Description



Girder position in y direction



Select how the girders are positioned in the y direction.



Reinforcement



494



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Examples



Reinforcement



495



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Examples



Extra girders



Select whether additional girder groups are created. Examples For example, if you have selected this option:



Reinforcement



496



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Examples Extra girder groups is set to None: No additional girder groups are created between 2 existing braced girders.



Reinforcement



497



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Examples Extra girder groups is set to By number: Additional girder groups are created based on the entered number. Distances between the groups are equally divided.



Reinforcement



498



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Examples Extra girder groups is set to By distance: The number of additional girder groups is based on the defined distance. The distances between the girder groups are equally divided.



Girder group



Define whether additional girders are created from the existing girders. Number is the number of girders in the girder group. Distance list is the distance between the girders in the girder group. e = is the position of the girders from the reference line.



Reinforcement



499



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Description •



Girder group is positioned middle of the reference line.



•



Girder group is positioned on the right side of the reference line.



•



Girder group is positioned on the left side of the reference line.



Examples Existin g girders



Reinforcement



500



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Examples Additio nal girders



Braced girder (88): Geometry tab



Use the Geometry tab to control how openings and part length affect the girder creation in Braced girder (88). Option



Description



Create always girders



Select whether girders are always created. If you select Yes, girders are created even when the girder is placed fully outside the concrete part.



Reinforcement



501



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Description



Openings



Select whether girders are created in openings.



Length



Select how girders adapt to the part shape.



Minimum length



Define the minimum length of the girder.



Maximum length



Define the maximum length of the girder. The girder is split when the maximum length is reached. Examples of minimum length



No minimum length defined:



Reinforcement



502



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Examples of minimum length Defined minimum length (no girder created):



Braced girder (88): Double wall tab



Use the Double wall tab to select how a second concrete element affects the girders in Braced girder (88). Look up sec concrete element Select whether a second concrete element affects the creation of the girders. Define the class of the second wall in the Class box. Select the first wall, and if the second wall matches the defined class, a girder is created. You can also enter a series of classes. You can use this creation method in combination with the options defined for openings on the Geometry tab. The example below shows a hollow wall where inside and outside shells have different geometry. Examples A hollow core wall where inside and outside shells have different geometry. Look up second concrete element = No



Reinforcement



503



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Examples



A hollow core wall where inside and outside shells have different geometry. Look up second concrete element = Yes



Reinforcement



504



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Examples



Braced girder (89)



Braced girder (89) creates braced girders between selected points in a precast concrete part, such as in a thin-shell slab or in a sandwich wall panel. The girders are cast into the concrete part and they also work as a part of the reinforcement and as a connector between the precast and cast-in-place concrete. Objects created The girders consist of the following parts: •



Bottom reinforcing bars (2)



•



Top reinforcing bar



•



Connecting reinforcing bars (2)



Instead of using reinforcing bars, you can use profiles from the profile catalog to create the braced girders.



Reinforcement



505



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Use for Situation



Description Braced girders are created in the precast concrete slab.



Braced girders are created in the precast concrete sandwich panel.



Braced girders are created in a wide plate floor with an opening. Braced girders are created in a hollow wall.



Reinforcement



506



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Situation



Description Profile as a girder.



Selection order 1.



Select the concrete part.



2.



Pick the starting point of a girder.



3.



Pick the end point of a girder.



Part identification key



Part 1



Top reinforcing bar



2



Connecting reinforcing bar



3



Bottom reinforcing bar



See also Braced girder (89): Picture tab (page 507) Braced girder (89): Parts tab (page 510) Braced girder (89): Geometry tab (page 520) Braced girder (89): Double wall tab (page 522)



Reinforcement



507



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Braced girder (89): Picture tab



Use the Picture tab to control the shape and dimensions of reinforcement bars in Braced girder (89). Reinforcing bar dimensions and shape



Description 1



Distance between the end of the top reinforcing bar and the picked point.



2



Distance between the end of the connecting reinforcing bar and the picked point.



3



Distance between the end of the bottom reinforcing bar and the picked point.



4



Radius of the connecting reinforcing bar.



5



Distance between bendings.



Define the distance between the bottom reinforcing bars, and the distance between the top and bottom reinforcing bars.



Reinforcement



508



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Examples



Reinforcement



509



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Examples



Reinforcing bar properties Define the reinforcing bar properties for the top, bottom and the connecting reinforcing bars. Option



Description



Size



Size of the reinforcing bar.



Grade



Grade of the reinforcing bar.



Comment



A comment, name, and class for the reinforcing bar, and a prefix and a start number for the part position number.



Name Class Serie Start number Create



Select whether the reinforcing bar in question is created or not.



UDAs You can define UDAs.



Braced girder (89): Parts tab



Use the Parts tab to control the girder creation, positioning and number of girders in Braced girder (89).



Reinforcement



510



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Girder creation



Option



Description



Creation method



Select the type of the girders.



Profile



If you use a profile as a girder, select the profile from the profile catalog. In addition, define a prefix and a start number for the part position number, a material and a name.



Workplane orientation



Option Workplane position



Description Select the work plane position. Use the Position in plane, Rotation and Position in depth options to define the orientation of the girder on the work plane.



Girder position in z direction



Select how the girders are positioned in the z direction.



Reinforcement



511



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Example Braced girders are positioned to picked points. The braced girders are related to the top side of the part.



Geometry



Option Multiple L factor



Description Define the accuracy for the rounding of the girder length. The default value is 1.0. With the default value, there are no decimals in the girder length.



Geometry



Select the geometry for the connecting reinforcing bars. Examples:



Reinforcement



512



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Reinforcement



Description



513



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Girder position in y direction



Select how the girders are positioned in the y direction. Examples



Reinforcement



514



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Examples



Extra girders



Select whether additional girder groups are created. Examples For example, if you have selected this option:



Reinforcement



515



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Examples Extra girder groups is set to None: No additional girder groups are created between 2 existing braced girders.



Reinforcement



516



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Examples Extra girder groups is set to By number: Additional girder groups are created based on the entered number. Distances between the groups are equally divided.



Reinforcement



517



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Examples Extra girder groups is set to By distance: The number of additional girder groups is based on the defined distance. The distances between the girder groups are equally divided.



Girder group



Define whether additional girders are created from the existing girders. Number is the number of girders in the girder group. Distance list is the distance between the girders in the girder group. e = is the position of the girders from the reference line.



Reinforcement



518



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Description •



Girder group is positioned middle of the reference line.



•



Girder group is positioned on the right side of the reference line.



•



Girder group is positioned on the left side of the reference line.



Examples Existin g girders



Reinforcement



519



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Examples Additio nal girders



Braced girder (89): Geometry tab



Use the Geometry tab to control how openings and part length affect the girder creation in Braced girder (89). Option



Description



Create always girders



Select whether girders are always created. If you select Yes, girders are created even when the girder is placed fully outside the concrete part.



Reinforcement



520



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Description



Openings



Select whether girders are created in openings.



Length



Select how girders adapt to the part shape.



Minimum length



Define the minimum length of the girder.



Maximum length



Define the maximum length of the girder. The girder is split when the maximum length is reached. Examples of minimum length



No minimum length defined:



Reinforcement



521



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Examples of minimum length Defined minimum length (no girder created):



Braced girder (89): Double wall tab



Use the Double wall tab to select how a second concrete element affects the girders in Braced girder (89). Look up sec concrete element Select whether a second concrete element affects the creation of the girders. Define the class of the second wall in the Class box. Select the first wall, and if the second wall matches the defined class, a girder is created. You can also enter a series of classes. You can use this creation method in combination with the options defined for openings on the Geometry tab. The example below shows a hollow wall where inside and outside shells have different geometry. Examples A hollow core wall where inside and outside shells have different geometry. Look up second concrete element = No



Reinforcement



522



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Examples



A hollow core wall where inside and outside shells have different geometry. Look up second concrete element = Yes



Reinforcement



523



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Examples



Reinforcement mesh array in area (89) / Reinforcement mesh array (91)



Reinforcement mesh array in area (89) / Reinforcement mesh array (91) create reinforcement meshes for an entire concrete part, or for a defined polygonal area. Reinforcement mesh array (91) is suitable especially for precast panels and slabs. Objects created •



Reinforcement meshes



Reinforcement



524



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Use for Situation



Description Array of overlapping rectangular meshes.



Array of meshes in a polygonal area that you define. Meshes clipped to fit the defined area.



Before you start •



Create the concrete part.



•



Set the work plane parallel to the plane where you want to create the mesh array.



Selection order Component



Create reinforcement mesh



Reinforcem 1. ent mesh array in area (89) 2. Reinforcem 1. ent mesh array (91)



To attach the reinforcement mesh array: •



to the entire part, pick the starting point of the mesh



•



to a selected area, pick points to define the polygonal shape of the mesh



Click the middle mouse button to create the reinforcement mesh array. Select the part. The reinforcement mesh array is created automatically when the part is selected.



Picture tab



Use the Picture tab to define the mesh catalog type, cover thickness and location, mesh generation, cuts, and mesh area perimeter.



Reinforcement



525



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Mesh type Select the mesh catalog type from the mesh catalog. Cover thickness Define the mesh location and give values for Cover thickness on plane and Cover thickness from plane.



Define the cross bar location for top and bottom. Mesh generation Option



Description



Generation direction



To rotate the mesh generation direction around the alignment point, enter an angle.



Direction of bottom layer



Select Opposite of top layer to mirror the bottom layer.



Cut by father part cuts



Select Yes to cut the mesh with the cuts made in the father part.



Clipping outside



Select Yes to clip the meshes to fit the part or the selected area.



Mesh area perimeter



Select the outline which the mesh follows. The meshes in the examples below are created by picking the same points but with different mesh area perimeters.



Reinforcement



526



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Description Example: Polygon



Example: Part



Reinforcement



527



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Description Example: Polygon + Part



Hole cover thickness



Define the hole cover thickness.



Overlapping tab



On the Overlapping tab, define the minimum and maximum overlapping along the longitudinal and crossing direction, and set the mesh offset. Option



Description



Overlapping



Define the minimum and maximum overlap along the Long side and Short side of the mesh.



Mesh offset



Define how the meshes are placed.



Mesh start offset



Define mesh start offset for the first mesh. The length of the first mesh is divided by the selected value. For example, if you select the Mesh start offset to be 1/4, the length of the first mesh is divided by 1/4. If you select Specified, the Start length offset option becomes visible and you can enter the offset for the first mesh.



Attributes tab



On the Attributes tab, define the numbering properties, name, and class of the reinforcement meshes.



Reinforcement



528



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Wall panel reinforcement / Double wall edge and opening reinforcement



Wall Panel Reinforcement is used for detailing single precast wall panels. It includes the reinforcement for the panel edges, around the openings, a mesh for the whole panel and additional bars, for example, with a wall shoe connection. Double wall edge and opening reinforcement is used for detailing double walls by connecting two panels to each other. It includes the reinforcement for the panel edges and around the openings. Object created •



Reinforcement



•



Stirrups



•



Mesh (for single panels)



Use for Situation



Description Wall panel reinforcement with openings and reinforcement in the panel edges and around openings.



Reinforcement



529



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Situation



Description Double wall with opening and reinforcement around the opening. Ring reinforcement goes around both shells. All reinforcing bars that connect the shells (U-bars and stirrups) are attached to the shell that is selected at creation. Ring, beam and column reinforcing bars are attached to the selected shell that has been the input.



Selection order 1.



Select the concrete part to reinforce. The reinforcement is created automatically.



Picture tab



Use the Picture tab to select how the corners of a wall panel are reinforced. Option



Description



Corner Select how the corners are reinforcem reinforced and the bar is offset ent on both sides of the corner.



Minimum breaking distance



Cuts smaller than this value are ignored and the reinforcing bars are not cut.



Reinforcement



530



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Description



Rebar count



Creates a single layer of reinforcement.



Creates two layers of reinforcement.



Cover thickness



Distance from the edge of the wall panel to the side of the outermost bar.



Door minimal height



Cuts greater than this value are considered as door openings and the additional reinforcing bars that are needed, for example, in shoe connections are not created. This option is available in Wall panel reinforcement.



Create stirrups priority



Select whether horizontal or vertical reinforcing bars are on top.



Minimum The edge stirrups are not created if the dimension is less than edge length the defined minimum value.



Reinforcement tab



Use the Reinforcement tab to create the reinforcing bars around the wall panel edges.



Reinforcement



531



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Description



Wall panel edge reinforcem ent type



Creates normal reinforcement.



Creates U reinforcement.



Mesh



Select whether a mesh is created for the whole panel. If a mesh is created, you can define the mesh properties, or use custom settings. You can use the Mesh Bars component to create the mesh. This option is available in Wall panel reinforcement.



Create Select whether reinforcement is created at the edges. edge If you select Yes, define the horizontal and vertical reinforcing reinforcem bar properties. ent This option is available in Double wall edge and opening reinforcement. Horizontal Define the horizontal reinforcing bar properties for the wall reinforcing panel edges. bars Note that horizontal bars have three sets of properties, depending on the length of the bar. For example, if the length of the main bar is less than 3000, it uses the options on the left, if in between 3000 and 6000, the middle options and if greater than 6000, the options on the right.



Reinforcement



532



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Description



Vertical Define the vertical reinforcing bar properties for the wall panel reinforcing edges. bars Note that vertical bars have two sets of properties, depending on the length of the bar. U Define the U reinforcing bar properties. Reinforcem Each side of the wall panel has a separate set of U reinforcing ent bar properties.



Opening tab



Use the Opening tab to create the reinforcing bars around the wall panel opening. Option



Description



Opening Can be set for all four opening edges. reinforcem Creates normal ent type reinforcement.



Creates U reinforcement.



Horizontal Define the horizontal reinforcing bar properties. reinforcing Note that horizontal bars have separate sets of properties for bars the top and the bottom bars. Vertical Define the vertical reinforcing bar properties. reinforcing bars U Define the U reinforcing bar properties. Reinforcem Each side of the opening has a separate set of U reinforcing bar ent properties.



Reinforcement



533



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Diagonals tab



Use the Diagonals tab to create diagonal reinforcing bars at the corners of the openings. Option



Description



Create diagonals



Select whether diagonal reinforcing bars are created or not.



Diagonals count



Number of diagonal reinforcing bars.



Size



Select the diameter of a bar.



Grade



Define the strength of the steel used in the bars.



Bending radius



Define the bar bending radius.



L1 and L2



L1 + L2: Length of the diagonal reinforcing bars.



C



Distance between the diagonal reinforcing bar and the corner of the opening.



Column tab



Use the Column tab to a create column reinforcement. Option



Description



Column reinforcem ent



Column reinforcement is as high as the part.



Column reinforcement does not reach higher than the top edge of opening.



Column reinforcement is approximately the L value higher than opening edge.



Column reinforcement is approximately the L value lower than the opening edge.



Column Select whether column reinforcing bars are created or not. reinforcem Reinforcement



534



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option ent properties



•



Description Minimum column height H: cuts and openings smaller than the minimum value are not taken into account in the column creation.



•



Maximum column width B: if the width between two openings or cuts or edges is greater than the maximum value, then the column reinforcement is not created.



•



Column height offset L1: distance between the column reinforcement end and the opening edge.



•



Column height offset L2: same as L1 but for the bottom part of column reinforcement.



Main Define the main reinforcing bar properties. reinforcing Note that main bars have three sets of properties, depending bars on the width of the column. Stirrup type



Select the stirrup type.



Reinforcing Define the stirrup properties. stirrups Note that stirrups have three sets of properties, depending on the width of the column.



Beam tab



Use the Beam tab to create a beam reinforcement on top of the opening. Option Beam reinforcement properties



Top



Description Select whether beam reinforcing bars are created or not. •



Maximum beam height Hmax: distance from the top edge of the wall to the top edge of the opening. If the height is greater than the maximum, then the beam reinforcement is not created.



•



Minimum beam length Lmin: distance between the sides of the opening. If the width of the opening is less than the minimum, then the beam reinforcement is not created.



Define the beam top reinforcement properties. Note that the reinforcing bars have two sets of properties, depending on the length of the beam.



Bottom



Define the beam bottom reinforcement properties. Note that the reinforcing bars have two sets of properties, depending on the length of the beam.



Stirrup type



Reinforcement



Select the stirrup type.



535



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Description



Reinforcing stirrups Define the stirrup properties. Note that stirrups have two sets of properties, depending on the length of the beam.



Additional tab



Use the Additional tab to create additional horizontal and vertical reinforcing bars. This tab is available in Wall panel reinforcement. Option Additional reinforcing bars



Description Select whether additional reinforcing bars are created or not. Define the additional reinforcing bar properties.



Attributes tab



Use the Attributes tab to control the reinforcing bar properties of the created parts. Option



Description



Prefix



Define a prefix for the part position number.



Start number



Define a start number for the part position number.



Name



Define a name for the part. Tekla Structures uses the name in drawings and reports.



Class



Define the part class number.



Multiple Wire Size Mesh



Multiple Wire Size Mesh creates reinforcement meshes with multiple reinforcing bar sizes. The created reinforcement mesh is optimized for a mesh welding machine. Multiple Wire Size Mesh can be used for slabs and wall panels. The slabs and wall panels can be of any polygonal shape with any number of openings. The reinforcing bars in the mesh can be of different size, and the spacings between the bars can vary. Objects created •



Reinforcement meshes



Reinforcement



536



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Use for Situation



Description Three zones of longitudinal reinforcing bars



Before you start Create a polygon slab or a wall panel with any number of openings. Enter zone values to define the width of the area to be reinforced in both the longitudinal and crossing directions. Each direction can be divided up to five zones. Selection order 1.



Select the main part (slab or wall panel). The reinforcement mesh is created.



See also Multiple Wire Size Mesh: Mesh Parameters tab (page 537) Multiple Wire Size Mesh: Longitudinal/Crossing Wires tab (page 538) Multiple Wire Size Mesh: Attributes tab (page 539) Multiple Wire Size Mesh: Configuration file for reinforcing bar patterns (page 539)



Multiple Wire Size Mesh: Mesh Parameters tab



Use the Mesh Parameters tab to control the mesh creation and cover thickness in the Multiple Wire Size Mesh modeling tool. Option



Description Define the concrete cover thickness.



Create Rebars



Reinforcement



Define to which side of the slab or the wall panel the reinforcing bars are created.



537



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Description



Longitudinal Direction



Define whether the x or the y direction is used as the longitudinal direction when the reinforcing bars are created. By default, the x direction is the longitudinal direction.



Multiple Wire Size Mesh: Longitudinal/Crossing Wires tab



Use the Longitudinal Wires or the Crossing Wires tab to control the mesh creation in the longitudinal or the crossing direction, and the reinforcement zones in the Multiple Wire Size Mesh modeling tool. Option Wire sizes



Description Define the sizes of the reinforcing bars used in the pattern. Separate the sizes with a space.



Min overhang



Define the minimum length of the reinforcing bar extension.



Max overhang



Define the maximum length of the reinforcing bar extension.



Min spacing



Define the minimum space between the reinforcing bars. The value must be divisible by the grid size. For example, if the Min spacing is 150, Max spacing is 300 and the Grid size is 50, the spacings are 150, 200, 250 and 300.



Max spacing



Define the maximum space between the reinforcing bars. The value must be divisible by the grid size. For example, if the Min spacing is 150, Max spacing is 300 and the Grid size is 50, the spacings are 150, 200, 250 and 300



Grid size



Define the mesh grid size. For example, if the Min spacing is 150, Max spacing is 300 and the Grid size is 50, the spacings are 150, 200, 250 and 300. This value depends on the welding machine.



Min wire length



Define the minimum reinforcing bar length.



Min number of welding points



Define the minimum number of crossing reinforcing bar intersections.



Reinforcement



538



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Description



Pattern width to fulfill



Define the width of the pattern that is filled with the mesh. This value is used when the zone width is greater than the given value.



Zone width value type



Define the width of the area to be reinforced as a percentage of the whole slab or wall panel width, or as the actual length.



Width, Real width, Mesh area per length



Define the mesh width, real width and area per length in each zone.



Load pattern from file



Select the external text file where you have defined the patterns for longitudinal and crossing reinforcing bars. If you use the external patterns file, Multiple Wire Size Mesh tries to determine a pattern with a suitable area per length value for every zone and apply these values to the zones.



Multiple Wire Size Mesh: Attributes tab



Use the Attributes tab to control the reinforcement properties in the longitudinal and in the crossing directions in the Multiple Wire Size Mesh modeling tool. Option



Description



Prefix



Define a prefix for the part position number.



Start Number



Define a starting number for the part position number.



Grade



Define the strength of the steel used in the reinforcing bars.



Name



Define a name for the longitudinal and the crossing reinforcing bars. Tekla Structures uses the name in drawings and reports.



Class



Use Class to group the longitudinal and the crossing reinforcing bars. For example, you can display the longitudinal and the crossing reinforcing bars of different classes in different colors.



Reinforcement



539



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Multiple Wire Size Mesh: Configuration file for reinforcing bar patterns



Use an external text file to define the patterns for longitudinal and crossing reinforcing bars in the Multiple Wire Size Mesh modeling tool.



Every pattern starts from the Pattern line, followed by, for example, the pattern name. Each Bar Size and Spacing pair is on a separate row. The Bar Size and Spacing values are separated by a space. The file has the following format: < Pattern > < Name > …………………………… Examples Pattern 1 10 200 10 200 8 100 8 300 10 400 Pattern 2 10 200 10 200 8 100 8 100



Embedded anchors (8)



Embedded anchors (8) creates one or more embeds in a concrete part. Objects created •



Embeds



•



Thickening parts



•



Reinforcing bars



•



Hangup bars



•



Crane cables



Reinforcement



540



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Use for Situation



Description Two custom anchors.



Bolt anchors that are custom parts, hangup bars and crane cables.



Reinforcement



541



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Situation



Description Cast-in lifting anchors that are custom parts.



Cast-in wire rope lifting hoops that are custom parts. Adjusting anchors are in the front side. The component is applied two times.



Selection order 1.



Select a concrete part.



2.



Pick one point to position the embed. You can also select multiple points, depending on how the embeds are divided.



3.



Click the middle mouse button to create the embeds.



Reinforcement



542



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Part identification key



Part 1



Concrete part (wall, column, beam, slab)



2



Point You can select multiple points.



See also Embedded anchors (8): Input tab (page 544) Embedded anchors (8): Placement tab (page 548) Embedded anchors (8): Top placement tab (page 554) Embedded anchors (8): Thickening tab (page 555) Embedded anchors (8): Picture tab (page 560) Embedded anchors (8): Top part tab (page 564) Embedded anchors (8): Bottom part tab (page 566) Embedded anchors (8): Parts tab (page 567) Embedded anchors (8): Reinforcing bar tab (page 568) Embedded anchors (8): Hangup bars tab (page 570) Embedded anchors (8): Horizontal bar tab (page 573) Embedded anchors (8): Special bar tab (page 576)



Reinforcement



543



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Embedded anchors (8): Advanced tab (page 578)



Embedded anchors (8): Input tab



Use the Input tab to control the custom parts used for the embeds, the input points for placing the embeds and the component direction properties in the Embedded anchors (8). Input points sequence Select the distribution method for the embeds. You can also adjust the placement of embeds on the Placement tab. Option



Description Select a concrete part and pick one position point for the anchor.



Select a concrete part and pick multiple position points for the anchors.



Select a concrete part and pick three points to define the plane. Pick a point to place the embed.



Select a concrete part and pick three points to define the plane. Pick multiple points to place the embeds.



Up direction Define how the embeds are rotated.



Reinforcement



544



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



This option is not available if the three-point-plane option is selected from the Input points sequence list. You can use the global directions +X,-X,+Y,-Y,+Z,-Z. Alternatively, you can use the local directions +X,-X,+Y,-Y,+Z,-Z to define a specific face of a typical cube-shaped (slab, wall, beam of column) part. -X local:



+X global:



Embed handling



Reinforcement



545



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Select whether the embed is handled as a detail or as a modeling tool. In general, a detail uses the shape of the main part for positioning the embeds, and a modeling tool uses the picked points for positioning the embeds. Embed offset Define embed offsets in X- and/or Y-direction, from the picked position points.



Custom part Select a custom part from the Application and Components catalog to be used as embed. •



Define the name of the custom component to be used for the embeds. If the embeds are defined on the Picture tab, leave this box empty.



•



Define the name of the configuration file for the custom component.



•



Select whether the custom parts must be used for the embeds. If set to Not, define the embeds’ shape on the Picture tab. If set to Yes, define the connecting method. Use the Yes and subassembly option to add the embed as a subassembly to the main part.



•



Select how the embeds are rotated. The default direction is 2 point +x.



Reinforcement



546



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



•



Select how the embeds are rotated around a position point.



Positioning examples



Reinforcement



547



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Embedded anchors (8): Placement tab



Use the Placement tab to control the placing of the embeds, crane cable angles and safety factor properties and to select the lifting anchors in the Embedded anchors (8). You can define the input point sequence, lift system and embed dimensions both in reference line and cross section direction. Input points sequence Select the distribution method of the embeds. Use the a and b boxes on the right to enter the values. Option



Description Embed is placed on a selected position point. Embed is placed on a center of gravity (COG) point in the part length direction. Multiple embeds. Define dimensions a and b. Reference = COG



Reinforcement



548



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Description Define dimensions a and b. Reference = COG If embeds are likely to be placed outside the part, then value d is used. Define dimensions a and b as percentages of the part length. Reference = COG Define dimension a as a percentage of the part length. Reference = COG Define dimension a. The right embed is calculated from COG. Define dimension a as a percentage of the total part length. Reference = COG Embed is placed in the middle of the part.



Define dimensions a and b. Reference = middle of the part Define dimensions a and b as percentages of the part length. Reference = middle of the part Define dimensions a and b. The distances are from the embeds to the part ends. Define dimensions a and b as percentages of the part length. The distances are from the embeds to the part ends.



Reinforcement



549



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Description Three embeds in a triangular plate. Define the vertical distance a from COG. Three embeds in a triangular plate. Define the vertical distance a from COG as a percentage of the width b.



Lifting system



Select the crane cable lifting system. Dimensions



Boxes for defining embed dimensions a and b, crane cable angle alpha and crane cable height h. Additional embeds Define additional embeds. Use the boxes on the left and right to define distances. You can enter multiple distances. Use a space to separate the values. Use the middle box to define the number of additional embeds.



Reinforcement



550



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Mirroring



•



Define the COG (center of gravity) for the selected parts, an assembly, or an assembly without steel parts.



•



Select whether embeds are mirrored. Mirroring is useful for asymmetric custom part embeds. You can mirror both in reference line direction and cross section direction.



Reinforcement



551



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



•



Select whether both anchors are created, or only left or right anchor.



Lift.dat configuration file You can use a configuration file to calculate the lifting capacities of lifting anchors. Set Browse configuration file to Yes, and define the full path to the configuration file. The default file is lift.dat, located in the profil folder. The lift.dat configuration file contains a list of all custom lifting anchors belonging to the default Tekla Structures installation. The anchors are sorted based on fabricator and type, component name and lifting capacity. You can add more custom components to the list in the configuration file. The file can be opened in any text editor, for example Notepad.



•



Type Groups where lifting anchors can be selected.



Reinforcement



552



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



•



Type client Description of types.



•



Name CuCoPa Name of custom component part as listed in the Applications & components catalog.



•



Lift force (kg) Lifting capacity in kilograms.



•



Dir Direction. Component direction during creation of custom component part.



•



Attribute file Link to the configuration file.



The anchor type can be selected from the list. The first list option corresponds to the first type (1) in the lift.dat configuration file. The last list option is All types and use preference list. This option searches from all groups. A preference can be defined in the Preference type list. Start with the highest preference group and separate the groups with a space.



Several fabricators have lifting anchors with the same lifting capacity, but with different anchor lengths. Use the order in the configuration file to define which anchor is selected. First found anchor with correct capacity = 1, second found anchor = 2, and so on.



NOTE If you have selected to use a custom part, ensure that the corresponding custom parts are available in the model. Names of the custom parts should not contain spaces, because they are not read from the lift.dat configuration file. Safety factor Define the safety factor. The weight to be lifted up is multiplied with this factor in the anchor calculation.



Reinforcement



553



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Embedded anchors (8): Top placement tab



Use the Top placement tab to define the embed offsets and how the information message box and crane cables are shown in the Embedded anchors (8). Offset Define the embed offsets at both ends of the concrete part. An embed which is positioned exactly in the middle of the concrete part stays in that position and does not get an offset.



Reinforcement



554



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Show information message boxes Define whether a message box containing the embed calculation results is shown. The message box shows the weight to be lifted up, the real lift-up weight including a safety factor, and the selected anchor. The message box appears only if you have set Browse Configuration File to Yes on the Placement tab.



Show crane cables Define whether crane cables are shown. If set to Yes, crane cables are shown as construction lines or profiles with the alpha angle, defined on the Placement tab.



Reinforcement



555



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Embedded anchors (8): Thickening tab



Use the Thickening tab to define the thickening of the concrete layer in the Embedded anchors (8). The thickening is especially useful for sandwich walls where shells are thickened near lifting anchors. In the example below, a thickening is added with an extra insulation layer.



Thickening options Select the side where thickening is applied. You can also define the thickness. Option



Description No thickening.



Right side thickening. Thickness is defined from center of the embed.



Reinforcement



556



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Description Right side thickening. Thickness is defined from side of the embed.



Right side thickening. Thickness is defined from side of the shell.



Left side thickening. Thickness is defined from center of the embed.



Left side thickening. Thickness is defined from side of the embed.



Left side thickening. Thickness is defined from side of the shell.



Thickening on both sides. Thickness is defined from center of the embed.



Thickening on both sides. Thickness is defined from side of the embed.



Thickening on both sides. Thickness is defined from side of the shell.



Reinforcement



557



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Thickening width and height Select the thickening part reference, and define the thickening width and thickening height. Option



Description Width is defined from center of the embed. Height is defined from the top side of concrete.



Width is defined from center of the embed. Height is defined from the bottom side of concrete shell.



Width is defined from the side of concrete shell. Height is defined from the top side of concrete shell.



Width is defined from the side of concrete shell. Height is defined from the bottom side of embed.



Side view Option to combine multiple thickening parts into one if the distance between the thickenings is smaller than or equal to the defined value.



Reinforcement



558



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Thickening part Select how the thickening is connected to the shell. Define the thickening properties. Additional insulation Select how to add insulation to thickening part.



Reinforcement



559



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Description



Insulation classes



Define the class of the insulation which is used in the concrete shell. If the defined class number matches the class of the insulation in the model, then the insulation will be cut at the location of the thickening.



Foil classes



Define the class of the insulation which is used in the sandwich wall. If the defined class number matches the class of the insulation, then the insulation will be cut at the location of the thickening



Create extra insulation Select whether an additional insulation layer is created. Define the thickness of the insulation.



Additional options for the insulation part Option



Description



Extra insulation part



Select whether the insulation part is added, and how it is added.



To



Select the part to which the insulation part is added.



Reinforcement



560



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Embedded anchors (8): Picture tab



Use the Picture tab to control the embed dimensions, connection method and rotation in the Embedded anchors (8). Embed dimensions Define if the embed needs to be recessed. You can define the dimensions of the recess, distance from the recess plane to the top of the embed and select the shape of the cutout. Select the shape of the cutout. Option



Example



Circle



Square



Half moon x



Half moon y



Reinforcement



561



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



As negative volume Select whether cutout profiles are handled as empty cutouts or cutouts with a formwork part. Top part/Bottom part Set the part class and rotation. Each option rotates the embed 90 degrees counterclockwise. You can define also a fixed rotation angle. Positioning Select how to position the top and the bottom parts of the embed. Option



Reinforcement



Example



562



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Example



An example of an anchor that is positioned on top of the concrete part.



Reinforcement



563



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



How to connect top part to concrete element Select whether the top part of embed is created, and if set to Yes, select how the part is connected to concrete part. How to connect bottom part Select whether the bottom part of embed is created, and if set to Yes, select how the part is connected to the concrete part.



Embedded anchors (8): Top part tab



Use the Top part tab to define the top part of the embed in the Embedded anchors (8).



Reinforcement



564



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Top part dimensions Use the diameter and height boxes to define the shape of the top part of the embed. You can define the main diameters of parts 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 also on the Parts tab. Examples



Embed top part defined on the Top part tab, embed bottom part defined on the Bottom part tab.



Reinforcement



565



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Embedded anchors (8): Bottom part tab



Use the Bottom part tab to define the bottom part of the embed in the Embedded anchors (8). Bottom part dimensions Use the diameter and height boxes to define the shape of the bottom part of the embed. You can define the main diameters of parts 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 also on the Parts tab.



Reinforcement



566



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Embedded anchors (8): Parts tab



Use the Parts tab to define the embed top and bottom part properties and the formwork part properties in the Embedded anchors (8). Part properties Both the top and the bottom part are build from multiple profiles. You can define profiles for each section.



Reinforcement



567



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Define the part properties for the top, bottom and formwork part. If the profile properties are left empty, the lengths and diameters defined on the Top Part and Bottom Part tabs are used. Option



Description



t, b, h



Part thickness, width and height.



Pos_No



Prefix and a start number for the part position number.



Material



Material grade.



Name



Name for the part.



Class



Part class number.



Comment



Add a comment for the part.



You can define UDAs for the top and bottom parts.



Reinforcement



568



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Embedded anchors (8): Reinforcing bar tab



Use the Reinforcing bar tab to define additional reinforcing bars for the embeds in the Embedded anchors (8). You can define the reinforcing bar shape and hook properties, and the reinforcing bar profile properties in two directions. Example



Grade, Size The Grade and Size options work together. Open the reinforcing bar catalog to select a grade and a size for bar A and bar B.



End conditions left / right Select the shape of the reinforcing bar.



Reinforcement



569



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Bend lengths left / right, Bend radius Define the bend length for the hooks and the bend radius. Rotation Select how to rotate the reinforcing bars and define the rotation angle.



Dimensions Define the reinforcing bar dimensions and the number of bars.



Reinforcement



570



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Embedded anchors (8): Hangup bars tab



Use the Hangup bars tab to define additional reinforcing bars for the embeds in the Embedded anchors (8). You can define the reinforcing bar shape and hook properties, and the reinforcing bar profile properties. Example



Grade, Size The Grade and Size options work together. Open the reinforcing bar catalog to select a grade and a size.



End conditions left / right Select the shape of the reinforcing bar.



Reinforcement



571



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Bend lengths left / right, Bend radius Define the bend length for the hooks and the bend radius. Rotation Select how to rotate the hangup reinforcing bars and define the rotation angle.



Reinforcement



572



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Dimensions



Option 1



Description



Default



Select how to place the hangup reinforcing bars. Use the values a, b, c, d, e, f and the angles alpha and beta to define the dimensions of the hangup reinforcing bars.



2



Define the number of hangup reinforcing bars.



3



Define the cover thickness.



4



Define the distance between hangup reinforcing bars.



Reinforcement



573



0



100 mm



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Embedded anchors (8): Horizontal bar tab



Use the Horizontal bar tab to define additional horizontal reinforcing bars for the embeds in the Embedded anchors (8). You can define the reinforcing bar shape and hook properties, and the reinforcing bar profile properties. Example



Grade, Size The Grade and Size options work together. Open the reinforcing bar catalog to select a grade and a size.



End conditions left / right Select the shape of the reinforcing bar. Bend lengths left / right, Bend radius Define the bend length for the hooks and the bend radius.



Reinforcement



574



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Rotation Select how to rotate the horizontal reinforcing bars and define the rotation angle. Side view You can create sloped horizontal reinforcing bars. Define the number of bars and the distance between them. Use value d to define cover thickness for the top side and value f to define the reinforcing bar length.



Top view Select a reinforcing bar shape. Use values a, b, c, d, e, f and the angles alpha and beta to define the dimensions of the horizontal reinforcing bars.



Reinforcement



575



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Reinforcement



576



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Embedded anchors (8): Special bar tab



Use the Special bar tab to define additional U-shaped reinforcing bars for the embeds in the Embedded anchors (8). You can define the reinforcing bar shape and hook properties, and the reinforcing bar profile properties in two directions. Example



Grade, Size The Grade and Size options work together. Open the reinforcing bar catalog to select a grade and a size for bar A and bar B.



Reinforcement



577



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



End conditions left / right Select the shape of the reinforcing bar. Bend lengths left / right, Bend radius Define the bend length for the hooks and the bend radius. Rotation Select how to rotate the U-shaped reinforcing bars and define the rotation angle. Shape Select a reinforcing bar shape. Use the values a, b, c, d, e, f and the angles alpha and beta to define the dimensions of the U-shaped reinforcing bars.



Reinforcement



578



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Embedded anchors (8): Advanced tab



Use the Advanced tab to define UDAs and reinforcing bar properties for the reinforcing bars, hangup bars, special bars and horizontal bars in the Embedded anchors (8). Reinforcing bar properties Option



Description



Comment



Add a comment for the reinforcing bars.



Name



Define a name that is shown in drawings and reports.



Class



Define the part class number for the reinforcing bars.



Serie



Define a prefix for the part position number.



Start number



Define a start number for the part position number.



Reinforcement



579



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Embedded anchors (8): Bolts



Click the Bolts button to open a dialog box where you can define additional embeds and embed offsets in the Embedded anchors (8). Embedded anchors (8) uses only the Horizontal Dist. and Vertical Dist. options, the other options are not taken into account. Define the number of embeds and distances for Horizontal Dist. and Vertical Dist.. The position points are defined on the Placement tab.



Use the Sec/first option to define offsets.



With the options on the Placement tab it is possible to place a large number of embeds in one go. For example, you can create anchors for connecting steel beams to a wall.



Reinforcement



580



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Embed (1008)



Embed (1008) creates one or more embeds in concrete parts. You can create multiple embeds to be used as lifting anchors with one insertion point. Objects created •



Embeds



•



Reinforcing bars



Reinforcement



581



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Use for Situation



Description Embeds



Selection order 1.



Select a concrete part.



2.



Pick one point on the part face where you want to insert the embed. The detail is created automatically when you pick the point.



See also Embed (1008): Picture tab (page 582) Embed (1008): Top part tab (page 584) Embed (1008): Bottom part tab (page 585) Embed (1008): Parts tab (page 585) Embed (1008): Placement tab (page 586) Embed (1008): Reinforcing bar tab (page 588) Embed (1008): Advanced tab (page 588) Embed (1008): Bolts (page 589)



Embed (1008): Picture tab



Use the Picture tab to control the embed dimensions, connection method and rotation in Embed (1008). Embed dimensions Define if the embed needs to be recessed. You can define the dimensions of the recess, distance from the recess plane to the top of the embed, select the shape of the cutout and whether the cutouts are handled as empty cutouts or cutouts with a formwork part.



Reinforcement



582



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Example



Circle



Half moon X



Square



Reinforcement



583



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Example



Half moon Y



Top part/Bottom part Set the part class and rotation. Each option rotates the embed 90 degrees counterclockwise. You can define also a fixed rotation angle. How to connect top part to concrete element Select whether the top part of the embed is created, and if set to Yes, select how the part is connected to the concrete part. How to connect bottom part Select whether the bottom part of the embed is created, and if set to Yes, select how the part is connected to the concrete part. Select a custom part from the Applications & components catalog Select a custom part from the Applications & components catalog to be used as embed. Use the Yes and subassembly option to add the embed as a subassembly to the main part. The default direction is 2 point +x.



Embed (1008): Top part tab



Use the Top part tab to define the top part of the embed in the Embed (1008) detail. Top part dimensions Use the diameter and height boxes to define the shape of the top part of the embed. You can define the main diameters of parts 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 also on the Parts tab. Examples Embed top part defined on the Top part tab, embed bottom part defined on the Bottom part tab. Reinforcement



584



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Embed (1008): Bottom part tab



Use the Bottom part tab to define the bottom part of the embed in the Embed (1008) detail. Bottom part dimensions Use the diameter and height boxes to define the shape of the bottom part of the embed. You can define the main diameters of parts 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 also on the Parts tab. For examples, see Embed (1008): Top part tab (page 584).



Embed (1008): Parts tab



Use the Parts tab to define the embed top and bottom part profiles and the formwork part properties in Embed (1008). Part properties Both the top and the bottom part are build from multiple profiles. You can define profiles for each section. Define the part properties for the top, bottom and formwork part. If the profile properties are left empty, the lengths and diameters defined on the Top Part and Bottom Part tabs are used.



Reinforcement



585



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Description



t, b, h



Define the part thickness, width and height.



Pos_No



Define a prefix and a start number for the part position number.



Material



Define the material grade.



Name



Define a name for the part.



Comment



Add a comment for the part.



You can define UDAs for the top and bottom parts.



Embed (1008): Placement tab



Use the Placement tab to define the embed placing, positioning and embed distribution in the Embed (1008) detail. Positioning Select how to position the top and the bottom part of the embed.



Reinforcement



586



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Placing Define the placing type of the embed. Depending on the component insertion points, multiple embeds can be created. Option



Description Embed is placed on a selected position point.



Embed is placed on a center of gravity (COG) point in the part length direction.



Multiple embeds. Define dimensions a and b. Reference = COG Define dimensions a and b as percentages of the part length. Reference = COG Embed is placed in the middle of the part, along the length of the concrete part.



Multiple embeds. Define dimension a as a percentage of the total part length. Reference = COG Embed is placed in the middle of the part.



Define dimensions a and b. Reference = middle of the part Define dimensions a and b as percentages of the part length. Reference = middle of the part



Reinforcement



587



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Option



Description Define dimensions a and b. The distances are from the embeds to the part ends. Define dimensions a and b as percentages of the part length. The distances are from the embeds to the part ends.



Dimensions Define embed dimensions a and b. Center of gravity Define concrete part COG (center of gravity) for the embeds. Number of extra anchors The spacing distance between multiple embeds.



Embed (1008): Reinforcing bar tab



Use the Reinforcing bar tab to define extra reinforcing bars for the embeds in the Embed (1008) detail. You can define the reinforcing bar shape properties, and the reinforcing bar profile properties in two directions. You can define the number, shape, dimension and covering thickness of the reinforcing bars.



Reinforcement



588



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Embed (1008): Advanced tab



Use the Advanced tab to define bar properties for reinforcing bars A and B in the Embed (1008) detail. Reinforcing bar properties Option



Description



Comment



Add a comment for the reinforcing bars.



Name



Define a name that is shown in drawings and reports.



Class



Define the part class number for the reinforcing bars.



Serie



Define a prefix for the part position number.



Start number



Define a start number for the part position number.



Embed (1008): Bolts



Click the Bolts button to open the Bolts dialog box where you can define extra embeds and embed offsets in the Embed (1008) detail. Embed (1008) uses only the Horizontal Dist. and Vertical Dist. options, the other options are not taken into account. Example In the example below, the bolt placement uses fixed dimensions from part edges, defined on the Placement tab. Extra embeds are defined in the Bolts dialog box.



Reinforcement



589



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Optionally, you can also use the Sec/first and Positioning options to define a distance from the edge of the beam.



Reinforcement



590



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



Continuous Beam Reinforcement



You can reinforce a continuous beam using a macro called ContinuousBeamReinforcement. The macro creates main top and bottom bars, stirrups, fittings, and additional top and bottom bars using system components. Longitudinal reinforcement (70) creates the main and additional top and bottom bars, Stirrup reinforcement (67) creates stirrups, and Battering connection (13) creates fittings. To reinforce a continuous beam: 1.



Click the Applications & components button open the Applications & components catalog.



2.



Click the arrow next to Applications to open the applications list.



3.



Double-click ContinuousBeamReinforcement.



4.



Select the beams and click Next.



5.



Select the columns and click Next.



Reinforcement



591



in the side pane to



Beam, column, and slab reinforcement



6.



If needed, modify the reinforcement properties, and click Finish. The reinforcements are created.



Limitations The beams must be aligned for the reinforcing to be successful. Example



2.3 Lifting This section introduces components that can be used for lifting. Click the links below to find out more:



Reinforcement



592



Lifting



•



Lifting anchor (80) (page 593)



Lifting anchor (80) Creates two lifting anchors (or anchor groups) for a concrete part and places them symmetrically on either side of the part’s center of gravity.



Description 1



30% of part length (default)



2



Center of gravity



Objects created •



Lifting anchors (2 or more)



•



Recesses for anchors (optional)



Use for Situation



More information Straight anchor with straight legs (Type A in the anchor properties file, see Anchor properties from file (page 598))



Reinforcement



593



Lifting



Situation



More information Straight anchor with Lshaped legs (Type D)



Angle anchor with straight legs (Type B)



Angle anchor with Lshaped legs (Type C)



Custom components as anchors



Anchors recessed into the part.



Reinforcement



594



Lifting



Situation



More information Skew and/or rotated anchors



Before you start Create the concrete part. Defining properties Use the following tabs in the Lifting anchor (80) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab Picture



Contents



See also



Anchor dimensions and locations, number and spacing of anchors, option to use custom components as anchors, option to create recesses, recess dimensions, skew angle of anchors, option to rotate anchors, basic anchor properties



Lifting anchor properties (page 595)



Picking order 1.



Concrete part



Lifting anchor properties The properties of lifting anchors are: Field



Description



Anchor dimensions The options are: •



Reinforcement



Use dialog values



595



Lifting



Custom components as lifting anchors (page 597) Creating recesses for lifting anchors (page 597)



Field •



Description Select from file, see Anchor properties from file (page 598).



You need to enter different dimensions for different anchor types. The distance between an anchor (or anchor group) and the center of gravity of the part. Default is 30% of the part length.



The distance between an anchor (or group) and the center line of the part.



Number of bars/ spacings



The number and spacing of anchors in a group. If the spacing varies, enter each value individually.



Custom



See Custom components as lifting anchors (page 597).



Component Custom settings Up direction



The option to define if the anchors are recessed into the part. See Creating recesses for lifting anchors (page 597). The skew angle of anchors. Anchor heads are skewed towards the part’s center of gravity.



Rotate anchor



The option to rotate anchors. The options are: •



Reinforcement



No: Anchors parallel to the part.



596



Lifting



Field • Side



Description Yes: Anchors perpendicular to the part.



The side of the part where Tekla Structures creates the anchors. The options are Front, Top, Back, Below, Start end, and Finish end.



Grade, Size, Name, Prefix, Start number, Class



Custom components as lifting anchors To use custom components as lifting anchors: 1.



In the Custom list box, select Yes.



2.



Click the ... button next to the Component field to open the Select component dialog box.



3.



Browse for the custom component you want to use as lifting anchor. The component you select must be a custom part and have two or three input points. The component should be created so that the first and the second input points are on the concrete surface and along the longitudinal axis of the concrete part. TIP For more information on how to create custom parts that can be used as lifting anchors, see Creating standard embeds for global use.



4.



Select the component and click OK.



5.



To use saved custom component properties, enter the name of the saved properties file in the Custom settings field.



6.



If the anchor position is not correct, select another option in the Up direction list box.



Reinforcement



597



Lifting



Creating recesses for lifting anchors Select one of the following options to define if the lifting anchors are recessed into the concrete part: Option



Description Anchors on the surface of the part. (Default) Anchors recessed into the part.



If you choose to recess the anchors into the part, use the following fields to define the shape and dimensions of the recesses:



Anchor properties from file You can define lifting anchor properties by entering values in the dialog box (see Lifting anchor properties (page 595)), or you can create a file containing the anchor properties you want to use. Use any standard text editor to create the file and save it as LiftingAnchors.dat in the model folder. To use the anchor properties you define in a file: 1.



In the Lifting anchor (80) dialog box, select Select from file from the Anchor dimensions list box.



2.



Click the ... button to browse for the file.



Example Create a row in the file for each lifting anchor. Enter the following properties, separated by spaces: •



Anchor capacity [kN], including safety and material factors



Reinforcement



598



Lifting



•



Type [A, B, C, or D], see the Use for table in Lifting anchor (80) (page 593)



•



Grade [characters]



•



Size [characters]



•



Anchoring length 1 [mm]



•



Anchoring length 2 [mm]



•



Protruding dimension of the anchor outside the part [mm]



•



Penetrating dimension of the anchor inside the part [mm]



•



Bending radius [mm]



•



Hook length [mm] (0 = no hook)



•



Angle of leg 1 [degrees]



•



Angle of leg 2 [degrees]



Here is an example of a lifting anchor file (Tekla Structures ignores the comments enclosed in /* */):



Tekla Structures will use the first anchor in the file that: 1.



Has the shape and type you define using the graphic list boxes in the Lifting anchor (80) dialog box.



2.



Can carry the part’s weight with other identical anchors. The total number of anchors is two times the number you specify in the Number of bars field.



Reinforcement



599



Lifting



3



Automated Reinforcement Layout



This section explains how to create reinforcement using the automated tools available in Tekla Structures. Click the links below to find out more: •



Automated reinforcement layout tools (page 600)



•



Double-tee beam (51) (page 601)



•



Inverted-tee beam (52) (page 620)



•



Ledge beam (53) (page 634)



•



Rectangular beam (54) (page 648)



•



Ledge spandrel (55) (page 660)



•



Rectangular spandrel (56) (page 671)



•



Columns (57) (page 682)



•



Topping (58) (page 700)



•



Wash (59) (page 703)



•



Hollowcore reinforcement strands (60) (page 707)



•



Post-tensioning (61) (page 711)



•



Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62) (page 714)



•



U Bar of concrete slab (63) (page 721)



•



Wall panel (64) (page 723)



•



Reinforcement Strand Layout (66) (page 734)



Automated Reinforcement Layout



600



Automated reinforcement layout tools



3.1 Automated reinforcement layout tools Tekla Structures includes the following components that you can use to automatically create reinforcement layouts for double-tees, beams, and columns: Component



Icon



Description



Double-tee beam (51) (page 601)



Creates reinforcement in double-tee beams.



Inverted-tee beam (52) (page 620)



Creates reinforcement in inverted-tee beams.



Ledge beam (53) (page 634)



Creates reinforcement in ledge beams.



Rectangular beam (54) (page 648)



Creates reinforcement in rectangular beams.



Ledge spandrel (55) (page 660)



Creates reinforcement in ledge spandrels.



Rectangular spandrel (56) (page 671)



Creates reinforcement in rectangular spandrels.



Columns (57) (page 682)



Creates reinforcement in columns.



Hollowcore reinforcement strands (60) (page 707)



Creates hollow core reinforcement.



Post-tensioning (61) (page 711)



Creates post-tensioning profiles.



Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62) (page 714)



Creates edge and corner reinforcement for concrete slabs.



U Bar of concrete slab (63) (page 721)



Creates U bar reinforcement for concrete slabs.



3.2 Double-tee beam (51) Double-tee beam (51) creates flexural, shear, and flange reinforcement for a double-tee beam. Objects created Reinforcement meshes.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



601



Double-tee beam (51)



Use for Situation



Description Double-tee with reinforcement.



•



Prestress straight or depressed strands for flexural reinforcement in double-tee stems



•



Mild longitudinal bars for flexural reinforcement in double-tee stems



•



Mesh for shear reinforcement in double-tee stems



•



Stirrups in double-tee stems



•



Reinforcement mesh in the double-tee flange



•



Transverse and longitudinal mild reinforcing bar in the ends and sides of the double-tee flange



•



Reinforcement around openings and notches in the double-tee flange



Before you start •



Create a concrete double-tee beam.



•



Calculate the required area and quantity of strands and other reinforcement.



•



Define other reinforcement properties, such as debonding and pull values.



Selection order 1.



Select the double-tee beam. The reinforcement is created automatically.



Double-tee beam (51): Strand template tab



Use the Strand template tab to define the number and arrangement of vertical strand planes in each stem, and the vertical distances between grid points in each plane in the Double-tee beam (51) reinforcement. Grid spacing along Y Define the grid spacing values for the y axis. Separate the values with commas or spaces. The first value is the distance from the the bottom edge of the stem. Each successive value is the distance to the next grid point.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



602



Double-tee beam (51)



TIP Use a multiplier to define a repeating series of values. For example, 8*2 indicates eight holes with a two unit spacing. Strand planes Option



Description Single



Double



Automated Reinforcement Layout



603



Double-tee beam (51)



Option



Description Double staggered



Triple



Automated Reinforcement Layout



604



Double-tee beam (51)



Option



Description Triple staggered



Double-tee beam (51): Strand pattern tab



Use the Strand pattern tab to define the placement of strands in the grid points in the Double-tee beam (51) reinforcement. Same as left Define the strand input. •



Select Yes to use the row and debond information of the left end for the strands at the right end of the strand.



•



Select No to define an alternate row and debond information at each end of the strand.



Strand pattern definitions Define the row and column for each end of the strand using the strand template positions in the strand grid. Strands may have different grid row positions at each end, but a strand cannot cross grid columns. Option



Description



Left end - Row



Define the horizontal row number in the strand template for the left end of the strand.



Left end Debond



Define the debond length at the left end of the strand.



Right end - Row If Same as left is No, define the horizontal row number in the strand template for the right end of the strand.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



605



Double-tee beam (51)



Option



Description



Right end Debond



If Same as left is No, define the debond length at the right end of the strand.



Columns



Define a list of one or more column numbers and/or column ranges in the strand template at which a strand should be created.



Size



Define the size of the strands by selecting if from the reinforcing bar catalog.



Grade



Define the strand grade.



Pull



Define the pull force of the strands.



Double-tee beam (51): Strand profile tab



Use the Strand profile tab to define profiles for the strands in the Double-tee beam (51) reinforcement. All strands in each stem use the same general profile. Strand depression profiles Option



Description One point, depressed



Two points, depressed variable



Two points, depressed fixed



Straight



Automated Reinforcement Layout



606



Double-tee beam (51)



Depress position Define depress positions A and B as either a fixed distance or as a percentage of the member length. Same as A Define whether depress position B uses the same values as depress position A in the Two points, depressed variable and Two points, depressed fixed strand profiles. Depression spacing type To define the depression spacing type, select One point, depressed as the strand profile. Option



Description



Exact location



Define the height of the strand in Strand ht @ position.



Top of depression



Define the distance Xd from the depress point in the outmost reinforcing bar to the edge of the stem.



Double-tee beam (51): Longitudinal rebar tab



Use the Longitudinal rebar tab to define longitudinal reinforcement in the Double-tee beam (51) reinforcement. Minimum end clear distance C & D Define the minimum end clearance distance. Longitudinal rebar definitions Option



Description



Qty



Define the quantity of reinforcing bars.



Grade



Define the grade of the reinforcing bar.



Size



Define the size of the reinforcing bar by selecting it from the reinforcing bar catalog.



Ht



Define the distance from the end of the reinforcing bar to the face of the strand.



Length type Define the length type for the reinforcing bar group. Enter additional information in the L, C, or D fields.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



607



Double-tee beam (51)



Option Full length



Description Reinforcing bar extends the full length of the stem, excluding the minimum end clear distance at each end. The L, C, and D fields are disabled.



Centered



Define a fixed length L for the reinforcing bar. The reinforcing bar is place at the center position in the stem. The C and D fields are disabled.



Known L, C



Define a fixed length L for the reinforcing bar and a distance C from the start of the strand. The D field is disabled.



Known L, C



Define a fixed length L for the reinforcing bar and a distance D from the end of the strand. The C field is disabled.



Known C, D



Define a distance C and D from the end of the strand. The L field is disabled.



Double-tee beam (51): Stem mesh tab



Use the Stem mesh tab to control the creation of stem meshes and their position in the Double-tee beam (51) reinforcement. Stem mesh creation Define whether one, two, or no stem meshes are created.



Stem mesh dimensions Define the mesh type by selecting it from the mesh type catalog. The mesh type also defines the mesh grade, mesh size, and bar spacing.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



608



Double-tee beam (51)



Option



Description



End distance, de Define the distance from the edge of the mesh to the edge of the stem. Bottom clearance, h1



Define the distance from the edge of the mesh to the bottom edge of the stem.



Specify, h3



Select Top clearance. Define the distance from the edge of the mesh to the top edge of the stem.



Specify, h2



Select Mesh height. Define the height of the mesh.



Mesh full length Define the mesh full length. The options are: •



Set length E Define the left end length and right end length.



•



Full length



•



Multiple sheets creates overlapping meshes along the short and long sides of the stem. Define the overlap on the Multiple sheets tab.



Left end length, Define the length of the left end E mesh. Right end length, F



Define the length of the right end mesh.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



609



Double-tee beam (51)



Mesh stem position



Option Mesh stem position



Description Define the position for both ends of the stem, x1 and x2.



Double-tee beam (51): Multiple sheets tab



Use the Multiple sheets tab to define the minimum overlap along the longitudinal and crossing direction of the meshes in the Double-tee beam (51) reinforcement. Multiple sheets are created if you have selected Mesh full length to be Multiple sheets on the Stem mesh tab. Overlapping Option



Description



Min. overlapping (Short Side)



Define the minimum overlap along the crossing direction of the mesh.



Min. overlapping (Long side)



Define the minimum overlap along the longitudinal direction of the mesh.



Mesh leftover



Define whether the leftover is cut, Cut leftover, or not, Overlap leftover.



Double-tee beam (51): Stem stirrups tab



Use the Stem stirrups tab to define how the the stem stirrups are created in the Double-tee beam (51) reinforcement.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



610



Double-tee beam (51)



Reinforcing bar properties Option



Description



Same as left end



Define whether the same spacing and reinforcing bar properties are used at the right end of the stem.



Spacing



Define the reinforcing bar spacing. Use a space to separate spacing values. Enter a value for each space between the reinforcing bars. For example, if there are 3 reinforcing bars, enter 2 values.



Bars



Define the number of reinforcing bars.



Rebar grade



Define the reinforcing bar grade. If you select the size from the reinforcing bar catalog, the grade value is not used.



Rebar size



Define the reinforcing bar size by selecting it from the reinforcing bar catalog.



Stirrup shape Option



Description No stirrups.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



611



Double-tee beam (51)



Option



Description Open U-shape stirrup with legs.



180-degree closed stirrups.



Stirrup dimensions



Automated Reinforcement Layout



612



Double-tee beam (51)



Field



Description Define the length of the stirrup leg. Define the distance from the middle of the stirrup leg to the face of the stem. To define the distance, first select Top cover from the Specify list. Define the height of the stirrup. To define the height, first select Stirrup height from the Specify list. Define the distance from the bottom edge of the stirrup to the bottom edge of the stem. Define the distance from the bottom corner edge of the stirrup to the side face of the stem.



Field



Description Define the distance from the top edge of the stirrup to the face of the stem. To define the top cover, select Top cover from the Specify list.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



613



Double-tee beam (51)



Field



Description Define the height of the stirrup. To define the height of the stirrup, select Stirrup height from the Specify list. Define the distance from the bottom edge of the stirrup to the bottom edge of the stem. Define the distance from the bottom corner edge of the stirrup to the side face of the stem.



Double-tee beam (51): Flange tab



Use the Flange tab to define the reinforcing bar mesh for flanges in the Double-tee beam (51) reinforcement. Reinforcing bar mesh dimensions



Option



Description



1



Define the distance from the top edge of the mesh to the top edge of the flange.



2



Define the distance between two longitudinal reinforcing bars.



3



Define the distance from the bottom edge of the mesh to the bottom edge of the flange.



4



Define the distance from the side edge of the mesh to the side edge of the flange.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



614



Double-tee beam (51)



Option



Description



5



Define the number of reinforcing bars.



6



Define the reinforcing bar spacing. Use a space to separate spacing values. Enter a value for each space between the reinforcing bars. For example, if there are 3 reinforcing bars, enter 2 values.



7



Define the maximum spacing between reinforcing bars.



Reinforcing bar properties Define the reinforcing bar properties for both the transverse (crossing) and longitudinal reinforcing bars. Option



Description



Size



Define the reinforcing bar size by selecting it from the reinforcing bar catalog.



Grade



Define the reinforcing bar grade. If you select the size from the reinforcing bar catalog, the grade value is not used.



Mesh catalog type Define the mesh type by selecting if from the mesh catalog. Ht



Define the height of the mesh.



Mesh full length



Define whether the mesh is full length or not. If you select No, define the end lengths for the mesh.



Left end length, E



Define the left end length of the mesh.



Right end length, F



Define the right end length of the mesh.



Double-tee beam (51): Notch/Opening tab



Use the Notch/Opening tab to define the reinforcement around the notches and openings in the Double-tee beam (51) reinforcement. Notch/opening reinforcement properties Option



Description



Min notch dimension, D



Automated Reinforcement Layout



Define the minimum notch dimension.



615



Double-tee beam (51)



Option



Description



Edge distance, de



Define the distance from the reinforcing bar to the corner of the opening.



Extension, L



Define the distance from the notch opening to the end of the reinforcing bar.



Number of bars



Define the number of reinforcing bars.



Spacing



Define the reinforcing bar spacing. Use a space to separate spacing values. Enter a value for each space between the reinforcing bars. For example, if there are 3 reinforcing bars, enter 2 values.



Rebar size



Define the reinforcing bar size by selecting it from the reinforcing bar catalog.



Rebar grade



Define the reinforcing bar grade. If you select the size from the reinforcing bar catalog, the grade value is not used.



Corner notch reinforcement Option



Description Diagonal reinforcement around the corner notches.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



616



Double-tee beam (51)



Option



Description Parallel reinforcement around the corner notches.



Side/end notch reinforcement Option



Description Diagonal reinforcement around the side or end notch.



Parallel reinforcement around the side or end notch. Define both the horizontal and vertical reinforcement properties.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



617



Double-tee beam (51)



Opening reinforcement Option



Description Diagonal reinforcement around the opening.



Parallel reinforcement around the opening. Define both the horizontal and vertical reinforcement properties.



Double-tee beam (51): Edge reinforcement tab



Use the Edge reinforcement tab to create edge reinforcement for the openings in the Double-tee beam (51) reinforcement. Reinforcement bar properties Option



Description



Number of bars



Define the number of reinforcing bars.



Spacing



Define the reinforcement bar spacing. Use a space to separate spacing values. Enter a value for each space between the reinforcing bars. For example, if there are 3 reinforcing bars, enter 2 values.



Rebar size



Define the reinforcing bar size by selecting it from the reinforcing bar catalog.



Rebar grade



Define the reinforcing bar grade. If you select the size from the reinforcing bar catalog, the grade value is not used.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



618



Double-tee beam (51)



Section view



Option



Description



1



Define the distance from the end of the reinforcing bar to the edge of the stem.



2



Define the distance from the top edge of the reinforcing bar to the face of the stem.



3



Define the distance of the reinforcing bar from the side face of the stem. Enter a positive value to move the reinforcing bar closer to the outer edge of the stem. Enter a negative value to move the reinforcing bar to the inner edge of the stem.



4



Define the distance from the bottom edge of the reinforcing bar to the bottom edge of the stem.



Plan view



Automated Reinforcement Layout



619



Double-tee beam (51)



Option 1



Description Define the distance from the middle of the outmost reinforcing bar to the notch/opening reinforcement.



3.3 Inverted-tee beam (52) Creates typical flexural, shear, and ledge reinforcement for an inverted-tee beam. Reinforcement created •



Prestress straight or depressed strands for flexural reinforcement in the inverted tee stem



•



Mild longitudinal bars for flexural reinforcement



•



Mesh for shear reinforcement in the beam stem



•



Stirrups for shear reinforcement in the beam stem



•



Reinforcement mesh in the inverted-tee ledges



•



Stirrups for shear reinforcement in the inverted-tee ledges



•



Mild reinforcement in the top of the beam that will be used later to create a composite member



•



Mild reinforcement in the ends of the beam



Use for Situation Straight and depressed prestress strands Varying strand pattern and strand number To define longitudinal reinforcement in the stem When you want reinforcement mesh in the stem



Automated Reinforcement Layout



620



Inverted-tee beam (52)



Situation When you want stirrups in the beam stem To use reinforcement mesh in the beam ledges To use stirrups in the beam ledges To define reinforcement for composite members To add mild reinforcement to the beam ends Before you start •



Create the concrete inverted-tee beam.



•



Calculate the required area and quantity of strands and other reinforcement.



•



Define other reinforcement properties, such as debonding and pull values.



Defining properties Use the following tabs in the Inverted-tee beam automated reinforcement layout (52) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab



Contents



See also



Strand template The allowable grid points for strands within the beam cross section.



Strand template (page 623)



Strand pattern



The actual strand definitions.



Strand pattern (page 623)



Strand profile



The vertical profile for strands in the beam.



Strand profile (page 624)



Longitudinal rebar



Definitions for additional mild steel reinforcement in the beam. Reinforcement may be defined with a variety of parametric forms.



Reinforcing bar and bar group properties



Stem mesh



Definition for the Reinforcing bar mesh to be used in the and bar group beam stem. Mesh can properties run the full length of the beam, or be placed in short sections at either end of the beam. Mesh size, spacing, clearances,



Automated Reinforcement Layout



621



Inverted-tee beam (52)



Tab



Contents and length are all entered here.



See also



Stem stirrups



Definitions for the Stem stirrups bent bar (page 628) reinforcement in the beam stem, including stirrup shape, bar size, end clearance, number of bars, and bar spacing in five zones along the length of the beam.



Ledge mesh



Definition for the mesh to be used to reinforce the beam ledges. Mesh runs the full length of the beam. Mesh size, spacing, and clearances are all entered here.



Ledge rebar



Definitions for the Ledge rebar bent bar (page 630) reinforcement in the beam ledges, including stirrup shape, bar size, end clearance, number of bars, and bar spacing in five zones along the length of the beam.



Composite



Definitions for the Reinforcing bar bent bar and bar group reinforcement added properties to the top of the beam stem for subsequent creation of composite elements. Bar size, embedment, projection, cover, end clearance, number of bars, and bar spacing in three zones along the length of the beam are all defined here.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



622



Reinforcing bar and bar group properties



Inverted-tee beam (52)



Tab



Contents



See also



End rebar



Definitions for the bent bar reinforcement in the beam ends, including position, orientation, bar size and length, cover, and end clearance. Up to 6 horizontal and 6 vertical bars may be defined.



Reinforcing bar and bar group properties



Attributes



Name, class, and numbering properties of the strands, stirrups, and mesh bars.



Reinforcing bar and bar group properties



Strand template You can specify the arrangement of vertical strand planes in the beam, along with the vertical distances between grid points in each plane. Strands are defined by their row and column number within the grid, but the template allows for a mixture of regular and irregular grid points with respect to both the horizontal and vertical axes. Use the X- and Y-Axis Grid Definition fields to define a list of distances between successive planes and grid points. For regularly spaced points, you may use a multiplier value, for example, 4*6”.



Strand pattern You place strands in the beam by defining the grid points from the strand template for each end of the strand element. You also define size, and other reinforcement properties for the strands here. A row of data on this tab can be thought of as a group. All the strands defined in one group share the same properties and start and stop rows. A group may also refer to a list of columns in the strand template, letting you use one group definition to create a set of strands.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



623



Inverted-tee beam (52)



Strand profile Strands may be straight (though not necessarily horizontal), or depressed, using one or two control points. Note that all strands use the same general profile. Use the following options to define the strand profile: Option



Description Straight



1-pt depressed



2-pt depressed variable



Automated Reinforcement Layout



624



Inverted-tee beam (52)



Option



Description 2-pt depressed fixed



You specify the depress positions A and B as either a fixed distance or as a percentage of the member length.



Longitudinal rebar This tab allows you to define any longitudinal reinforcement for the member. Up to 10 reinforcing bar definitions may be defined.



For each longitudinal reinforcing bar you can: •



Specify the minimum clear end distance for “C” and “D”.



•



Select the reinforcing bar size.



•



Select the reinforcing bar grade.



•



Specify the horizontal location, “Xloc”, of the reinforcing bar.



•



Specify the vertical location, “Yloc”, of the reinforcing bar.



•



Select a value from the Length Definition drop-down combo-box to define the end constraints of the reinforcing bar within the member length.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



625



Inverted-tee beam (52)



Depending on the your choice, additional information is then entered in the “L”, “C”, or “D” fields. There are five choices: Full Length - The reinforcing bar extends the full length of the member (minus the minimum clear end distance on each end). The L, C, and D fields are disabled. Centered - You can specify a fixed length, “L” for the reinforcing bar which the component will center in the length of the member. The C and D fields are disabled. Known L, C - You can specify a fixed length, “L” for the reinforcing bar and a distance C from the start of the member. The D field is disabled. Known L, D - You can specify a fixed length, “L” for the reinforcing bar and a distance D from the end of the member. The C field is disabled Known C, D - You can specify a distance C from the start of the member and a distance D from the end of the member. The L field is disabled. Values for L, C, and D all take the natural geometry of the beam ends (skewed and/or battered) into account. Notches in the end of a beam, though they will naturally clip any bar they intersect, will not affect the L, C, and D values. •



Specify the relative location for longitudinal bars using the following icons:



Top and bottom left:



Top and bottom right:



Top and bottom left and right: Top left:



Top right:



Top left and right:



Bottom left:



Automated Reinforcement Layout



626



Inverted-tee beam (52)



Bottom right:



Bottom left and right:



Stem mesh This tab allows you to define mesh reinforcement in the member stem.



•



Select the mesh size.



•



Select the mesh grade.



•



Specify the right side clear cover, “C1”.



•



Specify the left side clear cover, “C2”.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



627



Inverted-tee beam (52)



•



Specify the bottom clear cover, “C3”.



•



Specify the top clear cover, “C4”.



•



Specify the left and right end distances, “d1” and “d2”, to the first wire.



•



Specify whether the mesh is continuous over the full length of the member or is used only at the spandrel end(s). If Yes is selected from the list, the mesh extends the full length of the member (less the d1 and d2 end distances and the L1/L2 fields are disabled). If No is selected from the list, mesh can be defined at each end using the “L1” and “L2” fields. If any stem holes are present, the component should “trim” the mesh around the hole using the top cover (C3) dimension as a clearance.



Stem stirrups Use the following options to define the stem stirrups in inverted-tee beams: Option



Description No stirrup



90-degree closed stirrup



135-degree closed stirrup



Automated Reinforcement Layout



628



Inverted-tee beam (52)



Option



Description U-Bar pairs



135-degree open stirrup



Automated Reinforcement Layout



629



Inverted-tee beam (52)



Ledge mesh This tab allows you to define ledge mesh reinforcement in the member.



•



Select the mesh size.



•



Select the mesh grade.



•



Specify the mesh right side cover, “C1”.



•



Specify the mesh left side cover, “C2”.



•



Specify the mesh bottom cover, “C3”.



•



Specify the mesh top cover, “C4”.



•



Specify the left end distance to first wire, “d1”.



•



Specify the right end distance to first wire, “d2”.



Mesh extends the full length of the spandrel, less the “d1” and “d2” end dimensions.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



630



Inverted-tee beam (52)



Ledge rebar Use the following options to define the ledge stirrups in inverted-tee beams: Option



Description No stirrup



Bent U-bar stirrup



Bent U-Bar pairs



90-degree stirrup



135-degree stirrup



Automated Reinforcement Layout



631



Inverted-tee beam (52)



Composite This tab allows you to define reinforcement that will be used later to create a composite member component.



•



Select the reinforcing bar size.



•



Select the reinforcing bar grade.



•



Specify the reinforcing bar embedment, “A”.



•



Specify the reinforcing bar projection, “B”.



•



Specify the side cover, “C1”.



•



Specify the left end distance, “d1”, and right end distance, “d2”, from the end of the beam to the centerline of the first reinforcing bar.



•



Specify the quantity, “X”, and spacing, “S1”, of the first group of reinforcing bar at the left end.



•



Specify the quantity, “Y”, and spacing, “S2”, of the first group of reinforcing bar at the right end.



•



Specify the maximum reinforcing bar spacing, “S3”, to be used between the end groups.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



632



Inverted-tee beam (52)



End rebar This tab allows you to define reinforcement at the ends of the member.



•



Specify up to 6 horizontal and 6 vertical end U-bars.



•



Specify the clearance for the horizontal U-bars.



For each horizontal U-bar: •



Specify the height, “Ht”, of the horizontal U-bar.



•



Select the reinforcing bar size and grade.



•



Specify the reinforcing bar side cover, “C1”.



•



Specify the reinforcing bar “leg length”.



•



Specify the end clearance for the vertical U-bars.



For each vertical U-bar: •



Specify the horizontal location, “X loc”, of the vertical U-bar.



•



Select the reinforcing bar size and grade.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



633



Inverted-tee beam (52)



•



Specify the reinforcing bar top cover, “C2”.



•



Specify the reinforcing bar bottom cover,”C3”.



•



Specify the reinforcing bar “leg length”.



Attributes This tab lets you define the general attribute information for the reinforcement created by the component.



For each attribute: •



Specify the Serie value.



•



Specify the Starting Number for the category.



•



Enter the category name.



•



Enter the Class number



3.4 Ledge beam (53) Creates typical flexural, shear, and ledge reinforcement for a ledge beam. Reinforcement created •



Prestress straight or depressed strands for flexural reinforcement in the beam stem



•



Mild longitudinal bars for flexural reinforcement



•



Mesh for shear reinforcement in the beam stem



•



Stirrups for shear reinforcement in the beam stem



•



Reinforcement mesh in the beam ledge



Automated Reinforcement Layout



634



Ledge beam (53)



•



Stirrups for shear reinforcement in the beam ledge



•



Mild reinforcement in the top of the beam that will be used later to create a composite member



•



Mild reinforcement in the ends of the beam



Use for Situation Straight and depressed prestress strands Varying strand pattern and strand number To define longitudinal reinforcement in the stem When you want reinforcement mesh in the stem When you want stirrups in the beam stem To use reinforcement mesh in the beam ledge To use stirrups in the beam ledge To define reinforcement for composite members To add mild reinforcement to the beam ends Before you start •



Create the concrete ledge beam.



•



Calculate the required area and quantity of strands and other reinforcement.



•



Define other reinforcement properties, such as debonding and pull values.



Defining properties Use the following tabs in the Ledge beam automated reinforcement layout (53) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab



Contents



Strand template The allowable grid points for strands



Automated Reinforcement Layout



635



See also Strand template (page 637)



Ledge beam (53)



Tab



Contents within the beam cross section.



See also



Strand pattern



The actual strand definitions.



Strand pattern (page 638)



Strand profile



The vertical profile for strands in the beam.



Strand profile (page 638)



Longitudinal rebar



Definitions for additional mild steel reinforcement in the beam. Reinforcement may be defined with a variety of parametric forms.



Reinforcing bar and bar group properties



Stem mesh



Definition for the Reinforcing bar mesh to be used in the and bar group beam stem. Mesh can properties run the full length of the beam, or be placed in short sections at either end of the beam. Mesh size, spacing, clearances, and length are all entered here.



Stem stirrups



Definitions for the Stem stirrups bent bar (page 643) reinforcement in the beam stem, including stirrup shape, bar size, end clearance, number of bars, and bar spacing in five zones along the length of the beam.



Ledge mesh



Definition for the mesh to be used to reinforce the beam ledge. Mesh runs the full length of the beam. Mesh size, spacing, and clearances are all entered here.



Reinforcing bar and bar group properties



Ledge rebar



Definitions for the bent bar



Ledge rebar (page 645)



Automated Reinforcement Layout



636



Ledge beam (53)



Tab



Contents reinforcement in the beam ledge, including stirrup shape, bar size, end clearance, number of bars, and bar spacing in five zones along the length of the beam.



See also



Composite



Definitions for the Reinforcing bar bent bar and bar group reinforcement added properties to the top of the beam stem for subsequent creation of composite elements. Bar size, embedment, projection, cover, end clearance, number of bars, and bar spacing in three zones along the length of the beam are all defined here.



End rebar



Definitions for the bent bar reinforcement in the beam ends, including position, orientation, bar size and length, cover, and end clearance. Up to 6 horizontal and 6 vertical bars may be defined.



Reinforcing bar and bar group properties



Attributes



Name, class, and numbering properties of the strands, stirrups, and mesh bars.



Reinforcing bar and bar group properties



Strand template You can specify the arrangement of vertical strand planes in the beam, along with the vertical distances between grid points in each plane. Strands are defined by their row and column number within the grid, but the template



Automated Reinforcement Layout



637



Ledge beam (53)



allows for a mixture of regular and irregular grid points with respect to both the horizontal and vertical axes. Use the X- and Y-Axis Grid Definition fields to define a list of distances between successive planes and grid points. For regularly spaced points, you may use a multiplier value, for example, 4*6”.



Strand pattern You place strands in the beam by defining the grid points from the strand template for each end of the strand element. You also define size, and other reinforcement properties for the strands here. A row of data on this tab can be thought of as a group. All the strands defined in one group share the same properties and start and stop rows. A group may also refer to a list of columns in the strand template, letting you use one group definition to create a set of strands.



Strand profile Strands may be straight (though not necessarily horizontal), or depressed, using one or two control points. Note that all strands use the same general profile. Use the following options to define the strand profile: Option



Description Straight



Automated Reinforcement Layout



638



Ledge beam (53)



Option



Description 1-pt depressed



2-pt depressed variable



2-pt depressed fixed



You specify the depress positions A and B as either a fixed distance or as a percentage of the member length.



Longitudinal rebar This tab allows you to define any longitudinal reinforcement for the member. Up to 10 reinforcing bar definitions may be defined.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



639



Ledge beam (53)



For each longitudinal reinforcing bar, you can. •



Specify the minimum clear end distance for “C” and “D”.



•



Select the reinforcing bar size.



•



Select the reinforcing bar grade.



•



Specify the horizontal location, “Xloc”, of the reinforcing bar.



•



Specify the vertical location, “Yloc”, of the reinforcing bar.



•



Select a value from the Length Definition drop-down combo-box to define the end constraints of the reinforcing bar within the member length. Depending on the your choice, additional information is then entered in the “L”, “C”, or “D” fields. There are five choices:



Full Length - The reinforcing bar extends the full length of the member (minus the minimum clear end distance on each end). The L, C, and D fields are disabled. Centered - You can specify a fixed length, “L” for the reinforcing bar which the component will center in the length of the member. The C and D fields are disabled. Known L, C - You can specify a fixed length, “L” for the reinforcing bar and a distance C from the start of the member. The D field is disabled. Known L, D - You can specify a fixed length, “L” for the reinforcing bar and a distance D from the end of the member. The C field is disabled Known C, D - You can specify a distance C from the start of the member and a distance D from the end of the member. The L field is disabled. Values for L, C, and D all take the natural geometry of the beam ends (skewed and/or battered) into account. Notches in the end of a beam, though they will naturally clip any bar they intersect, will not affect the L, C, and D values. •



Specify the relative location for longitudinal bars using the following icons:



Top and bottom left:



Top and bottom right:



Top and bottom left and right: Top left:



Automated Reinforcement Layout



640



Ledge beam (53)



Top right:



Top left and right:



Bottom left:



Bottom right:



Bottom left and right:



Automated Reinforcement Layout



641



Ledge beam (53)



Stem mesh This tab allows you to define mesh reinforcement in the member stem.



•



Select the mesh size.



•



Select the mesh grade.



•



Specify the right side clear cover, “C1”.



•



Specify the left side clear cover, “C2”.



•



Specify the bottom clear cover, “C3”.



•



Specify the top clear cover, “C4”.



•



Specify the left and right end distances, “d1” and “d2”, to the first wire.



•



Specify whether the mesh is continuous over the full length of the member or is used only at the spandrel end(s). If Yes is selected from the list, the mesh extends the full length of the member (less the d1 and d2 end distances and the L1/L2 fields are disabled). If No is selected from the list, mesh can be defined at each end using the “L1” and “L2” fields. If any stem holes are present, the component should “trim” the mesh around the hole using the top cover (C3) dimension as a clearance.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



642



Ledge beam (53)



Stem stirrups Use the following options to define the stem stirrups in ledge beams: Option



Description No stirrup



90-degree closed stirrup



135-degree closed stirrup



U-Bar pairs



Automated Reinforcement Layout



643



Ledge beam (53)



Option



Description 135-degree open stirrup



Ledge mesh This tab allows you to define ledge mesh reinforcement in the member.



•



Select the mesh size.



•



Select the mesh grade.



•



Specify the mesh right side cover, “C1”.



•



Specify the mesh left side cover, “C2”.



•



Specify the mesh bottom cover, “C3”.



•



Specify the mesh top cover, “C4”.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



644



Ledge beam (53)



•



Specify the left end distance to first wire, “d1”.



•



Specify the right end distance to first wire, “d2”.



Mesh extends the full length of the spandrel, less the “d1” and “d2” end dimensions.



Ledge rebar Use the following options to define the ledge reinforcing bars in ledge beams: Option



Description No stirrup



Bent U-bar stirrup



Bent U-Bar pairs



90-degree stirrup



Automated Reinforcement Layout



645



Ledge beam (53)



Option



Description 135-degree stirrup



Composite This tab allows you to define reinforcement that will be used later to create a composite member component.



•



Select the reinforcing bar size.



•



Select the reinforcing bar grade.



•



Specify the reinforcing bar embedment, “A”.



•



Specify the reinforcing bar projection, “B”.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



646



Ledge beam (53)



•



Specify the side cover, “C1”.



•



Specify the left end distance, “d1”, and right end distance,”d2”, from the end of the beam to the centerline of the first reinforcing bar.



•



Specify the quantity, “X”, and spacing, “S1”, of the first group of reinforcing bar at the left end.



•



Specify the quantity, “Y”, and spacing, “S2”, of the first group of reinforcing bar at the right end.



•



Specify the maximum reinforcing bar spacing, “S3”, to be used between the end groups.



End rebar This tab allows you to define reinforcement at the ends of the member.



•



Specify up to 6 horizontal and 6 vertical end U-bars.



•



Specify the end clearance for the horizontal U-bars.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



647



Ledge beam (53)



For each horizontal U-bar: •



Specify the height, “Ht”, of the horizontal U-bar.



•



Select the reinforcing bar size and grade.



•



Specify the reinforcing bar side cover, “C1”.



•



Specify the reinforcing bar “leg length”.



•



Specify the end clearance for the vertical U-bars.



For each vertical U-bar: •



Specify the horizontal location, “X loc”, of the vertical U-bar.



•



Select the reinforcing bar size and grade.



•



Specify the reinforcing bar top cover, “C2”.



•



Specify the reinforcing bar bottom cover,”C3”.



•



Specify the reinforcing bar “leg length”.



Attributes This tab lets you define the general attribute information for the reinforcement created by the component.



For each attribute: •



Specify the Serie value.



•



Specify the Starting Number for the category.



•



Enter the category name.



•



Enter the Class number



Automated Reinforcement Layout



648



Rectangular beam (54)



3.5 Rectangular beam (54) Creates typical flexural and shear reinforcement for a rectangular beam. Reinforcement created •



Prestress straight or depressed strands for flexural reinforcement in the beam



•



Mild longitudinal bars for flexural reinforcement



•



Mesh for shear reinforcement in the beam



•



Stirrups for shear reinforcement in the beam



•



Mild reinforcement in the top of the beam that will be used later to create a composite member



•



Mild reinforcement in the ends of the beam



Use for Situation Straight and depressed prestress strands Varying strand pattern and strand number To define longitudinal reinforcement in the beam When you want reinforcement mesh in the beam When you want stirrups in the beam To define reinforcement for composite members To add mild reinforcement to the beam ends Before you start •



Create the concrete rectangular beam.



•



Calculate the required area and quantity of strands and other reinforcement.



•



Define other reinforcement properties, such as debonding and pull values.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



649



Rectangular beam (54)



Defining properties Use the following tabs in the Rectangular beam automated reinforcement layout (54) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab



Contents



See also



Strand template The allowable grid points for strands within the beam cross section.



Strand template (page 651)



Strand pattern



The actual strand definitions.



Strand pattern (page 651)



Strand profile



The vertical profile for strands in the beam.



Strand profile (page 652)



Longitudinal rebar



Definitions for additional mild steel reinforcement in the beam. Reinforcement may be defined with a variety of parametric forms.



Longitudinal rebar (page 676)



Stem mesh



Definition for the Stem mesh mesh to be used in the (page 678) beam. Mesh can run the full length of the beam, or be placed in short sections at either end of the beam. Mesh size, spacing, clearances, and length are all entered here.



Stem stirrups



Definitions for the Stem stirrups bent bar (page 656) reinforcement in the beam, including stirrup shape, bar size, end clearance, number of bars, and bar spacing in five zones along the length of the beam.



Composite



Definitions for the bent bar reinforcement added to the top of the beam for subsequent



Automated Reinforcement Layout



650



Rectangular beam (54)



Tab



Contents creation of composite elements. Bar size, embedment, projection, cover, end clearance, number of bars, and bar spacing in three zones along the length of the beam are all defined here.



End rebar



Definitions for the bent bar reinforcement in the beam ends, including position, orientation, bar size and length, cover, and end clearance. Up to 6 horizontal and 6 vertical bars may be defined.



Attributes



Name, class, and numbering properties of the strands, stirrups, and mesh bars.



See also



Strand template You can specify the arrangement of vertical strand planes in the beam, along with the vertical distances between grid points in each plane. Strands are defined by their row and column number within the grid, but the template allows for a mixture of regular and irregular grid points with respect to both the horizontal and vertical axes. Use the fields Grid spacing along X and Grid spacing along Y to define a list of distances between successive planes and grid points. For regularly spaced points, you may use a multiplier value, for example, 4*6”.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



651



Rectangular beam (54)



Strand pattern You place strands in the beam by defining the grid points from the strand template for each end of the strand element. You also define size, and other reinforcement properties for the strands here. A row of data on this tab can be thought of as a group. All the strands defined in one group share the same properties and start and stop rows. A group may also refer to a list of columns in the strand template, letting you use one group definition to create a set of strands.



Strand profile Strands may be straight (though not necessarily horizontal), or depressed, using one or two control points. Note that all strands use the same general profile. Use the following options to define the strand profile: Option



Description Straight



1-pt depressed



Automated Reinforcement Layout



652



Rectangular beam (54)



Option



Description 2-pt depressed variable



2-pt depressed fixed



You specify the depress positions A and B as either a fixed distance or as a percentage of the member length.



Longitudinal rebar This tab allows you to define any longitudinal reinforcement for the member. Up to 10 reinforcing bar definitions may be defined.



For each longitudinal reinforcing bar you can: •



Specify the minimum clear end distance for “C” and “D”.



•



Select the reinforcing bar size.



•



Select the reinforcing bar grade.



•



Specify the horizontal location, “Xloc”, of the reinforcing bar.



•



Specify the vertical location, “Yloc”, of the reinforcing bar.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



653



Rectangular beam (54)



•



Select a value from the Length Definition drop-down combo-box to define the end constraints of the reinforcing bar within the member length. Depending on your choice, additional information is then entered in the “L”, “C”, or “D” fields. There are five choices:



Full Length - The reinforcing bar extends the full length of the member (minus the minimum clear end distance on each end). The L, C, and D fields are disabled. Centered - You can specify a fixed length, “L” for the reinforcing bar which the component will center in the length of the member. The C and D fields are disabled. Known L, C - You can specify a fixed length, “L” for the reinforcing bar and a distance C from the start of the member. The D field is disabled. Known L, D - You can specify a fixed length, “L” for the reinforcing bar and a distance D from the end of the member. The C field is disabled Known C, D - You can specify a distance C from the start of the member and a distance D from the end of the member. The L field is disabled. Values for L, C, and D all take the natural geometry of the beam ends (skewed and/or battered) into account. Notches in the end of a beam, though they will naturally clip any bar they intersect, will not affect the L, C, and D values. •



Specify the relative location for longitudinal bars using the following icons:



Top and bottom left:



Top and bottom right:



Top and bottom left and right: Top left:



Top right:



Top left and right:



Automated Reinforcement Layout



654



Rectangular beam (54)



Bottom left:



Bottom right:



Bottom left and right:



Stem mesh This tab allows you to define mesh reinforcement in the stem of the beam.



•



Select the mesh size.



•



Select the mesh grade.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



655



Rectangular beam (54)



•



Specify the right side clear cover, “C1”.



•



Specify the left side clear cover, “C2”.



•



Specify the bottom clear cover, “C3”.



•



Specify the top clear cover, “C4”.



•



Specify the left and right end distances, “d1” and “d2”, to the first wire.



Specify whether the mesh is continuous over the full length of the member or is used only at the spandrel end(s). If Yes is selected from the list, the mesh extends the full length of the member (less the d1 and d2 end distances and the L1/L2 fields are disabled). If No is selected from the list, mesh can be defined at each end using the “L1” and “L2” fields. If any stem holes are present, the component should “trim” the mesh around the hole using the top cover (C3) dimension as a clearance.



Stem stirrups Use the following options to define the stem stirrups in ledge beams: Option



Description No stirrup



90-degree closed stirrup



Automated Reinforcement Layout



656



Rectangular beam (54)



Option



Description 135-degree closed stirrup



U-Bar pairs



135-degree open stirrup



Automated Reinforcement Layout



657



Rectangular beam (54)



Composite This tab allows you to define reinforcement that will be used later to create a composite member component.



•



Select the reinforcing bar size.



•



Select the reinforcing bar grade.



•



Specify the reinforcing bar embedment, “A”.



•



Specify the reinforcing bar projection, “B”.



•



Specify the side cover, ‘C1”.



•



Specify the left end distance, “d1”, and right end distance, “d2”, from the end of the beam to the centerline of the first reinforcing bar.



•



Specify the quantity, “X”, and spacing, “S1”, of the first group of reinforcing bar at the left end.



•



Specify the quantity, “Y”, and spacing, “S2”, of the first group of reinforcing bar at the right end.



•



Specify the maximum reinforcing bar spacing, “S3”, to be used between the end groups.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



658



Rectangular beam (54)



End rebar This tab allows you to define reinforcement at the ends of the member.



•



Specify up to 6 horizontal and 6 vertical end U-bars.



•



Specify the end clearance for the horizontal U-bars.



For each horizontal U-bar: •



Specify the height, “Ht”, of the horizontal U-bar.



•



Select the reinforcing bar size and grade.



•



Specify the reinforcing bar side cover, “C1”.



•



Specify the reinforcing bar “leg length”.



•



Specify the end clearance for the vertical U-bars.



For each vertical U-bar: •



Specify the horizontal location, “X loc”, of the vertical U-bar.



•



Select the reinforcing bar size and grade.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



659



Rectangular beam (54)



•



Specify the reinforcing bar top cover, “C2”.



•



Specify the reinforcing bar bottom cover,”C3”.



•



Specify the reinforcing bar “leg length”.



Attributes This tab lets you define the general attribute information for the reinforcement created by the component.



For each attribute: •



Specify the Serie value.



•



Specify the Starting Number for the category.



•



Enter the category name.



•



Enter the Class number



3.6 Ledge spandrel (55) Creates typical flexural, shear, and ledge reinforcement for a ledge spandrel. Reinforcement created •



Prestress straight or depressed strands for flexural reinforcement in the spandrel stem



•



Mild longitudinal bars for flexural reinforcement



•



Mesh for shear reinforcement in the spandrel stem



•



Stirrups for shear reinforcement in the spandrel stem



•



Reinforcement mesh in the spandrel ledge



•



Stirrups for shear reinforcement in the spandrel ledge



Automated Reinforcement Layout



660



Ledge spandrel (55)



•



Mild reinforcement in the ends of the spandrel



Use for Situation Straight and depressed prestress strands Varying strand pattern and strand number To define longitudinal reinforcement in the stem When you want reinforcement mesh in the stem When you want stirrups in the spandrel stem To use reinforcement mesh in the spandrel ledge To use stirrups in the spandrel ledge To add mild reinforcement to the spandrel ends Before you start •



Create the concrete ledge spandrel.



•



Calculate the required area and quantity of strands and other reinforcement.



•



Define other reinforcement properties, such as debonding and pull values.



Defining properties Use the following tabs in the Ledge spandrel automated reinforcement layout (55) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab



Contents



See also



Strand Template The allowable grid points for strands within the spandrel cross section.



Strand template (page 663)



Strand Pattern



Strand pattern (page 663)



The actual strand definitions.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



661



Ledge spandrel (55)



Tab



Contents



See also



Strand Profile



The vertical profile for strands in the spandrel.



Longitudinal Rebar



Definitions for Reinforcing bar additional mild steel and bar group reinforcement in the properties spandrel. Reinforcement may be defined with a variety of parametric forms.



Stem Mesh



Definition for the Reinforcing bar mesh to be used in the and bar group spandrel stem. Mesh properties can run the full length of the spandrel, or be placed in short sections at either end. Mesh size, spacing, clearances, and length are all entered here.



Stem Stirrups



Definitions for the bent bar reinforcement in the spandrel stem, including stirrup shape, bar size, end clearance, number of bars, and bar spacing in eight zones along the length of the spandrel.



Stem stirrups (page 667)



Ledge Mesh



Definition for the mesh to be used to reinforce the spandrel ledge. Mesh runs the full length of the spandrel. Mesh size, spacing, and clearances are all entered here.



Reinforcing bar and bar group properties



Ledge Stirrups



Definitions for the bent bar reinforcement in the spandrel ledge, including stirrup shape, bar size, end



Ledge rebar (page 669)



Automated Reinforcement Layout



662



Strand profile (page 664)



Ledge spandrel (55)



Tab



Contents clearance, number of bars, and bar spacing in eight zones along the length of the spandrel.



See also



End Rebar



Definitions for the Reinforcing bar bent bar and bar group reinforcement in the properties spandrel ends, including position, orientation, bar size and length, cover, and end clearance. Up to 6 horizontal bars may be defined.



Attributes



Name, class, and numbering properties of the strands, stirrups, and mesh bars.



Reinforcing bar and bar group properties



Strand template You can specify the arrangement of vertical strand planes in the spandrel, along with the vertical distances between grid points in each plane. Strands are defined by their row and column number within the grid, but the template allows for a mixture of regular and irregular grid points with respect to both the horizontal and vertical axes. Use the Grid spacing along X and Grid spacing along Y fields to define a list of distances between successive planes and grid points. For regularly spaced points, you may use a multiplier value, for example, 4*6”.



Strand pattern You place strands in the spandrel by defining the grid points from the strand template for each end of the strand element. You also define size, and other reinforcement properties for the strands here. A row of data on this tab can be thought of as a group. All the strands defined in one group share the same properties and start and stop rows. A group may also refer to a list of columns in the strand template, letting you use one group definition to create a set of strands.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



663



Ledge spandrel (55)



Strand profile Strands may be straight (though not necessarily horizontal), or depressed, using one or two control points. Note that all strands use the same general profile. Use the following options to define the strand profile: Option



Description Straight 1-pt depressed



2-pt depressed variable 2-pt depressed fixed



You specify the depress positions A and B as either a fixed distance or as a percentage of the member length.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



664



Ledge spandrel (55)



Longitudinal rebar This tab allows you to define any longitudinal reinforcement for the member. Up to 10 reinforcing bar definitions may be defined.



For each longitudinal reinforcing bar you can: •



Specify the minimum clear end distance for “C” and “D”.



•



Select the reinforcing bar size.



•



Select the reinforcing bar grade.



•



Specify the horizontal location, “Xloc”, of the reinforcing bar.



•



Specify the vertical location, “Yloc”, of the reinforcing bar.



For each longitudinal reinforcing bar you can: •



Specify the minimum clear end distance for “C” and “D”.



•



Select the reinforcing bar size.



•



Select the reinforcing bar grade.



•



Specify the horizontal location, “Xloc”, of the reinforcing bar.



•



Specify the vertical location, “Yloc”, of the reinforcing bar.



•



Select a value from the Length Definition list box to define the end constraints of the reinforcing bar within the member length. Depending on your choice, additional information is then entered in the “L”, “C”, or “D” fields. There are five choices:



Full Length - The reinforcing bar extends the full length of the member (minus the minimum clear end distance on each end). The L, C, and D fields are disabled. Centered - You can specify a fixed length, “L” for the reinforcing bar which the component will center in the length of the member. The C and D fields are disabled.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



665



Ledge spandrel (55)



Known L, C - You can specify a fixed length, “L” for the reinforcing bar and a distance C from the start of the member. The D field is disabled. Known L, D - You can specify a fixed length, “L” for the reinforcing bar and a distance D from the end of the member. The C field is disabled Known C, D - You can specify a distance C from the start of the member and a distance D from the end of the member. The L field is disabled. Values for L, C, and D all take the natural geometry of the beam ends (skewed and/or battered) into account. Notches in the end of a beam, though they will naturally clip any bar they intersect, will not affect the L, C, and D values. •



Specify the relative location for longitudinal bars using the following icons:



Top and bottom left:



Top and bottom right:



Top and bottom left and right: Top left:



Top right:



Top left and right:



Bottom left:



Bottom right:



Bottom left and right:



Automated Reinforcement Layout



666



Ledge spandrel (55)



Stem mesh This tab allows you to define mesh reinforcement in the stem of the spandrel. •



Select the mesh size.



•



Select the mesh grade.



•



Specify the right side clear cover, “C1”.



•



Specify the left side clear cover, “C2”.



•



Specify the bottom clear cover, “C3”.



•



Specify the top clear cover, “C4”.



•



Specify the left and right end distances, “d1” and “d2”, to the first wire.



•



Specify whether the mesh is continuous over the full length of the member or is used only at the spandrel end(s). If Yes is selected from the list, the mesh extends the full length of the member (less the d1 and d2 end distances and the L1/L2 fields are disabled). If No is selected from the list, mesh can be defined at each end using the “L1” and “L2” fields. If any stem holes are present, the component should “trim” the mesh around the hole using the top cover (C3) dimension as a clearance.



Stem stirrups Stirrups are defined in groups, and a row of data on this tab represents the definition for a group. All the stirrups defined in one group share the same properties, including stirrup type. Clear cover definitions apply to all groups. The following stirrup types may be used in ledge spandrels: Option



Description 90-degree closed stirrup



135-degree closed stirrup



Automated Reinforcement Layout



667



Ledge spandrel (55)



Option



Description Lapped pair



Fixed pair



Open U



Automated Reinforcement Layout



668



Ledge spandrel (55)



Ledge mesh This tab allows you to define ledge mesh reinforcement in the member.



•



Select the mesh size.



•



Select the mesh grade.



•



Specify the mesh right side cover, “C1”.



•



Specify the mesh left side cover, “C2”.



•



Specify the mesh bottom cover, “C3”.



•



Specify the mesh top cover, “C4”.



•



Specify the left end distance to first wire, “d1”.



•



Specify the right end distance to first wire, “d2”.



Mesh extends the full length of the spandrel, less the “d1” and “d2” end dimensions.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



669



Ledge spandrel (55)



Ledge rebar Ledge stirrups are defined in groups, using the same concept as stem stirrups. The following ledge stirrup types may be used: Option



Description Bent U-bar stirrup



Bent U-Bar pairs



90-degree stirrup



135-degree stirrup



End rebar This tab allows you to define reinforcement at the ends of the member. •



Specify up to 6 horizontal and 6 vertical end U-bars.



•



Specify the end clearance for the horizontal U-bars.



For each horizontal U-bar:



Automated Reinforcement Layout



670



Ledge spandrel (55)



•



Specify the height, “Ht”, of the horizontal U-bar.



•



Select the reinforcing bar size and grade.



•



Specify the reinforcing bar side cover, “C1”.



•



Specify the reinforcing bar “leg length”.



•



Specify the end clearance for the vertical U-bars.



For each vertical U-bar: •



Specify the horizontal location, “X loc”, of the vertical U-bar.



•



Select the reinforcing bar size and grade.



•



Specify the reinforcing bar top cover, “C2”.



•



Specify the reinforcing bar bottom cover,”C3”.



•



Specify the reinforcing bar “leg length”.



Attributes This tab lets you define the general attribute information for the reinforcement created by the component.



For each attribute: •



Specify the Serie value.



•



Specify the Starting Number for the category.



•



Enter the category name.



•



Enter the Class number



Automated Reinforcement Layout



671



Rectangular spandrel (56)



3.7 Rectangular spandrel (56) Creates typical flexural and shear reinforcement for a rectangular spandrel. Reinforcement created •



Prestress straight or depressed strands for flexural reinforcement in the spandrel



•



Mild longitudinal bars for flexural reinforcement



•



Mesh for shear reinforcement in the spandrel



•



Stirrups for shear reinforcement in the spandrel



•



Mild reinforcement in the ends of the spandrel



Use for Situation



More information



Straight and depressed prestress strands Varying strand pattern and strand number To define longitudinal reinforcement in the spandrel When you want reinforcement mesh in the spandrel When you want stirrups in the spandrel To add mild reinforcement to the spandrel ends Before you start •



Create the concrete rectangular spandrel.



•



Calculate the required area and quantity of strands and other reinforcement.



•



Define other reinforcement properties, such as debonding and pull values.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



672



Rectangular spandrel (56)



Defining properties Use the following tabs in the Rectangular spandrel automated reinforcement layout (56) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab



Contents



See also



Strand Template The allowable grid points for strands within the spandrel cross section.



Strand template (page 674)



Strand Pattern



The actual strand definitions.



Strand pattern (page 674)



Strand Profile



The vertical profile for strands in the spandrel.



Strand profile (page 675)



Longitudinal Rebar



Definitions for Longitudinal additional mild steel rebar reinforcement in the (page 676) spandrel. Reinforcement may be defined with a variety of parametric forms.



Stem Mesh



Definition for the Stem mesh mesh to be used in the (page 678) spandrel. Mesh can run the full length of the spandrel, or be placed in short sections at either end. Mesh size, spacing, clearances, and length are all entered here.



Stem Stirrups



Definitions for the Stem stirrups bent bar (page 679) reinforcement in the spandrel, including stirrup shape, bar size, end clearance, number of bars, and bar spacing in eight zones along the length of the spandrel.



End Rebar



Definitions for the bent bar reinforcement in the spandrel ends,



Automated Reinforcement Layout



673



End rebar (page 680)



Rectangular spandrel (56)



Tab



Attributes



Contents including position, orientation, bar size and length, cover, and end clearance. Up to 6 horizontal bars may be defined. Name, class, and numbering properties of the strands, stirrups, and mesh bars.



See also



Attributes (page 682)



Strand template You can specify the arrangement of vertical strand planes in the spandrel, along with the vertical distances between grid points in each plane. Strands are defined by their row and column number within the grid, but the template allows for a mixture of regular and irregular grid points with respect to both the horizontal and vertical axes. Use the X- and Y-Axis Grid Definition fields to define a list of distances between successive planes and grid points. For regularly spaced points, you may use a multiplier value, for example, 4*6”.



Strand pattern You place strands in the spandrel by defining the grid points from the strand template for each end of the strand element. You also define size, and other reinforcement properties for the strands here. A row of data on this tab can be thought of as a group. All the strands defined in one group share the same properties and start and stop rows. A group may also refer to a list of columns in the strand template, letting you use one group definition to create a set of strands.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



674



Rectangular spandrel (56)



Strand profile Strands may be straight (though not necessarily horizontal), or depressed, using one or two control points. Note that all strands use the same general profile. Use the following options to define the strand profile: Option



Description Straight



1-pt depressed



2-pt depressed variable



2-pt depressed fixed



Automated Reinforcement Layout



675



Rectangular spandrel (56)



You specify the depress positions A and B as either a fixed distance or as a percentage of the member length. NOTE If no specific value is given the “Ht” shall be calculated as Minimum. So the strand will be straight unless it needs to be depressed because of the above strand going below the straight position.



Longitudinal rebar This tab allows you to define any longitudinal reinforcement for the member. Up to 10 reinforcing bar definitions may be defined.



For each longitudinal reinforcing bar you can: •



Specify the minimum clear end distance for “C” and “D”.



•



Select the reinforcing bar size.



•



Select the reinforcing bar grade.



•



Specify the horizontal location, “Xloc”, of the reinforcing bar.



•



Specify the vertical location, “Yloc”, of the reinforcing bar.



•



Select a value from the Length Definition list box to define the end constraints of the reinforcing bar within the member length. Depending on your choice, additional information is then entered in the “L”, “C”, or “D” fields. There are five choices:



Full Length - The reinforcing bar extends the full length of the member (minus the minimum clear end distance on each end). The L, C, and D fields are disabled.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



676



Rectangular spandrel (56)



Centered - You can specify a fixed length, “L” for the reinforcing bar which the component will center in the length of the member. The C and D fields are disabled. Known L, C - You can specify a fixed length, “L” for the reinforcing bar and a distance C from the start of the member. The D field is disabled. Known L, D - You can specify a fixed length, “L” for the reinforcing bar and a distance D from the end of the member. The C field is disabled Known C, D - You can specify a distance C from the start of the member and a distance D from the end of the member. The L field is disabled. Values for L, C, and D all take the natural geometry of the beam ends (skewed and/or battered) into account. Notches in the end of a beam, though they will naturally clip any bar they intersect, will not affect the L, C, and D values. •



Specify the relative location for longitudinal bars using the following icons:



Top and bottom left:



Top and bottom right:



Top and bottom left and right: Top left:



Top right:



Top left and right:



Bottom left:



Bottom right:



Automated Reinforcement Layout



677



Rectangular spandrel (56)



Bottom left and right:



Stem mesh This tab allows you to define mesh reinforcement in the stem of the spandrel.



•



Select the mesh size.



•



Select the mesh grade.



•



Specify the right side clear cover, “C1”.



•



Specify the left side clear cover, “C2”.



•



Specify the bottom clear cover, “C3”.



•



Specify the top clear cover, “C4”.



•



Specify the left and right end distances, “d1” and “d2”, to the first wire.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



678



Rectangular spandrel (56)



•



Specify whether the mesh is continuous over the full length of the member or is used only at the spandrel end(s). If Yes is selected from the list, the mesh extends the full length of the member (less the d1 and d2 end distances and the L1/L2 fields are disabled). If No is selected from the list, mesh can be defined at each end using the “L1” and “L2” fields. If any stem holes are present, the component should “trim” the mesh around the hole using the top cover (C3) dimension as a clearance.



Stem stirrups Stirrups are defined in groups, and a row of data on this tab represents the definition for a group. All the stirrups defined in one group share the same properties, including stirrup type. Clear cover definitions apply to all groups. Use the following options to define the stem stirrups in rectangular spandrels: Option



Description 90-degree closed stirrup



135-degree closed stirrup



U-Bar lapped pairs



Automated Reinforcement Layout



679



Rectangular spandrel (56)



Option



Description U-Bar fixed pairs



Open U stirrup



Automated Reinforcement Layout



680



Rectangular spandrel (56)



End rebar This tab allows you to define reinforcement at the ends of the member.



•



Specify up to 6 horizontal and 6 vertical end U-bars.



•



Specify the end clearance for the horizontal U-bars.



For each horizontal U-bar: •



Specify the height, “Ht”, of the horizontal U-bar.



•



Select the reinforcing bar size and grade.



•



Specify the reinforcing bar side cover, “C1”.



•



Specify the reinforcing bar “leg length”.



•



Specify the end clearance for the vertical U-bars.



For each vertical U-bar: •



Specify the horizontal location, “X loc”, of the vertical U-bar.



•



Select the reinforcing bar size and grade.



•



Specify the reinforcing bar top cover, “C2”.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



681



Rectangular spandrel (56)



•



Specify the reinforcing bar bottom cover,”C3”.



•



Specify the reinforcing bar “leg length”.



Attributes This tab lets you define the general attribute information for the reinforcement created by the component.



For each attribute: •



Specify the Serie value.



•



Specify the Starting Number for the category.



•



Enter the category name.



•



Enter the Class number



3.8 Columns (57) Creates typical longitudinal and tie reinforcement for a column. Reinforcement created •



Prestress strands for longitudinal reinforcement in a column



•



Mild longitudinal bars for longitudinal reinforcement in a column



Automated Reinforcement Layout



682



Columns (57)



•



Reinforcement for composite rectangular columns



Use for Situation



More information



To define longitudinal prestress reinforcement size and location To define longitudinal mild reinforcement size and extent To define tie size and spacings Before you start •



Create the column.



•



Calculate the required area and quantity of strands and other reinforcement.



•



Define other reinforcement properties.



Defining properties Use the following tabs in the Column layout dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab



Contents



See also



Strand reinforcement



A description of the geometric layout of pre-stress strands in the column, as well as other attributes of the strands



Strand reinforcement (page 684)



Longitudinal rebar



The definition of the longitudinal reinforcement to be



Longitudinal rebar (page 685)



Automated Reinforcement Layout



683



Columns (57)



Tab



Contents used in the primary section of the column.



See also



Primary ties



The definition of the Primary ties ties used in the (page 690) primary section of the column, including size, shape, geometry, and spacing.



Secondary reinforcement



The definition of the Secondary longitudinal bar and reinforcement ties to be used in the (page 697) secondary section(s) of the column.



Circular column



The definition of the reinforcement parametrics for circular columns.



Circular column (page 699)



Attributes



The definition ofthe general properties for the reinforcement created by the component.



Attributes (page 700)



Automated Reinforcement Layout



684



Columns (57)



Strand reinforcement This tab lets you define the strand reinforcement in the primary section of the column. Up to 8 strands may be defined.



•



Select the size of the strand at each location.



•



Select the grade of strand at each location.



•



Specify the pull for each strand.



•



Specify strand-centerline-to-surface dimension, “de”. For corner strands 1-4, this distance defines the strand centerline position relative to both adjacent column faces. For strands 5-8, the strand is located on the face centerline, offset from the face by distance “de”.



Longitudinal rebar This tab lets you define the longitudinal reinforcement in the primary section of the column. Longitudinal bars are presumed to run the entire length of the column (less the End Clearance distance at each end of the member).



Automated Reinforcement Layout



685



Columns (57)



Standard longitudinal reinforcement configurations are provided in a convenient drop-down, and up to 12 bars may be defined.



•



Select the desired reinforcement pattern from the drop-down combo-box. There are 10 predefined patterns to choose from.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



686



Columns (57)



4 Bar Symmetrical



6 Bar X-X



6 Bar Y-Y



Automated Reinforcement Layout



687



Columns (57)



8 Bar Symmetrical



8 Bar X-X



8 Bar Y-Y



Automated Reinforcement Layout



688



Columns (57)



10 Bar X-X



10 Bar Y-Y



12 Bar X-X



Automated Reinforcement Layout



689



Columns (57)



12 Bar Y-Y



•



Specify the reinforcing bar-centerline-to-surface dimension, “de”. This value is used to locate most of the bars in each pattern.



•



Specify the dimension, “d1”, which is used in only the 10- and 12-bar patterns to locate off-axis bars. This value should default to the half the appropriate primary section dimension less “de”, divided by 2.



•



Specify the end clear distance for both ends of the longitudinal reinforcing bars.



•



Select the size of the bar at each bar location.



•



Select the grade of bar at each bar location.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



690



Columns (57)



Primary ties This tab lets you define the reinforcing ties in the primary section of the column. Primary ties are distributed along the entire length of the column. Standard tie configurations are provided in a convenient list.



•



First select the desired tie reinforcement pattern from the list box. There are 16 predefined patterns to choose from. The longitudinal reinforcing bar selection will affect which of these patterns can be used. The component will verify that the primary tie configuration correlates with the primary longitudinal reinforcement configuration. Furthermore, the location or stirrup in section may depend on the location of longitudinal bars (e.g. 8bar X-X).



Automated Reinforcement Layout



691



Columns (57)



4 Bar Symmetrical



6/10 Bar X-X (A)



6/10 Bar X-X (B)



Automated Reinforcement Layout



692



Columns (57)



6/10 Bar Y-Y (A)



6/10 Bar Y-Y (B)



8 Bar Symmetrical (A)



Automated Reinforcement Layout



693



Columns (57)



8 Bar Symmetrical (B)



8 Bar Symmetrical (C)



8 Bar X-X (A)



Automated Reinforcement Layout



694



Columns (57)



8 Bar X-X (B)



8 Bar Y-Y (A)



8 Bar Y-Y (B)



Automated Reinforcement Layout



695



Columns (57)



12 Bar X-X (A)



12 Bar X-X (B)



12 Bar Y-Y (A)



Automated Reinforcement Layout



696



Columns (57)



12 Bar Y-Y (B)



•



Select the size of the tie bar.



•



Select the grade of the tie bar.



•



Select the tie hook type. The options are 90° and 135°.



•



Specify the minimum clear cover, “c1”. The component must verify that with the clear cover specified the tie properly fits around the longitudinal reinforcing bar with the locations specified in previous tab.



•



Specify the distance, “d1”, to the centerline of the first tie from the top and bottom. Often there are anchor bolt pockets at the bottom of columns. The component should interpret the “d1” distance to be above those pockets.



•



Specify the quantity, “X”, and spacing, “s1”, of the first group of ties at top and bottom.



•



Then specify the maximum spacing, “s2”, of primary ties throughout the length of the column.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



697



Columns (57)



Secondary reinforcement This tab allows you to define longitudinal and tie reinforcement in the secondary section(s) of the column. The component will automatically determine these sections from the column geometry.



•



Select the bar size for the secondary longitudinal bars.



•



Enter the grade for the secondary longitudinal bars.



•



Specify the minimum clear cover, “c2”, from the secondary longitudinal bars to the column face.



•



Specify the end clear distance from the top and bottom of each secondary section to the ends of the secondary longitudinal bars.



•



Select the bar size for the secondary ties.



•



Enter the grade for the secondary ties.



•



Select the secondary tie hook type. The options are 90° and 135°.



•



Specify the distance, “d1”, to first and second secondary ties from the top and bottom of the “secondary” section.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



698



Columns (57)



Circular column This tab allows you to define the reinforcement parametrics for circular columns. The component will only create reinforcement in constant diameter members. Tapered columns and circular columns with ledges are not supported.



•



First specify the desired number of main bars in the column, from 4-12.



•



Select the size of the main bar.



•



Select the grade of the main bar.



•



Select the size of the tie bar.



•



Select the grade of the tie bar.



•



Specify the tie clear cover, “c1”.



•



Specify the tie lap dimension.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



699



Columns (57)



•



Specify the top end distance, “d1”, from the centerline of the first tie to the top of the column.



•



Specify the bottom end distance, “d2”, from the centerline of the last tie to the bottom of the column. Often there are anchor bolt pockets at the bottom of columns. The component should interpret the “d2” distance to be above those pockets.



•



Specify the quantity, “X”, and spacing, “s1”, of the first group of ties at top and bottom.



•



Specify the maximum spacing, “s2”, of primary ties throughout the length of the column.



Attributes This tab allows you to define the general attribute information for the reinforcement created by the component.



For each category: •



Specify the Serie value.



•



Specify the Start number for the category.



•



Enter the category name.



•



Enter the Class number



•



Minimum cut size: Define the minimum length of the boundary of cut/hole, to be considered as cut in this field. The default value is 200 mm.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



700



Topping (58)



3.9 Topping (58) Use the Topping (58) component to model typical toppings along with their typical reinforcement. Defining properties Use the following tabs in the Topping (58) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab



Contents



See also



Topping



Method of topping, Topping configuration of elevation/ (page 701) thickness of topping, mesh to be created in the topping.



Advanced



Thickness of topping at each Advanced point selected while defining (page 703) polygonal area for topping.



Attributes



The required mesh and concrete attributes.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



701



Topping (58)



Topping



Option Elevation is specified



Automated Reinforcement Layout



Description Select the method to use to specifiy the elevation of the exterior boundary surface of the topping: •



Absolute elevation, EL: you can to specify the top surface elevation relative to elevation 0’-0’’.



•



Relative thickness, H: you can specify the top surface as a uniform thickness above the underlying precast floor units.



•



Use control points: Tekla Structures uses the polygon input points as the actual 3 dimensional nodes of the top



702



Topping (58)



Option



Description surface of the toppings. Use this option to place a topping over any sloped surface.



Elevation value



Enter an appropriate value based on the choice picked in the list box above. This input box is grayed out if you have selected the Use control points option.



Topping configuration



Specify whether the topping is integral with the underlying precast unit (monolithic) or poured on site.



Concrete material



Specify the concrete strength for the topping, from the material catalog.



Reinforcing mesh



Select the mesh reinforcement from the mesh catalog.



Advanced Use the options on this tab to alter the elevation of any individual node: •



Control point indexes: you can specify one control point or multiple control point indexes simultaneously.



•



Elevation: You can overwrite Elevation (thickness at individual control points.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



703



Wash (59)



3.10 Wash (59) Use the Wash (59) component to model typical washes along with their typical reinforcement. Use for



Before you start Create slabs using the Create concrete beam command or with a slab component. NOTE You cannot use the Wash (59) component in slabs that are created as a polygon plates, such as slabs created with Create concrete slab command. Defining properties Use the following tabs in the Wash (59) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab



Contents



See also



Wash



Method of wash, Wash configuration of the (page 705) elevation/thickness and size of wash, recess depth, mesh to be created in the wash.



Advanced



Thickness of wash at each Advanced point selected while defining (page 707) the exterior and interior boundary.



Attributes



The required mesh and concrete attributes.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



704



Wash (59)



Picking order



1.



Select the slab objects. If the slabs are created with a component, activate the Select objects in components switch before selecting slabs.



2.



Click middle mouse button.



3.



Pick points counterclockwise to indicate external boundary (points 1 to 4 in the picture above).



4.



Click middle mouse button outside the external boundary.



5.



Pick points clockwise to indicate internal boundary (points 5 to 8 in the picture above).



6.



Click middle mouse button somewhere along the internal boundary.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



705



Wash (59)



Wash



Specify the wash step dimensions, D1 and D2, to define the top elevation of the internal boundary relative to the surface of the precast floor units. Note that D1 and/or D2 can be zero (0.00). Option Elevation is specified



Automated Reinforcement Layout



Description Select the method to use to specifiy the elevation of the exterior boundary surface of the wash: •



Absolute elevation, EL: you can to specify the top surface elevation relative to elevation 0’-0’’.



•



Relative thickness, H: you can specify the top surface as a uniform thickness above the underlying precast floor units.



706



Wash (59)



Option •



Description Use control points: Tekla Structures uses the polygon input points as the actual 3 dimensional nodes of the top surface of the wash. Use this option to place a wash over any sloped surface.



Elevation value



Enter an appropriate value based on the choice picked in the list box above. This input box is grayed out if you have selected the Use control points option.



Topping configuration



Specify whether the wash is integral with the underlying precast unit (monolithic) or poured on site.



Concrete material



Specify the concrete strength for the wash from the material catalog.



Reinforcing mesh



Select the mesh reinforcement from the mesh catalog.



Advanced Use the options on this tab to alter the elevation of any individual node: •



Exterior control point indexes: you can specify one control point or multiple control point indexes simultaneously.



•



Elevation: you can specify the actual elevation/ thickness (thickness at individual control points).



•



Interior control point indexes: you can specify one control point or multiple control point indexes simultaneously.



•



D1: you can change the thickness at each interior control point.



•



D2: you can change the recess depth at individual control point.



3.11 Hollowcore reinforcement strands (60) The Hollowcore “Automated Reinforcement Generator” (HC-ARG) component enables Tekla Structures to accurately model all typical hollowcore



Automated Reinforcement Layout



707



Hollowcore reinforcement strands (60)



reinforcement. Use the tabs in the component dialog box to load a previously saved HC (Hollowcore) reinforcement scheme, or new reinforcement scheme. Defining properties Use the following tabs in the Hollowcore reinforcement strands (60) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab



Contents



See also



Strand template



The allowable grid points Strand template for strands within the (page 708) stem cross section. You can specify the number and arrangement of vertical strand planes in each stem, along with the vertical distances between grid points in each plane. Strands are defined by their row and column number within the grid, but the template allows for a mixture of regular and irregular grid points with respect to the vertical axis.



Strand pattern



The actual strand Strand pattern definitions. You place (page 709) strands in the stem by defining the grid points from the strand template for each end of the strand element. You also define size, and other reinforcement properties for the strands.



Attributes



Strands, Store strand Attributes code, Strand code, Create (page 711) strand at voids.



Strand template Creates strands located at specific grid positions. Grid Spacing along X:



Automated Reinforcement Layout



708



Hollowcore reinforcement strands (60)



Hollowcore reinforcement created •



Use grid spacing to define grid spacing values for the X axis, separating values with commas or spaces.



•



Multiplier values may be applied to define a repeating series of values, e.g., 8*2 indicates 8 holes with a 2 unit spacing.



•



First value is the distance from the left edge of the plank; each successive value is the distance to the next grid point.



Grid Spacing along Y: •



Use grid spacing to define grid spacing values for the X axis, separating values with commas or spaces.



•



First value is the distance from the bottom edge of the beam; each successive value is the distance to the next grid point.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



709



Hollowcore reinforcement strands (60)



Strand pattern Creates the vertical row number for the strand. Hollowcore strand pattern created •



Use grid spacing to specify grid spacing values for the X-axis, separating values with commas.



•



Enter one or more column numbers and/or column ranges in the strand template at which strand should be generated.



•



Select strand size generated for this strand group.



•



Select strand grade generated for this strand group.



•



Specify strand pull for the strand group.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



710



Hollowcore reinforcement strands (60)



Attributes Specify properties for strands, store strand codes, strand code, and create strand at voids. Hollowcore basic reinforcement properties •



Strands – Specify all appropriate information in this tab. This can be in the reinforcement mark definition.



•



Store strand code – With option Store strand code you may choose to store (or not) a user-defined textual attribute TS_STRAND_CODE to part.



•



Strand code – In field Strand code you may enter a string template for the value of the above mentioned user-defined attribute. The default template is the total number of created strands. The template may contain any text and the predefined fields for:



•



•



%NUMBERS – is the numbers of created strands with different sizes and/or grades e.g. 10 (for one size & grade) or 6+4 (if two sizes and/or grades has been used).



•



%SIZES – sizes of the strands e.g 1/2 or 1/2 + 3/8.



•



%GRADES – grades of strands.



Create strand at voids – The option Yes will show the strands even though the voids are present. The option No will not show the strand if void is present at any location along the strand path.



3.12 Post-tensioning (61) The Post-tensioning (61) component enables Tekla Structures to accurately model most post-tensioning profiles and attributes. Use the tabs in the



Automated Reinforcement Layout



711



Post-tensioning (61)



component dialog box to load a previously saved PT (post-tensioning) tendon scheme, or a new tendon scheme. Defining properties Use the following tabs in the Post-tensioning (61) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab



Contents



See also



Tendon properties



Tendon size, Grade, Tendon Number of tendons, properties Spacing between tendons, (page 712) Rotation angle, Grouted system.



Tendon profile



Tendon profile, Start point Tendon profile offset A1, End point offset (page 713) A2, Sway drape D, Bend radius R, Width W, Centerline Offset, Loop count.



Attributes



Enter the tendon properties.



Tendon properties Use the options on this tab to define the following properties: Option



Description



Tendon size and grade



Select the tendon size and grade from the catalog of available options.



Number of tendons



Enter the number of tendons in the group.



Spacing between tendons, S



If you have specified more than one tendon, input the spacing (S) between tendons.



Rotation angle



Specify the rotation angle of tendon/tendon group around the input points from the default plane. The default plane is the plane which is parallel to the“strong axis”of the part.



Grouted system



Specify whether the tendon is to be a grouted system or a nongrouted system. This option



Automated Reinforcement Layout



712



Post-tensioning (61)



Option



Description defines whether Tekla Structures uses the strand in determining the ultimate capacity. Furthermore, you can input custom or vendor specific posttensioning information, including unique and/or multiple tendon systems, grease thickness, jacket material, jacket thickness, and jacket diameter.



Tendon profile You have the following options: Option



Description Straight



Parabolic



Straight one point



Loop



Automated Reinforcement Layout



713



Post-tensioning (61)



Option



Description



Depending on the profile selected, you can input the required fields below: •



Start point offset A1



•



End point offset A2



•



Sway drape D



•



Bend radius R



•



Width W



•



Centerline Offset



•



Loop count



3.13 Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62) Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62) creates edge and corner reinforcement for concrete panels and slabs. You can reinforce solid or sandwich precast concrete panels, or vertical and horizontal cast-in-situ slabs. Objects created •



Reinforcement



Use for Situation



Description Slab with edge and corner reinforcement and diagonal bars around openings



Limitations Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62) does not create the slab main reinforcement. The main reinforcement can be created using slab reinforcement components, for example, Pilecap reinforcement (76), Pad footing (77), Slab bars (18), or Reinforcement mesh array in area (89). The



Automated Reinforcement Layout



714



Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62)



main reinforcement can also be created by using the reinforcement creation commands on the Concrete tab. Before you start Create a panel or a slab. Selection order 1.



Select the main part (panel or slab). The reinforcement is created.



See also Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62): Picture tab (page 715) Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62): Edge/Diag bars tab (page 717) Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62): Horizontal/Vertical U bars tab (page 718)



Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62): Picture tab



Use the Picture tab to control the edge and corner reinforcements, the cutouts, and the corner cutouts in the Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62) modeling tool. Reinforcement Option



Description Define how the corners are reinforced.



Diagonal corner bars are created to an opening.



Diagonal corner bars are not created to an opening.



Aligned with slab slope



Select whether or not the edge bars, diagonal bars and U bars are aligned with the slope of a slab that has different corner thicknesses. The default value is Yes.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



715



Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62)



Cutouts Option



Description Edge bars are not created to the cutout. Edge bars are created above the cutout for the defined length. Edge bars are created above the cutout. Edge bars are created to the cutout.



Reinforce opening



Select whether openings are reinforced.



Max block cut size



Define the size limit for the cutouts that affects the edge and corner reinforcement and the diagonal bar creation. Edge and corner reinforcement are not created to cutouts that are smaller than the defined size. Diagonal bars are not created to cutouts that are smaller than the defined size.



Corner cutouts Option



Description Edge bars on both sides of the corner cutout are bent. This option overrides the Corner bar options 1, 2, and 3. Both the edge bars and the U bars are moved a distance equal to the length of the shorter side of the cutout. No bars are moved. Edge bars are created as if there was no cutout.



Max corner cut out size



Define the size limit for the corner cutouts.



Min hole size



Define a size limit for the holes.



Edge or corner reinforcement are not created to cutouts that are smaller than the defined size. Edge and corner reinforcements are not created around holes that are smaller than the size limit. If the hole is not rectangular or round, the size of the



Automated Reinforcement Layout



716



Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62)



Option



Description hole is determined by the maximum dimension of the bounding box around the hole. For example, if you do not want to create edge or corner reinforcement around holes that are 200 mm or smaller, enter 200.



Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62): Edge/Diag bars tab



Use the Edge bars and Diag bars tabs to control the edge and diagonal reinforcing bar properties, reinforcing bar overlapping, and concrete cover thickness in the Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62) modeling tool. Reinforcing bar properties Option



Description



Prefix



Prefix for the part position number.



Start number



Starting number for the part position number.



Name



Name that is shown in drawings and reports.



Size



Diameter of the reinforcing bar.



Grade



Strength of the steel used in reinforcing bars.



Bending radius



Edge bar bending radius.



Class



Use the Class to group reinforcing bars. For example, you can display reinforcing bars of different classes in different colors.



Reinforcing bar overlap Option



Description



L1, L2, L3



Reinforcing bar overlapping length.



Number of reinforcing bars



Number of reinforcing bars in the reinforcing bar group.



Create as one group



Select whether the identical edge bars and diagonal bars are created as a group. The default value is Yes.



Concrete cover thickness Option C1, C2, C3, C4



Automated Reinforcement Layout



Description Bottom, top, and side concrete cover thickness for the edge and the diagonal bars.



717



Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62)



Minimum bar length Option Minimum bar length



Description Minimum length of the edge bars on the Edge bars tab. If the bar is shorten than the entered value, the bar is not created.



Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62): Horizontal/Vertical U bars tab



Use the Horizontal U bars and Vertical U bars tabs to control the U bar leg length, concrete cover thickness and reinforcing bar properties and spacing in the Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62) modeling tool. U bar length



Option



Description



1



U bar leg length.



2



Top, bottom, and side concrete cover thickness for U bars.



Reinforcing bars Option Create U bar



Description Select whether the U bars are created. In addition, on the Vertical U bars tab, you can select whether the vertical U bars are created using the same settings as the horizontal U bars. Same as horizontal and inside: vertical U bars use the same reinforcing bar settings and concrete cover value as the horizontal U bars, and the vertical U bars



Automated Reinforcement Layout



718



Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62)



Option



Description are placed so that they fit inside the horizontal U bars. Same as horizontal and outside: vertical U bars use the same reinforcing bar settings and concrete cover value as the horizontal U bars, and the vertical U bars are placed outside the horizontal U bars.



Prefix



Prefix for the part position number.



Start number



Starting number for the part position number.



Name



Name that is shown in drawings and reports.



Size



Diameter of the reinforcing bar.



Grade



Strength of the steel used in reinforcing bars.



Class



Use the Class to group reinforcing bars. For example, you can display reinforcing bars of different classes in different colors.



Bending radius



U bar bending radius.



U bar creation and spacing Option



Description



Ignore cuts smaller than



Cuts that are smaller than the entered value are ignored and do not affect the U bar placement.



Creation method



Select how the U bars are distributed.



Number of reinforcing bars



Number of U bars in the reinforcement.



Target spacing value



This field is available if you set the Creation method to Equal distribution by number of reinforcing bars. Target spacing value. Tekla Structures tries to distribute the U bars as closely as possible according to the entered value. This field is available if you set he Creation method to Equal distribution by target spacing value.



Exact spacing value



Exact spacing value. Tekla Structures creates fixed, equal spaces between the reinforcing bars.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



719



Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62)



Option



Description



By exact spacing



Define several spacing values between the U bars. Tekla Structures distributes the bars using the values you enter in the field. Enter all spacing values, separated by spaces. You can use multiplication to repeat spacing values. For example, enter 5*200 to create five spaces of 200 mm.



End distance Horizontal U bars:



Vertical U bars:



Option 1



Description U bar distance from the panel or the slab end.



Stirrups



Stirrups are created instead of U bars when the distance between the edges in the panel or the slab is so small that the U bars do not get the required cover thickness.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



720



Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62)



Position of scanning plane



Option



Description



1



U bar offset.



3.14 U Bar of concrete slab (63) Automatically generates U bars reinforcement for concrete slabs. Reinforcements •



Precast concrete RC slabs and PC panels (both solid and sandwich)



•



For cast-in-situ slabs (both vertical and horizontal).



Use for To create U bars to an already created concrete slab complete with its main and secondary reinforcement. Create the slab’s main reinforcement •



with existing slab reinforcement components (e.g. Pilecap reinforcement (76), Pad footing (77), Slab bars (18), Reinforcement mesh array in area (89))



•



manually with the tools on the Concrete toolbar (e.g. single bar, bar groups or mesh).



Before you start Existing components must be created previously in order to use this reinforcement tool. Defining properties Use the U bars tab to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab U bars



Contents



See also



Generate automatically U bar reinforcement for concrete slabs



Automated Reinforcement Layout



721



U bars (page 722)



U Bar of concrete slab (63)



U bars Use to define U bar properties.



Use the options on this tab to specify •



Prefix value.



•



Starting number.



•



Name.



•



Class number.



•



Reinforcing bar size and grade:



Automated Reinforcement Layout



722



U Bar of concrete slab (63)



Option



Description U Bar UB1



U Bar UB2



•



Bending radius.



•



Top concrete cover.



•



Bottom concrete cover.



•



Side concrete cover.



•



Top leg length.



•



Bottom leg length.



•



End dist



•



Creation method



•



Number of bars



•



Target spacing value



•



Exact spacing values



3.15 Wall panel (64) Creates reinforcement for different wall panels. Contains options to create strands and stirrups. Is suitable also for insulated wall panels. You can easily change the direction (horizontal or vertical) of most reinforcing bars. Automatically creates parallel or diagonal corner reinforcement around the openings and notches. Objects created This component contains the following reinforcement groups: •



Strands



•



Longitudinal reinforcing bars



Automated Reinforcement Layout



723



Wall panel (64)



•



Transverse mesh



•



Transverse straight reinforcing bars



•



Transverse closed stirrups



•



Reinforcement for openings



To omit any of these reinforcement groups, set the reinforcing bar size or the mesh grade to zero. Use for Situation



Description Reinforcement created with default settings for a wall panel with a door opening.



A cross section from the wall reinforcement.



Limitations Does not create reinforcement for the ledges in the wall.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



724



Wall panel (64)



Before you start Create the wall panel. Selection order 1.



Select the wall panel.



Strand template



Defines the strand positions with grid points within the wall cross section. Strands may only be located at the positions defined in this template, but the template allows for a mixture of regular and irregular points. Strand direction Changes the direction of strands in the wall. Grid Spacing along X Use to define grid spacing values for the x axis. Separate values with commas or spaces. The first value is the distance from the left edge of the spandrel. Each successive value is the distance to the next grid point.



TIP Use multiplier to define a repeating series of values. For example, 8*2 indicates eight holes with a two unit spacing. Grid Spacing along Y Use to define grid spacing values for the y axis. Separate values with commas or spaces. The first value is the distance from the bottom edge of the spandrel. Each successive value is the distance to the next grid point.



Strand pattern



Creates strands at the grid positions defined by a strand template. Same as left Use to simplify strand input.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



725



Wall panel (64)



•



Select Yes to use the row and debond information of the left end for the strands at the right end of the spandrel.



•



Select No to specify alternate row and debond information at each end of a strand.



Strand pattern definitions Use the strand template positions in the strand grid to specify the row and column for each end of the strand. Strands may have different grid row positions at each end, but a strand may not cross grid columns.



Field



Description



Left end Column



Enter the vertical row number in the strand template for the left end of the strand.



Left end Debond



Enter the debond length at the left end of the strand.



Right end Column



If Same as left is No, enter the vertical row number in the strand template for the right end of the strand.



Right end Debond



If Same as left is No, enter the debond length at the right end of the strand.



Rows



Enter a list of one or more row numbers and/or row ranges in the strand template at which a strand should be generated.



Size



Select the size of the strands.



Grade



Select the strand grade.



Pull



Enter the pull force of the strands.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



726



Wall panel (64)



Longitudinal rebar



Specify longitudinal mild reinforcement for the wall panel. Minimum end clear distance C & D Specify minimum end clearance distance for C and D fields. Rebar direction Use to change the direction of the longitudinal reinforcing bars. Length type Select a Length type to define the end constraints of the reinforcing bar group within the member length. Depending on your choice, enter additional information is in the L, C, or D fields. Option



Description



Full length



Reinforcing bar extends the full length of the wall panel – excluding the minimum end clear distance at each end. The L, C, and D fields are disabled.



Centered



Specify a fixed length L for the bar which the component centers in the length of the wall panel. The C and D fields are disabled.



Known L, C



Specify a fixed length L for the bar and a distance C from the start of the wall panel. The D field is disabled.



Known L, D



Specify a fixed length, L for the bar and a distance D from the end of the wall panel. The C field is disabled.



Known C, D



Specify a distance C and D from the end of the wall panel. The L field is disabled.



XLoc Specify the horizontal locations of the longitudinal reinforcing bars. YLoc Specify the vertical location of the longitudinal reinforcing bars.



Transverse mesh



Specify mesh for transverse reinforcement in the wall panel. Mesh properties Select the mesh from the catalog and Tekla Structures fills the other fields automatically.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



727



Wall panel (64)



Layer properties You can specify one to three different layers of mesh. Each mesh can be different or identical.



Option



Description



Side cover



Concrete cover thickness.



Ht to layer



Specify height to the center line of each layer – h1, h2, h3. If you leave this field blank, no mesh is created.



Left end distance



Specify clearance distance for the left end. This is the dimension d1 in the pictureimage above.



Right end distance



Specify clearance distance for the right end. This is the dimension d2 in the image above.



Continuous



Specify whether the mesh is continuous over the wall panel length, or is used only at the end(s) of the wall. The options are: •



Select Yes: Mesh extends the full length of the member



•



Select No: Mesh can be defined at each end using the L1 and L2 fields.



If any openings are present, the component will trim the mesh around the opening using the end distance (d1) dimension as a clearance. Left end length



If the mesh is used only at the ends of the wall, enter the length for the left end. (L1)



Right end length



If the mesh is used only at the ends of the wall, enter the length for the right end. (L2)



Cross bar location



Defines whether the crossing bars are located above or below the longitudinal bars.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



728



Wall panel (64)



Transverse straight bars



Specifies transverse straight reinforcing bars with varying spacing in the wall panel. Properties of wall transverse straight bars



•



Select the reinforcing bar size.



•



Specify the side clear cover.



•



Specify height to reinforcement level, h1, h2, h3. If h1, h2, or h3 is left blank, no reinforcing bar is created at that level.



•



Specify the end distance to the center line of the first reinforcing bar from each end.



•



Specify the quantity and spacing of reinforcing bars in zones next to each end.



•



If you need another group of reinforcing bars at each end, specify the quantity and spacing of reinforcing bars in the second group. If the second group is not required, enter 0 in the quantity field.



•



If reinforcing bars are required to extend the length of the wall panel, specify the maximum spacing allowed between end groups – Spacing in



Automated Reinforcement Layout



729



Wall panel (64)



the third group. If Spacing is left blank, there is no additional reinforcing bar between the end groups. NOTE At openings, this component adds reinforcing bars at each side of the opening using the side cover dimension as distance from the opening to the center line of the reinforcing bar. These reinforcing bars are in addition to the typical reinforcing bar. Bars direction Select an option to change the direction of the bars.



Transverse stirrups



On this tab you can define the distribution of the stirrups along the wall panel. You can define up to five zones for the distribution. If the selected wall panel is an insulated wall, Tekla Structures details the stirrups in the structural (thicker) wythe only. If both wythes are the same thickness, Tekla Structures details the stirrups in the same way in both wythes. Stirrup properties For each zone you can specify a different spacing of stirrups. Specify the end distance to the center line of the first stirrup from each end.



•



Define the spacing between two stirrups in each zone.



•



Define the number of reinforcing bars in each zone.



•



Select the bar size.



Stirrup type Select the stirrup type and enter needed dimensions.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



730



Wall panel (64)



Option



Description No stirrups



90-degree closed stirrup •



Specify the side clear cover.



•



Specify the top and bottom clear cover.



135-degree closed stirrup •



Specify the side clear cover.



•



Specify the top and bottom clear cover.



U bar pairs



NOTE • •



•



Specify the side clear cover.



•



Specify the top and bottom clear cover.



•



Specify the lap length



The component creates stirrups using the minimum CRSI bend diameter. At openings, this component adds a stirrup/bar each side of the opening using the top cover dimension as distance from the opening to the center line of the stirrup/bar. These stirrups are in addition to the typical stirrups/bar.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



731



Wall panel (64)



Same as left end Set this to Yes if stirrups are symmetric at both ends of the wall panel. Rebar grade Define the grade of the transverse stirrups. Stirrups direction Select an option to define the stirrup direction.



Notch opening



On the Notch opening tab you can specify reinforcement around different openings in a wall panel. Corner notch reinforcement Select a reinforcement scheme to apply around wall panel corner notches. The options are: Option



Description Diagonal reinforcement around the corner notches.



Parallel reinforcement around the corner notches.



Side/end notch reinforcement Select a reinforcement scheme to apply around the side and end notches of the wall panel. The options are:



Automated Reinforcement Layout



732



Wall panel (64)



Option



Description Diagonal reinforcement around the side or end notch.



Parallel reinforcement around the side or end notch.



Opening reinforcement Select a reinforcement scheme applied around openings. The options are: Option



Description Diagonal reinforcement around the opening.



Parallel reinforcement around the opening.



Notch/opening reinforcement properties Field Min notch dimension, D



Description Specify first the minimum dimension D beyond which reinforcement is applied. For example, if a D value of 2.00 is specified, component will not apply reinforcement parallel to that direction.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



733



Wall panel (64)



Default 6" (150 mm)



Field



Description



Default



Edge clearance, de



Specify the edge clearance from 1,50" (38 mm) the notch and edge of the wall panel.



Extension, L



Specify the extension of the reinforcing bar beyond a notch or re-entrant corner.



18" (450 mm)



This component checks that the L dimension specified is at least the minimum development length of the bar selected. If the L dimension specified cannot be achieved due to edge clearances, hooks are added automatically. Rebar size



Defines the size of the reinforcing bars around notches or openings.



#4 (M13)



Click button to select a reinforcing bar from the reinforcing bar catalog. Selecting a size will override the value in the Rebar grade field. Rebar grade



Field for defining the grade of A615 the reinforcing bars. This field cooperates with the Rebar size field.



If any of the straight or diagonal bars approaches closer to the concrete edge than de from the edge given L, the bar is bent as follows:



Automated Reinforcement Layout



734



Reinforcement Strand Layout (66)



3.16 Reinforcement Strand Layout (66) Reinforcement Strand Layout (66) creates straight or depressed prestress strands for flexural reinforcement in a beam. Objects created •



Straight and depressed prestress strands.



Use for Situation



Description Straight strands.



Selection order 1.



Select the beam.



See also Strand template (page 735) Strand pattern (page 736) Strand profile (page 737) Attributes (page 738)



Strand template



Use the Strand template tab to define the vertical strand positions with grid points in a beam in Reinforcement Strand Layout (66). Strands may only be located at the positions defined in this template.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



735



Reinforcement Strand Layout (66)



Grid spacing along X Use to define grid spacing values for the x axis. Strands are defined by their row and column number within the grid. Separate values with commas or spaces. The first value is the distance from the left edge of the spandrel. Each successive value is the distance to the next grid point. Grid spacing along Y Use to define grid spacing values for the y axis. Strands are defined by their row and column number within the grid. Separate values with commas or spaces. The first value is the distance from the the bottom edge of the spandrel. Each successive value is the distance to the next grid point. NOTE Use multiplier to define a repeating series of values. For example, 8*2 indicates eight holes with a two unit spacing.



Strand pattern



Use the Strand pattern tab to define the placement of the strands at the grid points in Reinforcement Strand Layout (66). Same as left Use to simplify the strand input. •



Select Yes to use the row and debond information of the left end for the strands at the right end of a strand.



•



Select No to define an alternate row and debond information at each end of a strand.



Strand pattern definitions Use the strand template positions in the strand grid to define the row and column for each end of the strand. Strands may have different grid row positions at each end, but a strand cannot cross grid columns. Field



Description



Left end - Row



Give the horizontal row number in the strand template for the left end of the strand.



Left end Debond



Give the debond length at the left end of the strand.



Right end Row



If Same as left is No, give the horizontal row number in the strand template for the right end of the strand.



Right end Debond



If Same as left is No, give the debond length at the right end of the strand.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



736



Reinforcement Strand Layout (66)



Field



Description



Columns



Give a list of one or more column numbers and/or column ranges in the strand template at which a strand should be generated.



Size



Select the size of the strands.



Grade



Select the strand grade.



Pull



Give the pull force of the strands.



Strand profile



Use the Strand profile tab to define the profile for strands in Reinforcement Strand Layout (66). Strand depression Strands can be straight or depressed. Use one or two control points to depress the strands. All strands use the same general profile. Option



Description Straight



Depressed in 1 point



Depressed in 2 points



Depressed in 2 fixed points



Automated Reinforcement Layout



737



Reinforcement Strand Layout (66)



Depress position Define the depress positions A and B either as a fixed distance or as a percentage of the member length. Strand ht @ position Define the height of the strand.



Attributes



Use the Attributes tab to define general strand attribute information for Reinforcement Strand Layout (66). Strands Field



Description



Serie



Series value.



Start number



A prefix and a starting number for creating a part position number.



Name



Strand name.



Class



Number of the class.



Automated Reinforcement Layout



738



Reinforcement Strand Layout (66)



4



CS Components



Topics This chapter contains the following topics: •



3D cut (10) (page 739)



•



Opening in wall (40) (page 741)



•



Rebar in beam (90) (page 748)



•



Border rebar for single edge (93) (page 767)



4.1 3D cut (10) The 3D cut (10) component creates a 3D cut to a concrete part. The cutplane is determined by picking three points on the (concrete) part edges. The cut direction can be set. Also an cut offset can be set. Use for Situation



More information This component creates a cut through three points. The side to be removed can be defined.



Before you start Before applying the macro, create the following part: •



Concrete part (panel, column, strip footing)



CS Components



739



3D cut (10)



Defining properties The component contains only one tab, named Picture. Tab



Content



Picture



See also



Defining the cut direction. 3D cut (10): Picture Possibly set an cutplane tab (page 740) offset.



Picking order 1.



Concrete part



2.



Three points to determine the cut plane.



3D cut (10): Picture tab You can define the following settings on the Picture tab. Cut type Option



Description



Cut right



The parts’ right side from the cut plane will be removed.



Cut left



The parts’ left side from the cut plane will be removed.



Fit plane



The removed part is the shortest part (from fit plane to part’s end).



No cut



No cut is applied.



Offset You can define the offset for the cut plane. The offset distance is always perpendicular to the cut plane.



CS Components



740



3D cut (10)



Explode component You can select to explode the component if you do not need to modify the component after applying it. If you plan to modify the component later, select not to explode it.



4.2 Opening in wall (40) Creates an opening in a concrete wall of adjustable size, shape and position. Can also add an insulation panel to the wall. Objects created •



Opening



•



Insulation (optional).



Use for Square or circular opening in a wall and adding insulation to the wall.



define rabbet



several openings



adding insulation



braced girders



Before you start Create the wall for example as a concrete panel or column.



CS Components



741



Opening in wall (40)



Defining properties Use the following tabs in component dialog box Tekla Structures Opening in wall (40) to define the components’ properties: Tab



Content



See also



Opening



Defining shape and size of Opening in wall the opening. Also (40): Opening tab horizontal and vertical (page 742) position can be defined.



Insulation



Defining insulation thickness. Also insulation offset and creation of partcut for insulation can be set.



Opening in wall (40): Insulation tab (page 748)



Parameters Defining to add insulation Opening in wall to the assembly (40): Parameters tab (page 748)



Opening in wall (40): Opening tab Use the Opening tab to define the shape and size of the opening: •



Type (page 742)



•



Horizontal position (page 743)



•



Vertical (page 744)



•



Horizontal offset, vertical offset (page 746)



•



Rabbet - side (page 746)



•



Cut - rotation (page 746)



•



Shape of the opening (page 747)



Type First you can define the type of the opening. The options are: •



Opening



•



Opening no rabbet



•



Opening with rabbet



•



Opening only outside



•



Opening only inside



CS Components



742



Opening in wall (40)



Opening



Opening with rabbet Opening only outside



Horizontal position The horizontal reference point for creating the opening can be selected from a picklist. In the table below are the available options. Option



Description



Example



Point is left side opening



The opening is created on the left side from the component insertion point.



Point is middle side opening



The middle of the opening is created from the component insertion point.



Point is right side opening



The opening is created on the right side from the component insertion point.



Start panel



The opening is created from the startpoint of the wall.



CS Components



743



Opening in wall (40)



Option



Description



Example



End panel



The opening is created from the endpoint of the wall.



Middle panel = left opening



The center of the wall is referencepoint. The opening is created to the left side.



Middle panel = middle opening



The center of the wall is referencepoint. The opening is also created from the middle.



Middle panel = right opening



The center of the wall is referencepoint. The opening is created to the right side.



Vertical The horizontal reference point for creating the opening can be selected from a picklist. In the table below are the available options. Option



Description



Example



Pos point bottom The opening is opening created on the left side from the component insertion point.



CS Components



744



Opening in wall (40)



Option



Description



Example



Point is middle opening



The middle of the opening is created from the component insertion point.



Pos point top opening



The opening is created on the right side from the component insertion point.



Bottom panel



The opening is created from the startpoint of the wall.



Top panel



The opening is created from the endpoint of the wall.



Middle panel = bottom opening



The center of the wall is referencepoint. The opening is created to the left side.



CS Components



745



Opening in wall (40)



Option



Description



Example



Middle panel = middle opening



The center of the wall is referencepoint. The opening is also created from the middle.



Middle panel = top opening



The center of the wall is referencepoint. The opening is created to the right side.



Horizontal offset, vertical offset The opening can be moved vertically and horizontally by using these two offset value fields.



Rabbet - side With this picture picklist you can define the side where the rabbet is created.



CS Components



746



Opening in wall (40)



Cut - rotation With this picture-picklist you can define the rotation of the cut.



Shape of the opening With the picklist you can choose the general shape of the opening in the wall. The default shape is a rectangular opening. The other shape is the circular shape.



CS Components



747



Opening in wall (40)



Opening in wall (40): Insulation tab On this tab you can add insulation to the wall. The thickness of the insulation can be defined. The maximum dimensions can be adjusted with the Offset value fields. You can choose to create a partcut in the wall for the insulation. The option ’Cut opening size’ can be used to define if the insulation should be cut at the opening in the wall.



Opening in wall (40): Parameters tab This tab contains only one option: create assembly panel insulation. Possiblilty to weld the insulation to the panel to get an assembly. Three options available: ’Default’, ’Yes’ and ’No’. ’Default’-option is same as ’Yes’-option.



4.3 Rebar in beam (90) The Rebar in beam (90) component adds reinforcement bars to concrete beams. Parts created Complete reinforcement structure: stirrups and perpendicular rebars are created in the concrete part.



CS Components



748



Rebar in beam (90)



Use for Situation



More information Rebars in concrete beam.



Rebars in a concrete column.



Do not use for Use this component to add reinforcement bars to a concrete part. Before you start Before the component can be created, you need to create a concrete part first. Defining properties Use the following tabs in component dialog box Tekla Structures Rebar in beam (90) to define the properties of the components: CS Components



749



Rebar in beam (90)



Tab



Content



Primary bottom bars



See also



The properties of the Primary bottom lower reinforcing bars are bars (page 751) defined on this tab. Grade, diameter and extended ways of defining the shape of the bars can be defined.



Primary top The properties of the Primary top bars bars upper reinforcing bars are (page 757) defined on this tab. Side left



Horizontal rebars, left side.



Side left (page 757)



Side right



Horizontal rebars, right side.



Side right (page 758)



Stirrups



Stirrups in first section of the concrete part.



Stirrups (page 759)



Stirrup spacing



Defining the stirrup Stirrup spacing spacing in the first section (page 763) of the concrete part.



Stirrups 2



Stirrups in second section Stirrups 2 of the concrete part. (page 764) Useful when part contains part cut(s).



Stirrup spacing 2



Defining the stirrup spacing in the second section of the concrete part.



Stirrups 3



Stirrups in thrid section of Stirrups 3 the concrete part. Useful (page 765) when part contains part cut(s).



Stirrup spacing 3



Defining the stirrup spacing in the third section of the concrete part.



Advanced



Tab for defining comment, Advanced name, class,prefix and (page 765) startnumbers for the various rebar profiles.



Configurati on



Defining the bending radius. There are three options: (1) Fixed diameter, (2) From



CS Components



750



Stirrup spacing 2 (page 765)



Stirrup spacing 3 (page 765)



Configuration (page 766)



Rebar in beam (90)



Tab



Content configuration file and (3) Relative from diameter.



See also



Primary bottom bars On this tab the bottom main reinforcing bars are defined.



Grade Input field for defining the grade of the main bottom reinforcing bars. This field cooperates with the Size-field.



Size This field defines the size (diameter) of the main bottom reinforcing bars. Pressing the Browse-button right of the field will open the Select Reinforcing Bar dialog box. In the dialog box you can select the grade and the accompanying diameter. NOTE



Selecting a size will override the value in the Grade-field above.



End conditions left Picklist to define the rebars’ end condition on the left side. The options are: Picklist item



Example



Default



90 Degree



135 Degree



CS Components



751



Rebar in beam (90)



Picklist item



Example



180



-180



-135



-90



-45



45



End conditions right Same as End conditions left (page 751), but now for the right side of the bottom main rebars.



Bend lengths left Defines the length of the left end-extension.



Bend lengths right Defines the length of the right end-extension.



CS Components



752



Rebar in beam (90)



Bar not to create Picklist to define which rebar should not be created. The options are: Picklist Item



Example _ O _ O _ O _ O _ O _ _ . _ O _ O _ O _ . _ _ O _ O _ O _ O _ . _ _ . _ O _ O _ O _ . _



Creation method This field defines the way the rebars are created. There are three options: Option No rebars



Description No bottom rebars are created.



CS Components



753



Rebar in beam (90)



Option



Description



Number of bars



A fixed numer of bars is created. The spacing between the bars is automatically calculated.



By spacing



A accompanying field becomes active. The entered value is the fixed spacing for the rebars. The number of rebars is calculated automatically.



Positioning and distances In the right upper side of this tab a picture and some picklists are displayed. These fields and lists are to define the position and de rebar distances. The distance fields are used for defining the size of the rebars. The picklists are for positioning. Below some examples for the positioning rebars on the left side: Picklist item



Decription



Example



The part edge is normative for positioning the rebar. The concrete parts’ reference point is normative for positioning the rebar. The picked poition is normative. The edge of the top part cut is normative for positioning the rebar. The edge of the bottom part cut is normative for positioning the rebar. The centerline of the concrete part is normative for positioning the rebar.



CS Components



754



Rebar in beam (90)



Picklist item



Decription



Example



Shape and pattern The picklists and input fields are used to define the rebar shape, rebar pattern and rebar distribution.



In the left bottom side of the tab, some picklists are available for defining the shape and distribution of the bottom rebars. A - Shape of rebar These picklists define the common shape of the rebars on both ends of the concrete part. For some shapes distances can be entered (B). B - Distance fields These distance fields only apply for two rebar shapes (A). C - Rebar pattern Picklist for defining the rebar pattern. The picklist contains six options:



CS Components



755



Rebar in beam (90)



D - Consider part cuts in longitudinal direction This picklist defines if part cuts in the concrete part should be taken into account when positioning the rebars. Picklist item



Example



E - Consider part cuts in vertical direction These picklists contain options for defining if rebar shape should consider the partcuts in vertical direction. For both top side and bottom side the placing can be defined. Examples:



CS Components



756



Rebar in beam (90)



Picklist item



Example



Primary top bars This tab defines the top rebars in the concrete part. The picklists and input fields are similar to the Primary bottom bars tab. See Primary bottom bars (page 751). Example of Primary top bars:



Side left The rebars which can be created with the Side left tab are placed in longitudinal direction (just as the Primary bars), but now the bends are created horizontally. The options on this tab (defining rebar shape, dimensions, number of bars and rebar distribution) are similar to the options on the Primary bottom bars tab. See Primary bottom bars (page 751). Examples of rebars which can be created with this tab:



CS Components



757



Rebar in beam (90)



CS Components



758



Rebar in beam (90)



Side right Similar to the Side left tab, but now the reference is the parts’ right side. For more information about the options on this tab, see Primary bottom bars (page 751).



Stirrups The Stirrups tab is used to define the dimensions of the stirrups. In the picture below, the options are grouped.



CS Components



759



Rebar in beam (90)



Section A - Stirrup dimensions The options in this group are the same as on the Primary bottom bars tab. For more information, see the following links: •



Grade (page 751)



•



Size (page 751)



•



End conditions left (page 751)



•



End conditions right (page 752)



•



Bend lengths left (page 752)



•



Bend lengths right (page 752)



Section B - Stirrup dimensions One input field is available for defining a fixed distance from concrete parts’ bottom side to bottom side of stirrup. Note: this offset is normative. The input fields in the bottom side of this section are for defining the offset, width and height of the stirrups. Section C - Stirrup shape In this section the general shape of the stirrups is defined. First there is the Create stirrups option. This picklist has two options: •



No stirrups - No stirrups are created



•



Create stirrups - Stirrups are created



The general shape of the stirrup can be defined. You can choose a shape from the picklist: Picklist item



Description



Example



No stirrups are created



CS Components



760



Rebar in beam (90)



Picklist item



Description



Example



U-shape stirrups



C-shape inside



Closed box



Closed box overlap



Divided stirrup



Divided stirrups overlap



CS Components



761



Rebar in beam (90)



Picklist item



Description



Example



Double U-shape



Single U-shape left



Single U-shape right



Stirrup rotation The rotation of the stirrups can be set with below picklist. The picklist contains four options: each option will rotate the stirrup 90 degrees couterclockwise.



CS Components



762



Rebar in beam (90)



Stirrup spacing This tab is used to define the distribution of the stirrups along the concrete part. You can define six zones for the distribution. For each zone you can set a number of stirrups. The distance between the stirrups can be defined in two ways: •



Fixed spacing between each stirrup.



•



Distance between outer stirrups. (Spacing is then calculated from this distance divided by the number of stirrups.)



Examples: Picklist item



Example



Stirrup reference The reference for the stirrups can be defined with the picklists. For both ends the reference can be set. See Positioning and distances (page 754) for more information.



Omit stirrups This picklist allows you to omit stirrups.



The picklist has four options:



CS Components



763



Rebar in beam (90)



Picklist item



Example



Stirrups 2 This tab can be used if the shape of the concrete part is not uniform. For example, if a part cut is applied, you may need different stirrups on that area. This tab can be used to define a second group of stirrups. See Stirrups (page 759) for more information.



Stirrups 2 Stirrups



CS Components



764



Rebar in beam (90)



Stirrup spacing 2 This tab defines the spacing of the second group of stirrups. For the options on this tab, see Stirrups (page 759).



Stirrups 3 This tab defines a thrid group of stirrups. You may need this tab in case the concrete part contains multiple part cuts. For each area, the properties of the stirrups can be configured. See Stirrups (page 759) for more information. Example:



Stirrups 2 Stirrups Stirrups 3



Stirrup spacing 3 This tab defines the spacing of the third group of stirrups. For the options on this tab, see Stirrups (page 759).



CS Components



765



Rebar in beam (90)



Advanced On this tab you can add extra information to the rebar profiles. The following information can be added: •



Comment



•



Name Rebar profile



Default Name



Main bottom rebars



RB



Main top rebars



RB



Side left



RB



Side right



RB



Stirrups



STIRRUP



Stirrups2



STIRRUP



Stirrups3



STIRRUP



•



Class If the Class fields are left blank, then the following default classes will be used: Rebar profile



Default Class



Main bottom rebars



201



Main top rebars



202



Side left



203



Side right



204



Stirrups



301



Stirrups2



302



Stirrups3



303



•



Series If this field is left blank, the prefix will be empty for all rebar profiles.



•



Start number If this field is left blank, Tekla Structtures will use ’1’ as default start number for all rebar profiles.



Configuration On this tab you can define the bending radius for the rebar profiles. Also the general rotation of the complete reinforcement can be defined.



CS Components



766



Rebar in beam (90)



Bending radius The bending radius can be set separately for the main reinforcing bars and the stirrups. Furthermore the radius can be set separately for the main bends and the hook-bends. The bending radius can be determined in three ways: Picklist item rebar_database.inp



Description The bending radius is determined from a configuration file rebar_database.inp. This file is located in the profil folder.



Relative to diameter For this option the radius is calculated by multiplying the reinforcing bar diameter with the entered coefficient. Bending radius



Use this option to use a fixed value for the bending radius.



Rotation The picklist determines the orientation of the complete rebar structure in the concrete part. The picklist contain four options, each item representents a 90 degree rotation.



4.4 Border rebar for single edge (93) The Border rebar for single edge (93) component creates hairpin rebars in a concrete panel or wall. Parts created Hairpin rebars. Use for Use this component for creating hairpin rebars in a concrete panel.



CS Components



767



Border rebar for single edge (93)



default beam



default panel



border reinforcing bars default floor Before you start Before applying the component, the following parts must be created: •



Concrete panel or wall



Defining properties Use the following tabs in component dialog box Tekla Structures Border rebar for single edge (93) to define the properties of the component: Tab



Content



See also



Pins



The properties of the lower reinforcing bars are defined on this tab. Grade, diameter and extended ways of defining the shape of the bars can be defined



Pins (page 769)



Pin spacing



Defining the profiles



Pin spacing (page 769)



Advanced



Stiffener properties



Advanced (page 770)



Configurati on



Defining the Bolt pattern



Configuration (page 770)



CS Components



768



Border rebar for single edge (93)



Pins On the Pins tab you can define the hairpin profile properties and the hairpin dimansions. Also the end conditions can be set.



For more information, see Primary bottom bars (page 751).



Pin spacing



This tab is used to define the distribution of the hairpins along the concrete part. You can define six zones for the distribution. For each zone you can set a



CS Components



769



Border rebar for single edge (93)



number of hairpins. The distance between the hairpins can be defined in two ways: •



Fixed spacing between each stirrup.



•



Distance between outer hairpins. (Spacing is then calculated from this distance divided by the number of hairpins).



For more information about Pin Spacing, see Stirrup spacing (page 763).



Advanced On this tab you can define additional information to the hairpins.



The following information can be added: •



Comment



•



Name



•



Class



•



Part Prefix



•



Start number



Configuration On this tab you can define



CS Components



770



Border rebar for single edge (93)



Extra rotation This picklist allows you to rotate the hairpin rebars. There are three options: No



Around X



Around Y



Bending radius sec Picklist to define how the bending radius should be calculated. For more information, see Bending radius (page 766).



Detect outside geometry This parameter can be used to detect part cuts in the concrete part. The search area is defined with two parameters: Distance in material and a Position in plane picklist. Use these parameters to define the reference for the rebars. See the examples below for more clarification: (The concrete panel has thickness 200 mm. The partcut depth is 100 mm.)



CS Components



771



Border rebar for single edge (93)



CS Components



772



Border rebar for single edge (93)



Draw geometry with profiles Picklist to define if geometry profiles should be created or not. These geometry profiles define the rebar insertion point, which is based on the values for Distance in material and can help setting up the rebar pattern.



CS Components



773



Border rebar for single edge (93)



Detect negative volume If a negative volumne is applied to the concrete panel, you can define is this negative volume should be recognised or not. In below example a Part Cut is added with depth of 110 mm. If the value field is set to 0, the rebars can not be placed correctly. If the value field is set equal or greater to the part cut depth (e.g. 110), the panel thickness will be recognised and the rebars are placed correctly.



Difference in thickness Difference in thickness =0 = 110



CS Components



774



Border rebar for single edge (93)



Draw axis The Draw axis-picklist has two options: Yes and No. If ’Yes’ is chosen, the component creates extra colored profiles. This can help to set up the component and gives more clearness in component orientation. If ’No’ is chosen, the extra colored profile are omitted.



CS Components



775



Border rebar for single edge (93)



5



Disclaimer



© 2017 Trimble Solutions Corporation and its licensors. All rights reserved. This Software Manual has been developed for use with the referenced Software. Use of the Software, and use of this Software Manual are governed by a License Agreement. Among other provisions, the License Agreement sets certain warranties for the Software and this Manual, disclaims other warranties, limits recoverable damages, defines permitted uses of the Software, and determines whether you are an authorized user of the Software. All information set forth in this manual is provided with the warranty set forth in the License Agreement. Please refer to the License Agreement for important obligations and applicable limitations and restrictions on your rights. Trimble does not guarantee that the text is free of technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Trimble reserves the right to make changes and additions to this manual due to changes in the software or otherwise. In addition, this Software Manual is protected by copyright law and by international treaties. Unauthorized reproduction, display, modification, or distribution of this Manual, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the full extent permitted by law. Tekla, Tekla Structures, Tekla BIMsight, BIMsight, Tekla Civil, Tedds, Solve, Fastrak and Orion are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Trimble Solutions Corporation in the European Union, the United States, and/or other countries. More about Trimble Solutions trademarks: http://www.tekla.com/ tekla-trademarks. Trimble is a registered trademark or trademark of Trimble Inc. in the European Union, in the United States and/or other countries. More about Trimble trademarks: http://www.trimble.com/trademarks.aspx. Other product and company names mentioned in this Manual are or may be trademarks of their respective owners. By referring to a third-party product or brand, Trimble does not intend to suggest an affiliation with or endorsement by such third party and disclaims any such affiliation or endorsement, except where otherwise expressly stated. Portions of this software: D-Cubed 2D DCM © 2010 Siemens Industry Software Limited. All rights reserved.



Disclaimer



776



Border rebar for single edge (93)



EPM toolkit © 1995-2006 Jotne EPM Technology a.s., Oslo, Norway. All rights reserved. Open Cascade Express Mesh © 2015 OPEN CASCADE S.A.S. All rights reserved. PolyBoolean C++ Library © 2001-2012 Complex A5 Co. Ltd. All rights reserved. FLY SDK - CAD SDK © 2012 VisualIntegrity™. All rights reserved. Teigha © 2002-2016 Open Design Alliance. All rights reserved. CADhatch.com © 2017. All rights reserved. FlexNet Publisher © 2014 Flexera Software LLC. All rights reserved. This product contains proprietary and confidential technology, information and creative works owned by Flexera Software LLC and its licensors, if any. Any use, copying, publication, distribution, display, modification, or transmission of such technology in whole or in part in any form or by any means without the prior express written permission of Flexera Software LLC is strictly prohibited. Except where expressly provided by Flexera Software LLC in writing, possession of this technology shall not be construed to confer any license or rights under any Flexera Software LLC intellectual property rights, whether by estoppel, implication, or otherwise. To see the third party open source software licenses, go to Tekla Structures, click File menu --> Help --> About Tekla Structures and then click the 3rd party licenses option. The elements of the software described in this Manual are protected by several patents and possibly pending patent applications in the United States and/or other countries. For more information go to page http:// www.tekla.com/tekla-patents.



Disclaimer



777



Border rebar for single edge (93)



Disclaimer



778



Border rebar for single edge (93)